FCC ID: I88P660HWTX 802.11g Wireless ADSL2+4 port Gateway

 

P-660H/HW/W-T Series ADSL 2+ Gateway Users Guide Version 3.40 7/2005 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Copyright Copyright 2005 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Copyright 2 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. IMPORTANT NOTE: FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. 3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ZyXEL Communications Corporation declared that Prestige 660HW-T1 is limited in CH1~11 from 2400 to 2483.5 MHz by specified firmware controlled in USA. Certifications Go to www.zyxel.com 1 Select your product from the drop-down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 2 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement 4 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Safety Warnings For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel can service the device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Use ONLY the dedicated power supply for your device. Connect the power cord or power adaptor to the right supply voltage (110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT use the device if the power supply is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power supply is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. Do NOT attempt to repair the power supply. Contact your local vendor to order a new power supply. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do NOT locate the product where anyone can walk on the power cord. If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical, gas or water pipes will be damaged. Do NOT install nor use your device during a thunderstorm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Do NOT store things on the device. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. 5 Safety Warnings P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. ZyXEL Limited Warranty 6 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL TELEPHONEA LOCATION SALES E-MAIL FAX CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS

(WORLDWIDE) support@zyxel.com.tw +886-3-578-3942 sales@zyxel.com.tw

+886-3-578-2439 CZECH REPUBLIC info@cz.zyxel.com info@cz.zyxel.com

+420 241 091 350

+420 241 091 359 WEB SITE FTP SITE www.zyxel.com www.europe.zyxel.com ftp.zyxel.com ftp.europe.zyxel.com www.zyxel.cz DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY support@zyxel.dk sales@zyxel.dk

+45 39 55 07 00

+45 39 55 07 07 www.zyxel.dk support@zyxel.fi sales@zyxel.fi

+358-9-4780-8411

+358-9-4780 8448 www.zyxel.fi info@zyxel.fr

+33 (0)4 72 52 97 97

+33 (0)4 72 52 19 20 www.zyxel.fr support@zyxel.de sales@zyxel.de

+49-2405-6909-0

+49-2405-6909-99 www.zyxel.de NORTH AMERICA support@zyxel.com sales@zyxel.com

+1-800-255-4101

+1-714-632-0882

+1-714-632-0858 support@zyxel.no sales@zyxel.no

+47 22 80 61 80

+47 22 80 61 81 support@zyxel.es sales@zyxel.es

+34 902 195 420

+34 913 005 345 support@zyxel.se sales@zyxel.se

+46 31 744 7700

+46 31 744 7701 NORWAY SPAIN SWEDEN 7 www.us.zyxel.com ftp.us.zyxel.com www.zyxel.no www.zyxel.es www.zyxel.se REGULAR MAIL ZyXEL Communications Corp. 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 - Modrany Cesk Republika ZyXEL Communications A/S Columbusvej 5 2860 Soeborg Denmark ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers Bat. 1 / C 69760 Limonest France ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH. Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146 Wuerselen Germany ZyXEL Communications Inc. 1130 N. Miller St. Anaheim CA 92806-2001 U.S.A. ZyXEL Communications A/S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway ZyXEL Communications Alejandro Villegas 33 1, 28043 Madrid Spain ZyXEL Communications A/S Sjporten 4, 41764 Gteborg Sweden Customer Support P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL TELEPHONEA LOCATION SALES E-MAIL FAX WEB SITE FTP SITE support@zyxel.co.uk UNITED KINGDOM sales@zyxel.co.uk

+44 (0) 1344 303044 08707 555779 (UK only)

+44 (0) 1344 303034 www.zyxel.co.uk ftp.zyxel.co.uk a. + is the (prefix) number you enter to make an international telephone call. REGULAR MAIL ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.,11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK) Customer Support 8 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 9 Customer Support P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table of Contents Copyright .................................................................................................................. 2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement ............... 3 Safety Warnings ....................................................................................................... 5 ZyXEL Limited Warranty.......................................................................................... 6 Customer Support.................................................................................................... 7 Table of Contents ................................................................................................... 10 List of Figures ........................................................................................................ 24 List of Tables .......................................................................................................... 32 Preface .................................................................................................................... 38 Introduction to DSL................................................................................................ 40 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige............................................................................. 42 1.1 Introducing the Prestige .....................................................................................42 1.2 Features .............................................................................................................42 1.2.1 Wireless Features (P-660HW/P-660W) ....................................................45 1.3 Applications for the Prestige ..............................................................................46 1.3.1 Protected Internet Access .........................................................................46 1.3.2 LAN to LAN Application ............................................................................46 1.4 Front Panel LEDs ...............................................................................................46 1.5 Hardware Connection ........................................................................................47 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator........................................................................ 48 2.1 Web Configurator Overview ...............................................................................48 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ..............................................................48 2.1.2 Resetting the Prestige ..............................................................................49 2.1.2.1 Using the Reset Button ...................................................................49 2.1.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ..............................................................50 2.2 Change Login Password ...................................................................................52 Table of Contents 10 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access......................................................................... 54 3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................54 3.1.1 Internet Access Wizard Setup ..................................................................54 Chapter 4 LAN Setup............................................................................................................... 62 4.1 LAN Overview ...................................................................................................62 4.1.1 LANs, WANs and the Prestige ..................................................................62 4.1.2 DHCP Setup .............................................................................................63 4.1.2.1 IP Pool Setup ..................................................................................63 4.1.3 DNS Server Address ................................................................................63 4.1.4 DNS Server Address Assignment .............................................................63 4.2 LAN TCP/IP ........................................................................................................64 4.2.1 IP Address and Subnet Mask ...................................................................64 4.2.1.1 Private IP Addresses .......................................................................65 4.2.2 RIP Setup .................................................................................................65 4.2.3 Multicast ....................................................................................................66 4.2.4 Any IP .......................................................................................................66 4.2.4.1 How Any IP Works ..........................................................................67 4.3 Configuring LAN ................................................................................................68 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 70 5.1 Wireless LAN Introduction .................................................................................70 5.2 Wireless Security Overview ...............................................................................70 5.2.1 Encryption .................................................................................................70 5.2.2 Authentication ...........................................................................................70 5.2.3 Restricted Access .....................................................................................71 5.2.4 Hide Prestige Identity ................................................................................71 5.3 The Main Wireless LAN Screen ........................................................................71 5.4 Configuring the Wireless Screen .......................................................................73 5.4.1 WEP Encryption ........................................................................................73 5.5 Configuring MAC Filters ..................................................................................75 5.6 Introduction to WPA .........................................................................................77 5.6.1 WPA-PSK Application Example ................................................................77 5.6.2 WPA with RADIUS Application Example ..................................................78 5.6.3 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants ............................................................79 5.7 Configuring IEEE 802.1x and WPA ...................................................................79 5.7.1 No Access Allowed or Authentication .......................................................80 5.7.2 Authentication Required: 802.1x ...............................................................80 5.7.3 Authentication Required: WPA .................................................................82 5.7.4 Authentication Required: WPA-PSK .........................................................84 11 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 5.8 Configuring Local User Authentication ..............................................................85 5.9 Configuring RADIUS .........................................................................................87 Chapter 6 WAN Setup.............................................................................................................. 90 6.1 WAN Overview ..................................................................................................90 6.1.1 Encapsulation ...........................................................................................90 6.1.1.1 ENET ENCAP .................................................................................90 6.1.1.2 PPP over Ethernet ..........................................................................90 6.1.1.3 PPPoA .............................................................................................90 6.1.1.4 RFC 1483 ........................................................................................91 6.1.2 Multiplexing ...............................................................................................91 6.1.2.1 VC-based Multiplexing ....................................................................91 6.1.2.2 LLC-based Multiplexing ...................................................................91 6.1.3 VPI and VCI ..............................................................................................91 6.1.4 IP Address Assignment ............................................................................91 6.1.4.1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation .....................91 6.1.4.2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation .................................92 6.1.4.3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation ..........................92 6.1.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ....................................................................92 6.1.6 NAT ...........................................................................................................92 6.2 Metric ................................................................................................................92 6.3 PPPoE Encapsulation ........................................................................................93 6.4 Traffic Shaping ...................................................................................................93 6.5 Zero Configuration Internet Access ....................................................................94 6.6 The Main WAN Screen ......................................................................................95 6.7 Configuring WAN Setup ....................................................................................95 6.8 Traffic Redirect ..................................................................................................98 6.9 Configuring WAN Backup ..................................................................................99 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens.................................................... 102 7.1 NAT Overview .................................................................................................102 7.1.1 NAT Definitions .......................................................................................102 7.1.2 What NAT Does ......................................................................................103 7.1.3 How NAT Works .....................................................................................103 7.1.4 NAT Application ......................................................................................104 7.1.5 NAT Mapping Types ...............................................................................105 7.2 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT ..........................................................106 7.3 SUA Server ......................................................................................................106 7.3.1 Default Server IP Address ......................................................................106 7.3.2 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers ........................................106 7.3.3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA (Example) ..........................................107 Table of Contents 12 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7.4 Selecting the NAT Mode .................................................................................107 7.5 Configuring SUA Server Set ...........................................................................108 7.6 Configuring Address Mapping Rules ...............................................................110 7.7 Editing an Address Mapping Rule ................................................................... 111 Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup............................................................................................. 114 8.1 Dynamic DNS Overview .................................................................................114 8.1.1 DYNDNS Wildcard ..................................................................................114 8.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS ..............................................................................114 Chapter 9 Time and Date....................................................................................................... 116 9.1 Configuring Time and Date .............................................................................116 Chapter 10 Firewalls................................................................................................................ 118 10.1 Firewall Overview ..........................................................................................118 10.2 Types of Firewalls ..........................................................................................118 10.2.1 Packet Filtering Firewalls ......................................................................118 10.2.2 Application-level Firewalls ....................................................................119 10.2.3 Stateful Inspection Firewalls ................................................................119 10.3 Introduction to ZyXELs Firewall .....................................................................119 10.3.1 Denial of Service Attacks ......................................................................120 10.4 Denial of Service ............................................................................................120 10.4.1 Basics ...................................................................................................120 10.4.2 Types of DoS Attacks ...........................................................................121 10.4.2.1 ICMP Vulnerability ......................................................................123 10.4.2.2 Illegal Commands (NetBIOS and SMTP) ....................................123 10.4.2.3 Traceroute ...................................................................................124 10.5 Stateful Inspection ..........................................................................................124 10.5.1 Stateful Inspection Process ..................................................................125 10.5.2 Stateful Inspection and the Prestige .....................................................126 10.5.3 TCP Security .........................................................................................126 10.5.4 UDP/ICMP Security ..............................................................................127 10.5.5 Upper Layer Protocols ..........................................................................127 10.6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall ....................................127 10.6.1 Security In General ...............................................................................128 10.7 Packet Filtering Vs Firewall ............................................................................129 10.7.1 Packet Filtering: ....................................................................................129 10.7.1.1 When To Use Filtering .................................................................129 10.7.2 Firewall .................................................................................................129 10.7.2.1 When To Use The Firewall ..........................................................129 13 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration ......................................................................................... 132 11.1 Access Methods .............................................................................................132 11.2 Firewall Policies Overview .............................................................................132 11.3 Rule Logic Overview .....................................................................................133 11.3.1 Rule Checklist .......................................................................................133 11.3.2 Security Ramifications ..........................................................................133 11.3.3 Key Fields For Configuring Rules .........................................................134 11.3.3.1 Action ...........................................................................................134 11.3.3.2 Service .........................................................................................134 11.3.3.3 Source Address ...........................................................................134 11.3.3.4 Destination Address ....................................................................134 11.4 Connection Direction ......................................................................................134 11.4.1 LAN to WAN Rules ................................................................................134 11.4.2 Alerts .....................................................................................................135 11.5 Configuring Default Firewall Policy ..............................................................135 11.6 Rule Summary ..............................................................................................136 11.6.1 Configuring Firewall Rules ..................................................................138 11.7 Customized Services .....................................................................................141 11.8 Configuring A Customized Service ...............................................................141 11.9 Example Firewall Rule ....................................................................................142 11.10 Predefined Services .....................................................................................146 11.11 Anti-Probing .................................................................................................148 11.12 DoS Thresholds ...........................................................................................149 11.12.1 Threshold Values ................................................................................150 11.12.2 Half-Open Sessions ............................................................................150 11.12.2.1 TCP Maximum Incomplete and Blocking Time ..........................150 11.12.3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds .........................................................151 Chapter 12 Content Filtering .................................................................................................. 154 12.1 Content Filtering Overview ............................................................................154 12.2 The Main Content Filter Screen .....................................................................154 12.3 Configuring Keyword Blocking .....................................................................155 12.4 Configuring the Schedule .............................................................................156 12.5 Configuring Trusted Computers ...................................................................156 Chapter 13 Remote Management Configuration .................................................................. 158 13.1 Remote Management Overview ....................................................................158 13.1.1 Remote Management Limitations .........................................................158 13.1.2 Remote Management and NAT ............................................................159 13.1.3 System Timeout ...................................................................................159 Table of Contents 14 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 13.2 Telnet ..............................................................................................................159 13.3 FTP ................................................................................................................160 13.4 Web ................................................................................................................160 13.5 Configuring Remote Management ................................................................160 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ......................................................................... 162 14.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play .............................................................162 14.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP? ........................................................162 14.1.2 NAT Traversal .......................................................................................162 14.1.3 Cautions with UPnP ..............................................................................163 14.2 UPnP and ZyXEL ...........................................................................................163 14.2.1 Configuring UPnP ................................................................................163 14.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ............................................................164 14.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ...........................................................168 Chapter 15 Logs Screens........................................................................................................ 176 15.1 Logs Overview ..............................................................................................176 15.1.1 Alerts and Logs .....................................................................................176 15.2 Configuring Log Settings ...............................................................................176 15.3 Displaying the Logs .......................................................................................178 15.4 SMTP Error Messages ...................................................................................179 15.4.1 Example E-mail Log ..............................................................................180 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup.............................................. 182 16.1 Media Bandwidth Management Overview .....................................................182 16.2 Bandwidth Classes and Filters .......................................................................182 16.3 Proportional Bandwidth Allocation .................................................................183 16.4 Bandwidth Management Usage Examples ....................................................183 16.4.1 Application-based Bandwidth Management Example ..........................183 16.4.2 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example .................................183 16.4.3 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example .......184 16.5 Scheduler .......................................................................................................185 16.5.1 Priority-based Scheduler ......................................................................185 16.5.2 Fairness-based Scheduler ....................................................................185 16.6 Maximize Bandwidth Usage ...........................................................................185 16.6.1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non-Bandwidth Class Traffic ........................185 16.6.2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example ..................................................186 16.7 Bandwidth Borrowing .....................................................................................187 16.7.1 Maximize Bandwidth Usage With Bandwidth Borrowing ......................187 16.8 The Main Media Bandwidth Management Screen ........................................188 15 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 16.9 Configuring Summary ...................................................................................188 16.10 Configuring Class Setup ............................................................................190 16.10.1 Media Bandwidth Management Class Configuration ........................190 16.10.2 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics .........................................193 16.11 Bandwidth Monitor .....................................................................................194 Chapter 17 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 196 17.1 Maintenance Overview ...................................................................................196 17.2 System Status Screen ...................................................................................196 17.2.1 System Statistics ...................................................................................198 17.3 DHCP Table Screen ......................................................................................200 17.4 Any IP Table Screen ......................................................................................201 17.5 Wireless Screen ............................................................................................201 17.5.1 Association List ....................................................................................201 17.6 Diagnostic Screens .......................................................................................202 17.6.1 General Diagnostic ..............................................................................202 17.6.2 DSL Line Diagnostic ...........................................................................203 17.7 Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................205 Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT ............................................................................................ 208 18.1 SMT Introduction ............................................................................................208 18.1.1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet .........................................208 18.1.2 Entering Password ................................................................................208 18.1.3 Prestige SMT Menus Overview ............................................................209 18.2 Navigating the SMT Interface .........................................................................210 18.2.1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary ..............................211 18.3 Changing the System Password ....................................................................212 Chapter 19 Menu 1 General Setup ......................................................................................... 214 19.1 General Setup ................................................................................................214 19.2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 ....................................................................214 19.2.1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS .................................................215 Chapter 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup ................................................................................ 218 20.1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup ................................................................218 20.2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2 ................................................................218 20.2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup ...........................................................................219 Table of Contents 16 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Chapter 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup ............................................................................................... 222 21.1 LAN Setup ......................................................................................................222 21.1.1 General Ethernet Setup ........................................................................222 21.2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup ..............................................................223 21.3 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP ................................................................223 Chapter 22 Wireless LAN Setup ............................................................................................. 226 22.1 Wireless LAN Overview .................................................................................226 22.2 Wireless LAN Setup .......................................................................................226 22.2.1 Wireless LAN MAC Address Filter ........................................................227 Chapter 23 Internet Access .................................................................................................... 230 23.1 Internet Access Overview ..............................................................................230 23.2 IP Policies ......................................................................................................230 23.3 IP Alias ...........................................................................................................230 23.4 IP Alias Setup .................................................................................................231 23.5 Route IP Setup ...............................................................................................232 23.6 Internet Access Configuration ........................................................................233 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration ............................................................................... 236 24.1 Remote Node Setup Overview .......................................................................236 24.2 Remote Node Setup .......................................................................................236 24.2.1 Remote Node Profile ............................................................................236 24.2.2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios ...........................................237 24.2.2.1 Scenario 1: One VC, Multiple Protocols ......................................237 24.2.2.2 Scenario 2: One VC, One Protocol (IP) ......................................237 24.2.2.3 Scenario 3: Multiple VCs .............................................................237 24.2.3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol .........................................................239 24.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ...........................................................240 24.3.1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses ...................................................241 24.4 Remote Node Filter ........................................................................................242 24.5 Editing ATM Layer Options ............................................................................243 24.5.1 VC-based Multiplexing (non-PPP Encapsulation) ................................243 24.5.2 LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation ....................................243 24.5.3 Advance Setup Options ........................................................................244 Chapter 25 Static Route Setup ............................................................................................... 246 25.1 IP Static Route Overview ...............................................................................246 17 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 25.2 Configuration ..................................................................................................246 Chapter 26 Bridging Setup ..................................................................................................... 250 26.1 Bridging in General ........................................................................................250 26.2 Bridge Ethernet Setup ....................................................................................250 26.2.1 Remote Node Bridging Setup ...............................................................250 26.2.2 Bridge Static Route Setup .....................................................................252 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................... 254 27.1 Using NAT ......................................................................................................254 27.1.1 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT ..............................................254 27.2 Applying NAT .................................................................................................254 27.3 NAT Setup ......................................................................................................256 27.3.1 Address Mapping Sets ..........................................................................256 27.3.1.1 SUA Address Mapping Set .........................................................257 27.3.1.2 User-Defined Address Mapping Sets ..........................................258 27.3.1.3 Ordering Your Rules ....................................................................259 27.4 Configuring a Server behind NAT ..................................................................260 27.5 General NAT Examples ..................................................................................261 27.5.1 Example 1: Internet Access Only ..........................................................262 27.5.2 Example 2: Internet Access with an Inside Server ...............................262 27.5.3 Example 3: Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers .............263 27.5.4 Example 4: NAT Unfriendly Application Programs ...............................267 Chapter 28 Enabling the Firewall ........................................................................................... 270 28.1 Remote Management and the Firewall ..........................................................270 28.2 Access Methods .............................................................................................270 28.3 Enabling the Firewall ......................................................................................270 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration.............................................................................................. 272 29.1 About Filtering ................................................................................................272 29.1.1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige .......................................................273 29.2 Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige .........................................................274 29.3 Filter Rules Summary Menus .........................................................................275 29.4 Configuring a Filter Rule ................................................................................276 29.4.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule .................................................................................277 29.4.2 Generic Filter Rule ................................................................................279 29.5 Filter Types and NAT .....................................................................................281 29.6 Example Filter ................................................................................................281 Table of Contents 18 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 29.7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults ............................................................283 29.7.1 Ethernet Traffic .....................................................................................284 29.7.2 Remote Node Filters .............................................................................284 Chapter 30 SNMP Configuration ............................................................................................ 286 30.1 About SNMP ..................................................................................................286 30.2 Supported MIBs ............................................................................................287 30.3 SNMP Configuration ......................................................................................287 30.4 SNMP Traps ...................................................................................................288 Chapter 31 System Security ................................................................................................... 290 31.1 System Security .............................................................................................290 31.1.1 System Password .................................................................................290 31.1.2 Configuring External RADIUS Server ...................................................290 31.1.3 IEEE 802.1x ..........................................................................................292 31.2 Creating User Accounts on the Prestige ........................................................294 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis .................................................................... 296 32.1 Overview ........................................................................................................296 32.2 System Status ................................................................................................296 32.3 System Information ........................................................................................298 32.3.1 System Information ...............................................................................298 32.3.2 Console Port Speed ..............................................................................299 32.4 Log and Trace ................................................................................................300 32.4.1 Viewing Error Log .................................................................................300 32.4.2 Syslog and Accounting .........................................................................301 32.5 Diagnostic ......................................................................................................303 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance ................................................. 306 33.1 Filename Conventions ...................................................................................306 33.2 Backup Configuration .....................................................................................307 33.2.1 Backup Configuration ...........................................................................307 33.2.2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line ..............................308 33.2.3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line .........................308 33.2.4 GUI-based FTP Clients .........................................................................309 33.2.5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations .............................309 33.2.6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP .......................................................310 33.2.7 TFTP Command Example ....................................................................310 33.2.8 GUI-based TFTP Clients ......................................................................310 19 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 33.3 Restore Configuration ....................................................................................311 33.3.1 Restore Using FTP ...............................................................................311 33.3.2 Restore Using FTP Session Example ..................................................312 33.4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files .................................................313 33.4.1 Firmware File Upload ............................................................................313 33.4.2 Configuration File Upload .....................................................................313 33.4.3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example ................314 33.4.4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload ...................................315 33.4.5 TFTP File Upload ..................................................................................315 33.4.6 TFTP Upload Command Example ........................................................316 Chapter 34 System Maintenance............................................................................................ 318 34.1 Command Interpreter Mode ...........................................................................318 34.2 Call Control Support .......................................................................................319 34.2.1 Budget Management ............................................................................319 34.3 Time and Date Setting ....................................................................................320 34.3.1 Resetting the Time ................................................................................322 Chapter 35 Remote Management ........................................................................................... 324 35.1 Remote Management Overview .....................................................................324 35.2 Remote Management .....................................................................................324 35.2.1 Remote Management Setup .................................................................324 35.2.2 Remote Management Limitations .........................................................325 35.3 Remote Management and NAT ......................................................................326 35.4 System Timeout .............................................................................................326 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing.................................................................................................. 328 36.1 IP Policy Routing Overview ............................................................................328 36.2 Benefits of IP Policy Routing ..........................................................................328 36.3 Routing Policy ................................................................................................328 36.4 IP Routing Policy Setup .................................................................................329 36.5 Applying an IP Policy .....................................................................................332 36.5.1 Ethernet IP Policies ..............................................................................332 36.6 IP Policy Routing Example .............................................................................333 Chapter 37 Call Scheduling .................................................................................................... 338 37.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................338 Table of Contents 20 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Chapter 38 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 342 38.1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige .................................................................342 38.2 Problems with the LAN ...................................................................................342 38.3 Problems with the WAN .................................................................................343 38.4 Problems Accessing the Prestige ..................................................................344 38.4.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ..........................344 38.4.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers ..............................................344 38.4.1.2 JavaScripts ..................................................................................347 38.4.1.3 Java Permissions ........................................................................349 38.4.2 ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer ....................................................351 Appendix A Product Specifications ....................................................................................... 354 Appendix B Wall-mounting Instructions................................................................................. 358 Appendix C Setting up Your Computers IP Address............................................................ 360 Windows 95/98/Me................................................................................................. 360 Windows 2000/NT/XP ............................................................................................ 363 Macintosh OS 8/9................................................................................................... 368 Macintosh OS X ..................................................................................................... 370 Linux....................................................................................................................... 371 Appendix D IP Subnetting ........................................................................................................ 376 IP Addressing......................................................................................................... 376 IP Classes .............................................................................................................. 376 Subnet Masks ........................................................................................................ 377 Subnetting .............................................................................................................. 377 Example: Two Subnets .......................................................................................... 378 Example: Four Subnets.......................................................................................... 380 Example Eight Subnets.......................................................................................... 381 Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks. .................................................. 382 Appendix E Boot Commands .................................................................................................. 384 Appendix F Command Interpreter........................................................................................... 386 21 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Command Syntax................................................................................................... 386 Command Usage ................................................................................................... 386 Appendix G Firewall Commands ............................................................................................. 388 Appendix H NetBIOS Filter Commands .................................................................................. 394 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 394 Display NetBIOS Filter Settings ............................................................................. 394 NetBIOS Filter Configuration.................................................................................. 395 Appendix I Splitters and Microfilters ..................................................................................... 398 Connecting a POTS Splitter ................................................................................... 398 Telephone Microfilters ............................................................................................ 398 Prestige With ISDN ................................................................................................ 399 Appendix J PPPoE ................................................................................................................... 402 PPPoE in Action..................................................................................................... 402 Benefits of PPPoE.................................................................................................. 402 Traditional Dial-up Scenario................................................................................... 402 How PPPoE Works ................................................................................................ 403 Prestige as a PPPoE Client ................................................................................... 403 Appendix K Log Descriptions.................................................................................................. 404 Log Commands...................................................................................................... 418 Log Command Example......................................................................................... 419 Appendix L Wireless LANs ...................................................................................................... 420 Wireless LAN Topologies ....................................................................................... 420 Channel.................................................................................................................. 422 RTS/CTS................................................................................................................ 422 Fragmentation Threshold ....................................................................................... 423 Preamble Type ....................................................................................................... 424 IEEE 802.1x ........................................................................................................... 425 RADIUS.................................................................................................................. 425 Types of Authentication.......................................................................................... 426 WPA ....................................................................................................................... 428 Table of Contents 22 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Security Parameters Summary .............................................................................. 429 Appendix M Internal SPTGEN .................................................................................................. 430 Internal SPTGEN Overview ................................................................................... 430 The Configuration Text File Format........................................................................ 430 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example............................................................ 431 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example ................................................................ 432 Command Examples.............................................................................................. 453 Index...................................................................................................................... 456 23 Table of Contents P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Protected Internet Access Applications ................................................................ 46 Figure 2 LAN-to-LAN Application Example ......................................................................... 46 Figure 3 Password Screen .................................................................................................. 49 Figure 4 Change Password at Login ................................................................................... 49 Figure 5 Web Configurator: Site Map Screen ................................................................... 50 Figure 6 Password .............................................................................................................. 52 Figure 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters ................................................... 54 Figure 8 Internet Connection with PPPoE ........................................................................... 55 Figure 9 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 ..................................................................... 56 Figure 10 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP ............................................................. 57 Figure 11 Internet Connection with PPPoA ......................................................................... 58 Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup: Third Screen ...................................................... 59 Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup: LAN Configuration ............................................ 59 Figure 14 Internet Access Wizard Setup: Connection Tests ............................................... 60 Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Addresses .............................................................................. 62 Figure 16 Any IP Example .................................................................................................. 67 Figure 17 LAN Setup ........................................................................................................... 68 Figure 18 Wireless LAN ...................................................................................................... 72 Figure 19 Wireless Security Methods ................................................................................. 73 Figure 20 Wireless Screen .................................................................................................. 74 Figure 21 MAC Filter ........................................................................................................... 76 Figure 22 WPA - PSK Authentication .................................................................................. 78 Figure 23 WPA with RADIUS Application Example2 .......................................................... 79 Figure 24 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Access Allowed ................................................ 80 Figure 25 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Authentication .................................................. 80 Figure 26 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: 802.1xl ................................................................... 81 Figure 27 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA ....................................................................... 83 Figure 28 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA:WPA-PSK ............................................................... 84 Figure 29 Local User Database .......................................................................................... 86 Figure 30 RADIUS .............................................................................................................. 87 Figure 31 Example of Traffic Shaping ................................................................................. 94 Figure 32 WAN ................................................................................................................... 95 Figure 33 WAN Setup (PPPoE) .......................................................................................... 96 Figure 34 Traffic Redirect Example ..................................................................................... 99 Figure 35 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup ................................................................................. 99 Figure 36 WAN Backup ....................................................................................................... 100 Figure 37 How NAT Works .................................................................................................. 104 Figure 38 NAT Application With IP Alias ............................................................................. 104 List of Figures 24 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 39 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example ............................................................... 107 Figure 40 NAT Mode ........................................................................................................... 108 Figure 41 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set ................................................................................... 109 Figure 42 Address Mapping Rules ...................................................................................... 110 Figure 43 Edit Address Mapping Rule .............................................................................. 112 Figure 44 Dynamic DNS ..................................................................................................... 115 Figure 45 Time and Date ..................................................................................................... 116 Figure 46 Prestige Firewall Application ............................................................................... 120 Figure 47 Three-Way Handshake ....................................................................................... 122 Figure 48 SYN Flood ........................................................................................................... 122 Figure 49 Smurf Attack ....................................................................................................... 123 Figure 50 Stateful Inspection ............................................................................................... 125 Figure 51 Firewall: Default Policy ........................................................................................ 135 Figure 52 Firewall: Rule Summary ..................................................................................... 137 Figure 53 Firewall: Edit Rule ............................................................................................... 139 Figure 54 Firewall: Customized Services ............................................................................ 141 Figure 55 Firewall: Configure Customized Services ........................................................... 142 Figure 56 Firewall Example: Rule Summary ....................................................................... 143 Figure 57 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address ............................................. 144 Figure 58 Edit Custom Port Example .................................................................................. 144 Figure 59 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Select Customized Services ................................. 145 Figure 60 Firewall Example: Rule Summary: My Service .................................................. 146 Figure 61 Firewall: Anti Probing .......................................................................................... 149 Figure 62 Firewall: Threshold .............................................................................................. 151 Figure 63 Content Filtering ................................................................................................. 154 Figure 64 Content Filter: Keyword ...................................................................................... 155 Figure 65 Content Filter: Schedule ..................................................................................... 156 Figure 66 Content Filter: Trusted ........................................................................................ 157 Figure 67 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network ......................................................... 159 Figure 68 Remote Management ......................................................................................... 160 Figure 69 Configuring UPnP ............................................................................................... 163 Figure 70 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication ................................. 165 Figure 71 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components .......... 165 Figure 72 Network Connections .......................................................................................... 166 Figure 73 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard .......................................... 167 Figure 74 Networking Services ........................................................................................... 168 Figure 75 Network Connections .......................................................................................... 169 Figure 76 Internet Connection Properties .......................................................................... 170 Figure 77 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings ........................................... 171 Figure 78 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add ................................... 171 Figure 79 System Tray Icon ................................................................................................ 172 Figure 80 Internet Connection Status .................................................................................. 172 Figure 81 Network Connections .......................................................................................... 173 25 List of Figures P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 82 Network Connections: My Network Places ......................................................... 174 Figure 83 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example ....................... 174 Figure 84 Log Settings ........................................................................................................ 177 Figure 85 View Logs ........................................................................................................... 179 Figure 86 E-mail Log Example ............................................................................................ 180 Figure 87 Application-based Bandwidth Management Example ......................................... 183 Figure 88 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example ............................................... 184 Figure 89 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example ..................... 184 Figure 90 Bandwidth Allotment Example ............................................................................ 186 Figure 91 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example ................................................................. 187 Figure 92 Media Bandwidth Mgnt. ..................................................................................... 188 Figure 93 Media Bandwidth Management: Summary ......................................................... 189 Figure 94 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Setup ..................................................... 190 Figure 95 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Configuration ......................................... 191 Figure 96 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics .......................................................... 193 Figure 97 Media Bandwidth Management: Monitor ........................................................... 194 Figure 98 System Status ..................................................................................................... 197 Figure 99 System Status: Show Statistics ........................................................................... 199 Figure 100 DHCP Table ...................................................................................................... 200 Figure 101 Any IP Table ...................................................................................................... 201 Figure 102 Association List ................................................................................................. 202 Figure 103 Diagnostic: General .......................................................................................... 203 Figure 104 Diagnostic: DSL Line ........................................................................................ 204 Figure 105 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................ 205 Figure 106 Network Temporarily Disconnected .................................................................. 206 Figure 107 Error Message .................................................................................................. 206 Figure 108 Login Screen ..................................................................................................... 209 Figure 109 Menu 23.1 Change Password ........................................................................... 212 Figure 110 Menu 1 General Setup ...................................................................................... 215 Figure 111 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS .................................................................. 216 Figure 112 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup .............................................................................. 218 Figure 113 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup ......................................................................... 219 Figure 114 Menu 3 LAN Setup ............................................................................................ 222 Figure 115 Menu 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup ........................................................................ 222 Figure 116 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup ................................................... 223 Figure 117 Menu 3.5 - Wireless LAN Setup ....................................................................... 226 Figure 118 Menu 3.5.1 WLAN MAC Address Filtering ........................................................ 228 Figure 119 IP Alias Network Example ................................................................................. 231 Figure 120 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Setup ................................................................. 231 Figure 121 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup ................................................................................ 232 Figure 122 Menu 1 General Setup ...................................................................................... 233 Figure 123 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup .......................................................................... 233 Figure 124 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup ........................................................................... 237 List of Figures 26 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 125 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile ...................................................................... 238 Figure 126 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ............................................ 240 Figure 127 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP/IP LAN-to-LAN Connection ........................... 242 Figure 128 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation) ............... 242 Figure 129 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation) ................. 243 Figure 130 Menu 11.6 for VC-based Multiplexing ............................................................... 243 Figure 131 Menu 11.6 for LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation .......................... 244 Figure 132 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile ....................................................................... 244 Figure 133 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options .................................................................. 245 Figure 134 Sample Static Routing Topology ....................................................................... 246 Figure 135 Menu 12 Static Route Setup ............................................................................. 247 Figure 136 Menu 12.1 IP Static Route Setup ...................................................................... 247 Figure 137 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route ....................................................................... 247 Figure 138 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile ....................................................................... 251 Figure 139 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ............................................ 251 Figure 140 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route ............................................................... 252 Figure 141 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access ........................................................ 255 Figure 142 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3 ....................................................................... 255 Figure 143 Menu 15 NAT Setup ........................................................................................ 256 Figure 144 Menu 15.1 Address Mapping Sets .................................................................... 257 Figure 145 Menu 15.1.255 SUA Address Mapping Rules .................................................. 257 Figure 146 Menu 15.1.1 First Set ........................................................................................ 258 Figure 147 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set ........................ 259 Figure 148 Menu 15.2 NAT Server Setup ........................................................................... 260 Figure 149 Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup ........................................................................ 261 Figure 150 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example ............................................................. 261 Figure 151 NAT Example 1 ................................................................................................. 262 Figure 152 Menu 4 Internet Access & NAT Example .......................................................... 262 Figure 153 NAT Example 2 ................................................................................................. 263 Figure 154 Menu 15.2.1 Specifying an Inside Server ......................................................... 263 Figure 155 NAT Example 3 ................................................................................................. 264 Figure 156 Example 3: Menu 11.3 ...................................................................................... 265 Figure 157 Example 3: Menu 15.1.1.1 ................................................................................ 265 Figure 158 Example 3: Final Menu 15.1.1 .......................................................................... 266 Figure 159 Example 3: Menu 15.2.1 ................................................................................... 266 Figure 160 NAT Example 4 ................................................................................................. 267 Figure 161 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule ........................................... 267 Figure 162 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1 Address Mapping Rules ............................................ 268 Figure 163 Menu 21.2 Firewall Setup ................................................................................. 271 Figure 164 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process .................................................................... 272 Figure 165 Filter Rule Process ............................................................................................ 273 Figure 166 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration ...................................................................... 274 Figure 167 NetBIOS_WAN Filter Rules Summary ............................................................. 274 27 List of Figures P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 168 NetBIOS_LAN Filter Rules Summary .............................................................. 275 Figure 169 IGMP Filter Rules Summary ............................................................................ 275 Figure 170 Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule ..................................................................... 277 Figure 171 Executing an IP Filter ........................................................................................ 279 Figure 172 Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule ................................................................... 280 Figure 173 Protocol and Device Filter Sets ......................................................................... 281 Figure 174 Sample Telnet Filter .......................................................................................... 282 Figure 175 Menu 21.1.6.1 Sample Filter ............................................................................ 282 Figure 176 Menu 21.1.6.1 Sample Filter Rules Summary .................................................. 283 Figure 177 Filtering Ethernet Traffic .................................................................................... 284 Figure 178 Filtering Remote Node Traffic ........................................................................... 284 Figure 179 SNMP Management Model ............................................................................... 286 Figure 180 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration .......................................................................... 288 Figure 181 Menu 23 System Security .............................................................................. 290 Figure 182 Menu 23.2 System Security: RADIUS Server ................................................... 291 Figure 183 Menu 23 System Security ................................................................................. 292 Figure 184 Menu 23.4 System Security: IEEE 802.1x ........................................................ 292 Figure 185 Menu 14 Dial-in User Setup .............................................................................. 295 Figure 186 Menu 14.1 Edit Dial-in User .............................................................................. 295 Figure 187 Menu 24 System Maintenance ......................................................................... 296 Figure 188 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status ......................................................... 297 Figure 189 Menu 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed ................................. 298 Figure 190 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance: Information ............................................... 299 Figure 191 Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance : Change Console Port Speed ................... 300 Figure 192 Menu 24.3 System Maintenance: Log and Trace ............................................. 300 Figure 193 Sample Error and Information Messages ......................................................... 301 Figure 194 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance: Syslog and Accounting ............................. 301 Figure 195 Syslog Example ................................................................................................ 302 Figure 196 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance : Diagnostic ................................................... 303 Figure 197 Telnet in Menu 24.5 ........................................................................................... 308 Figure 198 FTP Session Example ...................................................................................... 309 Figure 199 Telnet into Menu 24.6 ........................................................................................ 312 Figure 200 Restore Using FTP Session Example ............................................................... 312 Figure 201 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.1 Upload System Firmware .......................................... 313 Figure 202 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.2 System Maintenance ................................................. 314 Figure 203 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload ............................................... 315 Figure 204 Command Mode in Menu 24 ............................................................................. 318 Figure 205 Valid Commands ............................................................................................... 318 Figure 206 Menu 24.9 System Maintenance: Call Control .................................................. 319 Figure 207 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance: Budget Management ................................ 320 Figure 208 Menu 24 System Maintenance ......................................................................... 321 Figure 209 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting ............................... 321 Figure 210 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control ....................................................... 325 List of Figures 28 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 211 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup ..................................................................... 329 Figure 212 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup .................................................................. 330 Figure 213 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy .......................................................................... 331 Figure 214 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup ................................................... 333 Figure 215 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ............................................ 333 Figure 216 Example of IP Policy Routing ........................................................................... 334 Figure 217 IP Routing Policy Example ................................................................................ 335 Figure 218 IP Routing Policy Example ................................................................................ 336 Figure 219 Applying IP Policies Example ........................................................................... 336 Figure 220 Menu 26 Schedule Setup .................................................................................. 338 Figure 221 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup ....................................................................... 339 Figure 222 Applying Schedule Set(s) to a Remote Node (PPPoE) .................................... 340 Figure 223 Pop-up Blocker ................................................................................................. 345 Figure 224 Internet Options ............................................................................................... 345 Figure 225 Internet Options ................................................................................................ 346 Figure 226 Pop-up Blocker Settings ................................................................................... 347 Figure 227 Internet Options ................................................................................................ 348 Figure 228 Security Settings - Java Scripting ..................................................................... 349 Figure 229 Security Settings - Java .................................................................................... 350 Figure 230 Java (Sun) ......................................................................................................... 351 Figure 231 Internet Options Security .................................................................................. 352 Figure 232 Security Setting ActiveX Controls ..................................................................... 353 Figure 233 Wall-mounting Example .................................................................................... 358 Figure 234 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration ..................................................... 361 Figure 235 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address ......................................... 362 Figure 236 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration ............................ 363 Figure 237 Windows XP: Start Menu .................................................................................. 364 Figure 238 Windows XP: Control Panel .............................................................................. 364 Figure 239 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties ....................... 365 Figure 240 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties .............................................. 365 Figure 241 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties ......................................... 366 Figure 242 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties ...................................................... 367 Figure 243 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties ......................................... 368 Figure 244 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu ........................................................................ 369 Figure 245 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP ................................................................................ 369 Figure 246 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu ........................................................................... 370 Figure 247 Macintosh OS X: Network ................................................................................. 371 Figure 248 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices ........................................ 372 Figure 249 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General ................................................. 372 Figure 250 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS ............................................. 373 Figure 251 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate ................................. 373 Figure 252 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 .............................. 374 Figure 253 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 .................................. 374 29 List of Figures P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 254 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf ...................................................... 374 Figure 255 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card ................................................................ 375 Figure 256 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties ...................................................... 375 Figure 257 Option to Enter Debug Mode ............................................................................ 384 Figure 258 Boot Module Commands .................................................................................. 385 Figure 259 Connecting a POTS Splitter .............................................................................. 398 Figure 260 Connecting a Microfilter .................................................................................... 399 Figure 261 Prestige with ISDN ............................................................................................ 399 Figure 262 Single-Computer per Router Hardware Configuration ...................................... 403 Figure 263 Prestige as a PPPoE Client .............................................................................. 403 Figure 264 Displaying Log Categories Example ................................................................. 418 Figure 265 Displaying Log Parameters Example ................................................................ 418 Figure 266 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network ........................................ 420 Figure 267 Basic Service Set .............................................................................................. 421 Figure 268 Infrastructure WLAN ......................................................................................... 422 Figure 269 RTS/CTS .......................................................................................................... 423 Figure 270 Configuration Text File Format: Column Descriptions ....................................... 430 Figure 271 Invalid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example ....................................... 431 Figure 272 Valid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example ......................................... 431 Figure 273 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example ..................................................... 432 Figure 274 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example ........................................................... 432 List of Figures 30 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 31 List of Figures P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide List of Tables Table 1 ADSL Standards .................................................................................................... 42 Table 2 Front Panel LEDs .................................................................................................. 47 Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary .................................................................... 50 Table 4 Password ............................................................................................................... 53 Table 5 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters .................................................... 55 Table 6 Internet Connection with PPPoE .......................................................................... 56 Table 7 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 ...................................................................... 56 Table 8 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP ................................................................ 57 Table 9 Internet Connection with PPPoA ........................................................................... 58 Table 10 Internet Access Wizard Setup: LAN Configuration .............................................. 60 Table 11 LAN Setup ........................................................................................................... 68 Table 12 Wireless LAN ....................................................................................................... 72 Table 13 Wireless LAN ....................................................................................................... 74 Table 14 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................ 76 Table 15 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Access/Authentication ...................................... 80 Table 16 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: 802.1x .................................................................... 81 Table 17 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA ....................................................................... 83 Table 18 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA-PSK ............................................................... 84 Table 19 Local User Database ........................................................................................... 86 Table 20 RADIUS ............................................................................................................... 87 Table 21 WAN .................................................................................................................... 95 Table 22 WAN Setup .......................................................................................................... 96 Table 23 WAN Backup ....................................................................................................... 100 Table 24 NAT Definitions .................................................................................................... 102 Table 25 NAT Mapping Types ............................................................................................ 105 Table 26 Services and Port Numbers ................................................................................. 106 Table 27 NAT Mode ............................................................................................................ 108 Table 28 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set .................................................................................... 109 Table 29 Address Mapping Rules ...................................................................................... 110 Table 30 Edit Address Mapping Rule ................................................................................. 112 Table 31 Dynamic DNS ...................................................................................................... 115 Table 32 Time and Date ..................................................................................................... 117 Table 33 Common IP Ports ................................................................................................ 121 Table 34 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts .................................................................. 123 Table 35 Legal NetBIOS Commands ................................................................................. 123 Table 36 Legal SMTP Commands .................................................................................... 124 Table 37 Firewall: Default Policy ........................................................................................ 135 Table 38 Rule Summary ..................................................................................................... 137 List of Tables 32 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 39 Firewall: Edit Rule ................................................................................................ 140 Table 40 Customized Services ........................................................................................... 141 Table 41 Firewall: Configure Customized Services ............................................................ 142 Table 42 Predefined Services ........................................................................................... 146 Table 43 Firewall: Anti Probing ........................................................................................... 149 Table 44 Firewall: Threshold .............................................................................................. 152 Table 45 ............................................................................................................................. 154 Table 46 Content Filter: Keyword ....................................................................................... 155 Table 47 Content Filter: Schedule ...................................................................................... 156 Table 48 Content Filter: Trusted ......................................................................................... 157 Table 49 Remote Management .......................................................................................... 160 Table 50 Configuring UPnP ................................................................................................ 164 Table 51 Log Settings ......................................................................................................... 177 Table 52 View Logs ............................................................................................................ 179 Table 53 SMTP Error Messages ........................................................................................ 179 Table 54 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example ...................... 184 Table 55 Media Bandwidth Mgnt. ....................................................................................... 188 Table 56 Media Bandwidth Management: Summary .......................................................... 189 Table 57 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Setup ...................................................... 190 Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Configuration .......................................... 191 Table 59 Services and Port Numbers ................................................................................. 192 Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics ............................................................ 193 Table 61 Media Bandwidth Management: Monitor ............................................................. 194 Table 62 System Status ...................................................................................................... 197 Table 63 System Status: Show Statistics ........................................................................... 199 Table 64 DHCP Table ......................................................................................................... 200 Table 65 Any IP Table ........................................................................................................ 201 Table 66 Association List .................................................................................................... 202 Table 67 Diagnostic: General ............................................................................................. 203 Table 68 Diagnostic: DSL Line ........................................................................................... 204 Table 69 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................... 205 Table 70 SMT Menus Overview ......................................................................................... 209 Table 71 Navigating the SMT Interface .............................................................................. 210 Table 72 SMT Main Menu .................................................................................................. 211 Table 73 Main Menu Summary .......................................................................................... 211 Table 74 Menu 1 General Setup ........................................................................................ 215 Table 75 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS ..................................................................... 216 Table 76 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup ................................................................................ 218 Table 77 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup ........................................................................... 219 Table 78 DHCP Ethernet Setup ......................................................................................... 224 Table 79 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup ........................................................................................ 224 Table 80 Menu 3.5 - Wireless LAN Setup .......................................................................... 226 Table 81 Menu 3.5.1 WLAN MAC Address Filtering .......................................................... 228 33 List of Tables P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 82 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup ................................................................................... 232 Table 83 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ............................................................................ 234 Table 84 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile ......................................................................... 238 Table 85 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ............................................... 240 Table 86 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options ..................................................................... 245 Table 87 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route .......................................................................... 248 Table 88 Remote Node Network Layer Options: Bridge Fields .......................................... 251 Table 89 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route .................................................................. 252 Table 90 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3 ......................................................................... 256 Table 91 SUA Address Mapping Rules .............................................................................. 257 Table 92 Menu 15.1.1 First Set .......................................................................................... 259 Table 93 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set ........................... 260 Table 94 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu ...................................... 275 Table 95 Rule Abbreviations Used ..................................................................................... 276 Table 96 Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule ........................................................................ 277 Table 97 Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule ....................................................................... 280 Table 98 Filter Sets Table ................................................................................................... 283 Table 99 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration ............................................................................. 288 Table 100 SNMP Traps ...................................................................................................... 288 Table 101 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits ................................................................. 289 Table 102 Menu 23.2 System Security: RADIUS Server ................................................... 291 Table 103 Menu 23.4 System Security: IEEE 802.1x ......................................................... 293 Table 104 Menu 14.1 Edit Dial-in User ............................................................................... 295 Table 105 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance: Status ........................................................... 297 Table 106 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance: Information ................................................ 299 Table 107 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting ............................ 301 Table 108 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance Menu: Diagnostic .......................................... 304 Table 109 Filename Conventions ....................................................................................... 307 Table 110 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients ............................................... 309 Table 111 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients ............................................. 311 Table 112 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance: Budget Management ................................. 320 Table 113 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting ............................... 321 Table 114 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control ........................................................ 325 Table 115 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup ................................................................... 330 Table 116 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy .......................................................................... 331 Table 117 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup ......................................................................... 339 Table 118 Troubleshooting Starting Up Your Prestige ........................................................ 342 Table 119 Troubleshooting the LAN ................................................................................... 342 Table 120 Troubleshooting the WAN .................................................................................. 343 Table 121 Troubleshooting Accessing the Prestige ........................................................... 344 Table 122 Device ................................................................................................................ 354 Table 123 Firmware ............................................................................................................ 355 Table 124 Classes of IP Addresses ................................................................................... 376 List of Tables 34 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 125 Allowed IP Address Range By Class ................................................................. 377 Table 126 Natural Masks ................................................................................................ 377 Table 127 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ..................................................................... 378 Table 128 Two Subnets Example ....................................................................................... 378 Table 129 Subnet 1 ............................................................................................................ 379 Table 130 Subnet 2 ............................................................................................................ 379 Table 131 Subnet 1 ............................................................................................................ 380 Table 132 Subnet 2 ............................................................................................................ 380 Table 133 Subnet 3 ............................................................................................................ 380 Table 134 Subnet 4 ............................................................................................................ 381 Table 135 Eight Subnets .................................................................................................... 381 Table 136 Class C Subnet Planning ................................................................................... 381 Table 137 Class B Subnet Planning ................................................................................... 382 Table 138 Firewall Commands ........................................................................................... 388 Table 139 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings ......................................................................... 395 Table 140 System Maintenance Logs ................................................................................ 404 Table 141 System Error Logs ............................................................................................. 405 Table 142 Access Control Logs .......................................................................................... 405 Table 143 TCP Reset Logs ................................................................................................ 406 Table 144 Packet Filter Logs .............................................................................................. 406 Table 145 ICMP Logs ......................................................................................................... 407 Table 146 CDR Logs .......................................................................................................... 407 Table 147 PPP Logs ........................................................................................................... 407 Table 148 UPnP Logs ........................................................................................................ 408 Table 149 Content Filtering Logs ....................................................................................... 408 Table 150 Attack Logs ........................................................................................................ 409 Table 151 IPSec Logs ........................................................................................................ 410 Table 152 IKE Logs ............................................................................................................ 410 Table 153 PKI Logs ............................................................................................................ 413 Table 154 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes ........................................... 414 Table 155 802.1X Logs ...................................................................................................... 415 Table 156 ACL Setting Notes ............................................................................................. 416 Table 157 ICMP Notes ....................................................................................................... 416 Table 158 Syslog Logs ....................................................................................................... 417 Table 159 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types ................................................................... 417 Table 160 IEEE 802.11g ..................................................................................................... 424 Table 161 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types ......................................................... 428 Table 162 Wireless Security Relational Matrix ................................................................... 429 Table 163 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table .............. 432 Table 164 Menu 1 General Setup (SMT Menu 1) .............................................................. 433 Table 165 Menu 3 (SMT Menu 3 ) ...................................................................................... 433 Table 166 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (SMT Menu 4) .................................................. 436 Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12) ................................................................................... 438 35 List of Tables P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 168 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup (SMT Menu 15) .................................................... 442 Table 169 Menu 21.1 Filter Set #1 (SMT Menu 21.1) ........................................................ 444 Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) ........................................................ 447 Table 171 Menu 23 System Menus (SMT Menu 23) .......................................................... 452 Table 172 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control (SMT Menu 24.11) ......................... 453 Table 173 Command Examples ......................................................................................... 453 List of Tables 36 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 37 List of Tables P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the P-660H/HW/W T series ADSL 2+ gateway. P-660W and P-660HW come with biult-in IEEE 802.11g wireless capability allowing wireless connectivity. P-660H and P-660HW have a 4-port switch that allows you to connect up to 4 computers to the Prestige without purchasing a switch/hub. Note: Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. About This User's Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige for its various applications. The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator. The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator. Note: Use the web configurator, System Management Terminal (SMT) or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige. Not all features can be configured through all interfaces. Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters. Select or Choose means for you to use one predefined choices. The SMT menu titles and labels are in Bold Times New Roman font. Predefined field choices are in Bold Arial font. Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets. [ENTER] means the Enter, or carriage return key; [ESC] means the Escape key and [SPACE BAR] means the Space Bar. Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma. For example, click the Apple icon, Control Panels and then Modem means first click the Apple icon, then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem. For brevitys sake, we will use e.g., as a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., for that is or in other words throughout this manual. The P-600H/HW/W T series may be referred to as the Prestige in this Users Guide. Application graphics and screen shoots shown are for the P-660W model unless otherwise specified. Related Documentation Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents. Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. They contain connection information and instructions on getting started. Preface 38 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information. ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www.zyxel.com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation. User Guide Feedback Help us help you. E-mail all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters@zyxel.com.tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. Thank you. Graphics Icons Key Prestige Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Switch Router Wireless Signal 39 Preface P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Introduction to DSL DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) technology enhances the data capacity of the existing twisted-

pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices. While the wire itself can handle higher frequencies, the telephone switching equipment is designed to cut off signals above 4,000 Hz to filter noise off the voice line, but now everybody is searching for ways to get more bandwidth to improve access to the Web -

hence DSL technologies. There are actually seven types of DSL service, ranging in speeds from 16 Kbits/sec to 52 Mbits/sec. The services are either symmetrical (traffic flows at the same speed in both directions), or asymmetrical (the downstream capacity is higher than the upstream capacity). Asymmetrical services (ADSL) are suitable for Internet users because more information is usually downloaded than uploaded. For example, a simple button click in a web browser can start an extended download that includes graphics and text. As data rates increase, the carrying distance decreases. That means that users who are beyond a certain distance from the telephone companys central office may not be able to obtain the higher speeds. A DSL connection is a point-to-point dedicated circuit, meaning that the link is always up and there is no dialing required. Introduction to ADSL It is an asymmetrical technology, meaning that the downstream data rate is much higher than the upstream data rate. As mentioned, this works well for a typical Internet session in which more information is downloaded, for example, from Web servers, than is uploaded. ADSL operates in a frequency range that is above the frequency range of voice services, so the two systems can operate over the same cable. Introduction to DSL 40 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 41 Introduction to DSL P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige This chapter describes the key features and applications of your Prestige. 1.1 Introducing the Prestige The Prestige is an ADSL2+ gateway that allows super-fast, secure Internet access over analog

(POTS) or digital (ISDN) telephone lines (depending on your model). In the Prestige product name, H denotes an integrated 4-port switch (hub) and W denotes an included wireless LAN card that provides wireless connectivity. Models ending in 1, for example P-660W-T1, denote a device that works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). Models ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network). Models ending in 7 denote a device that works over T-ISDN (UR-2). Note: Only use firmware for your Prestiges specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige. The DSL RJ-11 (ADSL over POTS models) or RJ-45 (ADSL over ISDN models) connects to your ADSL-enabled telephone line. The Prestige is compatible with the ADSL/ADSL2/

ADSL2+ standards. Maximum data rates attainable by the Prestige for each standard are shown in the next table. Table 1 ADSL Standards DATA RATE STANDARD UPSTREAM ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2+

832 kbps 3.5Mbps 3.5Mbps DOWNSTREAM 8Mbps 12Mbps 24Mbps Note: The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable. Actual speeds attained also depend on the distance from your ISP, line quality, etc. 1.2 Features The following sections describe the features of the Prestige. Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 42 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: See the product specifications in the appendix for detailed features and standards support. High Speed Internet Access Your Prestige ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ router can support downstream transmission rates of up to 24Mbps and upstream transmission rates of 3.5Mbps. Actual speeds attained depend on the ADSL service you subscribed to, distance from your ISP, line quality, etc. Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you connect and turn on the Prestige, it automatically detects the Internet connection settings (such as the VCI/VPI numbers and the encapsulation method) from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes. In cases where additional account information (such as an Internet account user name and password) is required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP, you will be redirected to web screen(s) for information input or troubleshooting. Any IP The Any IP feature allows a computer to access the Internet and the Prestige without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet. Firewall The Prestige is a stateful inspection firewall with DoS (Denial of Service) protection. By default, when the firewall is activated, all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN. The Prestige firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection, DoS detection and prevention, real time alerts, reports and logs. Content Filtering Content filtering allows you to block access to forbidden Internet web sites, schedule when the Prestige should perform the filtering and give trusted LAN IP addresses unfiltered Internet access. Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet, thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails. Media Bandwidth Management ZyXELs Media Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth classes based on an application and/or subnet. You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity

(bandwidth budgets) to different bandwidth classes. 43 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Using the standard TCP/IP protocol, the Prestige and other UPnP enabled devices can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network. PPPoE (RFC2516) PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on the Prestige is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers. The Prestige also includes PPPoE idle time-out (the PPPoE connection terminates after a period of no traffic that you configure) and PPPoE Dial-on-

Demand (the PPPoE connection is brought up only when an Internet access request is made). Network Address Translation (NAT) Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS support, you can have a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address, allowing the host to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows the individual clients (computers) to obtain the TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a centralized DHCP server. The Prestige has built-in DHCP server capability enabled by default. It can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to DHCP clients. The Prestige can now also act as a surrogate DHCP server (DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients. IP Alias IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 44 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Packet Filters The Prestige's packet filtering functions allows added network security and management. Housing Your Prestige's compact and ventilated housing minimizes space requirements making it easy to position anywhere in your busy office. 4-Port Switch (P-660H/P-660HW) A combination of switch and router makes your Prestige a cost-effective and viable network solution. You can connect up to four computers to the Prestige without the cost of a hub. Use a hub to add more than four computers to your LAN. 1.2.1 Wireless Features (P-660HW/P-660W) Wireless LAN The Prestige supports the IEEE 802.11g standard, which is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard, meaning that you can have both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients in the same wireless network. Note: The Prestige may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs. Wi-Fi Protected Access Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i security specification standard. Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption. Antenna The Prestige is equipped with one 2dBi fixed antenna to provide clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points. Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering Your Prestige can check the MAC addresses of wireless stations against a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses. WEP Encryption WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private. 45 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 1.3 Applications for the Prestige Here are some example uses for which the Prestige is well suited. Application graphics shown are for the P-660W. 1.3.1 Protected Internet Access The Prestige is the ideal high-speed Internet access solution. It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) providers and supports the ADSL standards as shown in Table 1 on page 42. In addition, the Prestige allows wireless clients access to your network resources. The Prestige provides protection from attacks by Internet hackers. By default, the firewall blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN. The firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection and DoS (Denial of Services) detection and prevention, as well as real time alerts, reports and logs. Figure 1 Protected Internet Access Applications ss 1.3.2 LAN to LAN Application You can use the Prestige to connect two geographically dispersed networks over the ADSL line. A typical LAN-to-LAN application example is shown as follows. Figure 2 LAN-to-LAN Application Example 1.4 Front Panel LEDs The following figure shows the front panel LEDs. Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 46 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the LEDs. Table 2 Front Panel LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR Green Red LAN Green Amber Green WLAN (P-

660HW/ P-

660W) DSL/PPP Green Amber STATUS On Blinking On Off On Blinking On Blinking Off On Blinking Off Fast Blinking Slow Blinking On On Blinking Off DESCRIPTION The Prestige is receiving power and functioning properly. The Prestige is rebooting or performing diagnostics. Power to the Prestige is too low. The system is not ready or has malfunctioned. The Prestige has a successful 10Mb Ethernet connection. The Prestige is sending/receiving data. The Prestige has a successful 100Mb Ethernet connection. The Prestige is sending/receiving data. The LAN is not connected. The Prestige is ready, but is not sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. The Prestige is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. The Prestige is sending/receiving non-PPP data. The Prestige is initializing the DSL line. The system is ready, but is not sending/receiving non-PPP data. The connection to the PPPoE server is up. The Prestige is sending/receiving PPP data. The DSL link is down. 1.5 Hardware Connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connection. 47 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator. 2.1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Prestige setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See the chapter on troubleshooting if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator Note: Even though you can connect to the Prestige wirelessly, it is recommended that you connect your computer to a LAN port for initial configuration. 1 Make sure your Prestige hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 Prepare your computer/computer network to connect to the Prestige (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 3 Launch your web browser. 4 Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. 5 A window displays as shown.The Password field already contains the default password 1234. Click Login to proceed to a screen asking you to change your password or click Cancel to revert to the default password. Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 48 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 3 Password Screen 6 It is highly recommended you change the default password! Enter a new password between 1 and 30 characters, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now. Note: If you do not change the password at least once, the following screen appears every time you log in. Figure 4 Change Password at Login 7 You should now see the SITE MAP screen. Note: The Prestige automatically times out after five minutes of inactivity. Simply log back into the Prestige if this happens to you. 2.1.2 Resetting the Prestige If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the Prestige to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. 2.1.2.1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the PWR/SYS LED is on (not blinking). 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR/SYS LED begins to blink and then release it. When the PWR/SYS LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the Prestige restarts. 49 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.1.3 Navigating the Web Configurator P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the SITE MAP screen. We use the Prestige 660W-T1 web screens in this guide as an example. Screens vary slightly for different Prestige models. Click Wizard Setup to begin a series of screens to configure your Prestige for the first time. Click a link under Advanced Setup to configure advanced Prestige features. Click a link under Maintenance to see Prestige performance statistics, upload firmware and back up, restore or upload a configuration file. Click Site Map to go to the Site Map screen. Click Logout in the navigation panel when you have finished a Prestige management session. Figure 5 Web Configurator: Site Map Screen Note: Click the icon (located in the top right corner of most screens) to view embedded help. Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary LINK Wizard Setup Advanced Setup Password LAN FUNCTION SUB-LINK Connection Setup Use these screens for initial configuration including general setup, ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP/DNS Server/MAC address assignment. Use these screens to limit bandwidth usage by application. Media Bandwidth Mgnt Use this screen to change your password. Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP and TCP/IP settings. Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 50 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary (continued) LINK Wireless LAN

(P-660W / P-

660HW only) SUB-LINK Wireless MAC Filter 802.1x/WPA Local User Database RADIUS WAN WAN Setup NAT Dynamic DNS Time and Date Firewall Content Filter Remote Management UPnP Logs WAN Backup SUA Only Full Feature Default Policy Rule Summary Anti Probing Threshold Keyword Schedule Trusted Log Settings View Log Media Bandwidth Management Summary Class Setup Monitor Maintenance System Status FUNCTION Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings. Use this screen to change MAC filter settings on the Prestige. Use this screen to configure WLAN authentication and security settings. Use this screen to set up built-in user profiles for wireless station authentication. Use this screen to specify the external RADIUS server for wireless station authentication. Use this screen to change the Prestiges WAN remote node settings. Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and WAN backup settings. Use this screen to configure servers behind the Prestige. Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules. Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Use this screen to change your Prestiges time and date. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall and the direction of network traffic to which to apply the rule. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule. Use this screen to change your anti-probing settings. Use this screen to configure the threshold for DoS attacks. Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Use this screen to set the days and times for the Prestige to perform content filtering. Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your Prestige. Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet/FTP/Web to manage the Prestige. Use this screen to enable UPnP on the Prestige. Use this screen to change your Prestiges log settings. Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected. Use this screen to assign bandwidth limits to specific types of traffic. Use this screen to define a bandwidth class. Use this screen to view bandwidth class statistics. This screen contains administrative and system-related information. 51 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary (continued) LINK DHCP Table Any IP Table Wireless LAN

(P-660W / P-

660HW only) Diagnostic Firmware LOGOUT SUB-LINK Association List General DSL Line FUNCTION This screen displays DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) related information and is READ-ONLY. Use this screen to view the IP and MAC addresses of LAN computers communicating with the Prestige. This screen displays the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the Prestige. These screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige general connection. These screens display information to help you identify problems with the DSL line. Use this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige Click Logout to exit the web configurator. 2.2 Change Login Password It is highly recommended that you periodically change the password for accessing the Prestige. If you didnt change the default one after you logged in or you want to change to a new password again, then click Password in the Site Map screen to display the screen as shown next. Figure 6 Password The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 52 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 4 Password LABEL Old Password DESCRIPTION Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type the new password in this field. New Password Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 53 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens for Internet access in the web configurator. 3.1 Introduction Use the Wizard Setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information given to you by your ISP. Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields. 3.1.1 Internet Access Wizard Setup 1 In the SITE MAP screen click Wizard Setup to display the first wizard screen. Figure 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access 54 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 5 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters LABEL Mode Encapsulation Multiplex Virtual Circuit ID VPI VCI Next DESCRIPTION From the Mode drop-down list box, select Routing (default) if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise select Bridge. Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC 1483. If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Click this button to go to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above. Click on the protocol link to see the next wizard screen for that protocol. 2 The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click Next to continue. Figure 8 Internet Connection with PPPoE The following table describes the fields in this screen. 55 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 6 Internet Connection with PPPoE DESCRIPTION LABEL Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here. User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the text box below. Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the Max. Idle Timeout field. The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session will not timeout. Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings. Select None, SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details. Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen. Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. Password IP Address Connection Network Address Translation Back Next Figure 9 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 7 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 LABEL IP Address Network Address Translation DESCRIPTION This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field. Select None, SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop-down list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details. Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access 56 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 7 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 (continued) LABEL Back Next DESCRIPTION Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen. Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. Figure 10 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 8 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below. Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. ENET ENCAP Gateway Network Address Translation Back Next Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen. Select None, SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details. Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen. Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. 57 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 11 Internet Connection with PPPoA P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 9 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL User Name Password IP Address Connection Network Address Translation Back Next DESCRIPTION Enter the login name that your ISP gives you. Enter the password associated with the user name above. This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Click Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise click Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below. Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the Max. Idle Timeout field. The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session will not timeout. Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings. This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. Select None, SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details. Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen. Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access 58 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 3 Verify the settings in the screen shown next. To change the LAN information on the Prestige, click Change LAN Configurations. Otherwise click Save Settings to save the configuration and skip to the section 3.13. Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup: Third Screen If you want to change your Prestige LAN settings, click Change LAN Configuration to display the screen as shown next. Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup: LAN Configuration 59 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 10 Internet Access Wizard Setup: LAN Configuration LABEL LAN IP Address LAN Subnet Mask DHCP DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). If you changed the Prestige's LAN IP address, you must use the new IP address if you want to access the web configurator again. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. From the DHCP Server drop-down list box, select On to allow your Prestige to assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computer systems that support the DHCP client. Select Off to disable DHCP server. When DHCP server is used, set the following items:

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool. Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask. Secondary DNS Server As above. Back Finish Click Back to go back to the previous screen. Click Finish to save the settings and proceed to the next wizard screen. 4 The Prestige automatically tests the connection to the computer(s) connected to the LAN ports. To test the connection from the Prestige to the ISP, click Start Diagnose. Otherwise click Return to Main Menu to go back to the Site Map screen. Figure 14 Internet Access Wizard Setup: Connection Tests 5 Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of Prestige features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the Wizard Setup are correct. Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access 60 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 61 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 4 LAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. 4.1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. See Section 4.3 on page 68 to configure the LAN screens. 4.1.1 LANs, WANs and the Prestige The actual physical connection determines whether the Prestige ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Addresses Chapter 4 LAN Setup 62 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4.1.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Prestige provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 4.1.2.1 IP Pool Setup The Prestige is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 4.1.3 DNS Server Address DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. The DNS server addresses that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when s/he signs up. If your ISP gives you the DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in DHCP Setup, otherwise, leave them blank. Some ISPs choose to pass the DNS servers using the DNS server extensions of PPP IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Prestige supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. If the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen are not specified, for instance, left as 0.0.0.0, the Prestige tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server. When a computer sends a DNS query to the Prestige, the Prestige forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the LAN Setup screen. This way, the Prestige can pass the DNS servers to the computers and the computers can query the DNS server directly without the Prestiges intervention. 4.1.4 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. 63 Chapter 4 LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen. The Prestige acts as a DNS proxy when the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields are left blank in the LAN Setup screen. 4.2 LAN TCP/IP The Prestige has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. 4.2.1 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Prestige. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Prestige, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Prestige will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Prestige unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Chapter 4 LAN Setup 64 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4.2.1.1 Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

(IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 4.2.2 RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

Both - the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives. In Only - the Prestige will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received. Out Only - the Prestige will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received. None - the Prestige will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported;

but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. 65 Chapter 4 LAN Setup 4.2.3 Multicast P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts

(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the Prestige queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Prestige periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/

disabled on the Prestige LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 4.2.4 Any IP Traditionally, you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the Prestige to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet (through the Prestige). In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network, you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the Prestige. With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled, the Prestige allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet. Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static (fixed) IP address, you can simply connect the computer to the Prestige and access the Internet. The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a Prestige is installed, you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet. Chapter 4 LAN Setup 66 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 16 Any IP Example The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the Prestiges IP address. Note: You must enable NAT/SUA to use the Any IP feature on the Prestige. 4.2.4.1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices (the Prestige) to decide which hop to use, to help forward data along to its specified destination. The following lists out the steps taken, when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the Prestige. 1 When a computer (which is in a different subnet) first attempts to access the Internet, it sends packets to its default gateway (which is not the Prestige) by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table. 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway, an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN. 3 The Prestige receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address. 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table. Once the ARP table is updated, the computer is able to access the Internet through the Prestige. 5 When the Prestige receives packets from the computer, it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer. After all the routing information is updated, the computer can access the Prestige and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the Prestige. 67 Chapter 4 LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4.3 Configuring LAN Click LAN to open the LAN Setup screen. See Section 4.1 on page 62 for background information. Figure 17 LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 11 LAN Setup LABEL DHCP DHCP Client IP Pool Starting Address DESCRIPTION If set to Server, your Prestige can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client. If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled. If set to Relay, the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case. When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Chapter 4 LAN Setup 68 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 11 LAN Setup (continued) LABEL Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DESCRIPTION This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool. DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask. As above. Secondary DNS Server Remote DHCP Server TCP/IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast Any IP Setup Apply Cancel If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here. Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it. Select the Active check box to enable the Any IP feature. This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet. When you disable the Any IP feature, only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the Prestiges LAN IP address can connect to the Prestige or access the Internet through the Prestige. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 69 Chapter 4 LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 5 Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the Wireless LAN screens for P-660HW or P-660W. 5.1 Wireless LAN Introduction A wireless LAN can be as simple as two computers with wireless LAN adapters communicating in a peer-to-peer network or as complex as a number of computers with wireless LAN adapters communicating through access points which bridge network traffic to the wired LAN. Refer to Section 5.3 on page 71 to configure wireless LAN settings. Note: See the WLAN appendix for more detailed information on WLANs. 5.2 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless stations, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the Prestige are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Prestige identity. 5.2.1 Encryption Use WPA security if you have WPA-aware wireless clients and a RADIUS server. WPA has user authentication and improved data encryption over WEP. Use WPA-PSK if you have WPA-aware wireless clients but no RADIUS server. If you dont have WPA-aware wireless clients, then use WEP key encrypting. A higher bit key offers better security at a throughput trade-off. You can use Passphrase to automatically generate 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys or manually enter 64-bit, 128-bit or 256-bit WEP keys. 5.2.2 Authentication WPA has user authentication and you can also configure IEEE 802.1x to use the built-in database (Local User Database) or a RADIUS server to authenticate wireless clients before joining your network. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 70 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Use RADIUS authentication if you have a RADIUS server. See the appendices for information on protocols used when a client authenticates with a RADIUS server via the Prestige. Use the Local User Database if you have less than 32 wireless clients in your network. The Prestige uses MD5 encryption when a client authenticates with the Local User Database 5.2.3 Restricted Access The MAC Filter screen allows you to configure the AP to give exclusive access to devices

(Allow Association) or exclude them from accessing the AP (Deny Association). 5.2.4 Hide Prestige Identity If you hide the ESSID, then the Prestige cannot be seen when a wireless client scans for local APs. The trade-off for the extra security of hiding the Prestige may be inconvenience for some valid WLAN clients. If you dont hide the ESSID, at least you should change the default one. 5.3 The Main Wireless LAN Screen Click Wireless LAN in the navigation panel to display the main Wireless LAN screen. 71 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 18 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the links in this screen. Table 12 Wireless LAN LINK Wireless DESCRIPTION Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure the ESSID and WEP. Note: If you configure WEP, you cant configure WPA or WPA-

PSK. MAC Filter 802.1x/WPA RADIUS Local User Database Click this link to go to a screen where you can restrict access to your wireless network by MAC address. Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure WPA or WPA-PSK. You can also configure 802.1x wireless client authentication in this screen. Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure the RADIUS authentication database settings. Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure the built-in authentication database for user authentication. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Prestige. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 72 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 19 Wireless Security Methods Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Prestige and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. If you do not enable any wireless security on your Prestige, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. 5.4 Configuring the Wireless Screen 5.4.1 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Your Prestige allows you to configure up to four 64-bit, 128-bit or 256-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Wireless LAN and Wireless to the display the Wireless screen. 73 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 20 Wireless Screen P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Wireless LAN LABEL Enable Wireless LAN ESSID Hide ESSID Channel ID RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION You should configure some wireless security (see Figure 19 on page 73) when you enable the wireless LAN. Select the check box to enable the wireless LAN. The ESSID (Extended Service Set IDentification) is a unique name to identify the Prestige in the wireless LAN. Wireless stations associating to the Prestige must have the same ESSID. Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters (including spaces;

alphabetic characters are case-sensitive). Select Yes to hide the ESSID in so a station cannot obtain the ESSID through AP scanning. Select No to make the ESSID visible so a station can obtain the ESSID through AP scanning. The radio frequency used by IEEE 802.11a, b or g wireless devices is called a channel. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The RTS (Request To Send) threshold (number of bytes) is for enabling RTS/CTS. Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS/CTS handshake. Setting this value to be larger than the maximum MSDU (MAC service data unit) size turns off RTS/CTS. Setting this value to zero turns on RTS/CTS. Select the check box to change the default value and enter a new value between 0 and 2432. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 74 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 13 Wireless LAN (continued) LABEL Fragmentation Threshold DESCRIPTION This is the threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Select the check box to change the default value and enter a value between 256 and 2432. You wont see the following WEP-related fields if you have WPA or WPA-PSK enabled. Passphrase Enter a "passphrase" (password phrase) of up to 63 case-sensitive printable characters and click Generate to have the Prestige create four different WEP keys. At the time of writing, you cannot use passphrase to generate 256-bit WEP keys. After you enter the passphrase, click Generate to have the Prestige generate four different WEP keys automatically. The keys display in the fields below. Generate WEP Encryption WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network. Select Disable to allow all wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. Select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP to use data encryption. The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the Prestige and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you want to manually set the WEP keys, enter the key in the field provided. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 256-bit WEP, then enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). The values for the WEP keys must be set up exactly the same on all wireless devices in the same wireless LAN. You must configure all four keys, but only one key can be used at any one time. The default key is key 1. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Key 1 to Key 4 Back Apply Cancel Note: If you are configuring the Prestige from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Prestiges ESSID or security settings (see Figure 19 on page 73), you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Prestiges new settings. 5.5 Configuring MAC Filters Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. To change your Prestiges MAC filter settings, click Wireless LAN, MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. The screen appears as shown. 75 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: Be careful not to list your computers MAC address and set the Action field to Deny Association when managing the Prestige via a wireless connection. This would lock you out. Figure 21 MAC Filter The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 14 MAC Filter LABEL Active Action DESCRIPTION Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Deny Association to block access to the router, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Prestige. Select Allow Association to permit access to the router, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Prestige. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 76 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 14 MAC Filter (continued) LABEL MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal DESCRIPTION character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc of the wireless stations that are allowed or denied access to the Prestige in these address fields. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Back Apply Cancel 5.6 Introduction to WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA is preferred to WEP as WPA has user authentication and improved data encryption. See the appendix for more information on WPA user authentication and WPA encryption. If you dont have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA-PSK (WPA -Pre-Shared Key). WPA-PSK only requires a single (identical) password entered into each WLAN member. As long as the passwords match, a client will be granted access to a WLAN. Note: You cant use the Local User Database for authentication when you select WPA. 5.6.1 WPA-PSK Application Example A WPA-PSK application looks as follows. 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key

(PSK) must be between 8 and 63 printable characters (including spaces; alphabetic characters are case-sensitive). 2 The AP checks each clients password and (only) allows it to join the network if the passwords match. 3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients. 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them. 77 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 22 WPA - PSK Authentication P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 5.6.2 WPA with RADIUS Application Example You need the IP address, port number (default is 1812) and shared secret of a RADIUS server. A WPA application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system (wired link to the LAN). 1 The AP passes the wireless clients authentication request to the RADIUS server. 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly transmitted between the AP and the wireless clients Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 78 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 23 WPA with RADIUS Application Example2 5.6.3 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicants are the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client, and Meetinghouse Data Communications' AEGIS client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-

in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. See Section 5.7.3 on page 82 and Section 5.7.4 on page 84 for configuration instruction. 5.7 Configuring IEEE 802.1x and WPA To change your Prestiges authentication settings, click the Wireless LAN link under Advanced Setup and then the 802.1x/WPA tab. The screen varies by the key management protocol you select. See Section 5.7.1 on page 80 if you want to allow unauthenticated wireless access or block wireless access on the Prestige. See Section 5.7.2 on page 80 to configure IEEE 802.1x authentication. See Section 5.7.3 on page 82 to configure WPA. See Section 5.7.4 on page 84 to configure WPA-PSK. 79 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 5.7.1 No Access Allowed or Authentication Select No Access Allowed or No Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. Figure 24 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Access Allowed Figure 25 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Authentication The following table describes the label in these screens. Table 15 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: No Access/Authentication LABEL Wireless Port Control Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION To control wireless station access to the wired network, select a control method from the drop-down list box. Choose from No Access Allowed, No Authentication Required and Authentication Required. No Access Allowed blocks all wireless stations access to the wired network. No Authentication Required allows all wireless stations access to the wired network without entering usernames and passwords. This is the default setting. Authentication Required means that all wireless stations have to enter usernames and passwords before access to the wired network is allowed. Select Authentication Required to configure Key Management Protocol and other related fields. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 5.7.2 Authentication Required: 802.1x You need the following for IEEE 802.1x authentication. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 80 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide A computer with an IEEE 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN adapter and equipped with a web browser (with JavaScript enabled) and/or Telnet. A wireless station computer must be running IEEE 802.1x-compliant software. Not all Windows operating systems support IEEE 802.1x (see the Microsoft web site for details). For other operating systems, see their documentation. If your operating system does not support IEEE 802.1x, then you may need to install IEEE 802.1x client software. An optional network RADIUS server for remote user authentication and accounting. Select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field and 802.1x in the Key Management Protocol field to display the next screen. Figure 26 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: 802.1xl The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: 802.1x LABEL Wireless Port Control ReAuthentication Timer

(in Seconds) DESCRIPTION To control wireless station access to the wired network, select a control method from the drop-down list box. Choose from No Authentication Required, Authentication Required and No Access Allowed. The following fields are only available when you select Authentication Required. Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. 81 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Table 16 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: 802.1x (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide LABEL Idle Timeout

(in Seconds) Key Management Protocol Dynamic WEP Key Exchange Authentication Databases Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION The Prestige automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour). Choose 802.1x from the drop-down list. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. Also set the Authentication Databases field to RADIUS Only. Local user database may not be used. Select Disable to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without using dynamic WEP key exchange. Select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP to enable data encryption. Up to 32 stations can access the Prestige when you configure dynamic WEP key exchange. This field is not available when you set Key Management Protocol to WPA or WPA-PSK. The authentication database contains wireless station login information. The local user database is the built-in database on the Prestige. The RADIUS is an external server. Use this drop-down list box to select which database the Prestige should use (first) to authenticate a wireless station. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first. Select Local User Database Only to have the Prestige just check the built-in user database on the Prestige for a wireless station's username and password. Select RADIUS Only to have the Prestige just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a wireless station's username and password. Select Local first, then RADIUS to have the Prestige first check the user database on the Prestige for a wireless station's username and password. If the user name is not found, the Prestige then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server. Select RADIUS first, then Local to have the Prestige first check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a wireless station's username and password. If the Prestige cannot reach the RADIUS server, the Prestige then checks the local user database on the Prestige. When the user name is not found or password does not match in the RADIUS server, the Prestige will not check the local user database and the authentication fails. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Note: Once you enable user authentication, you need to specify an external RADIUS server or create local user accounts on the Prestige for authentication. 5.7.3 Authentication Required: WPA Select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field and WPA in the Key Management Protocol field to display the next screen. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 82 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide See Section 5.6 on page 77 for more information. Figure 27 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA The following table describes the labels not previously discussed. Table 17 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA LABEL Key Management Protocol WPA Mixed Mode DESCRIPTION Choose WPA in this field. The Prestige can operate in WPA Mixed Mode, which supports both clients running WPA and clients running dynamic WEP key exchange with 802.1x in the same Wi-Fi network. Select the check box to activate WPA mixed mode. Otherwise, clear the check box and configure the Group Data Privacy field. WPA Group Key Update Timer Group Data Privacy Group Data Privacy allows you to choose TKIP (recommended) or WEP for broadcast and multicast ("group") traffic if the Key Management Protocol is WPA and WPA Mixed Mode is disabled. WEP is used automatically if you have enabled WPA Mixed Mode. All unicast traffic is automatically encrypted by TKIP when WPA or WPA-PSK Key Management Protocol is selected. The WPA Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-

PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the WPA Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK mode. The Prestige default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). When you configure Key Management Protocol to WPA, the Authentication Databases must be RADIUS Only. You can only use the Local User Database Only with 802.1x Key Management Protocol. Authentication Databases 83 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 5.7.4 Authentication Required: WPA-PSK Select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field and WPA-PSK in the Key Management Protocol field to display the next screen. See Section 5.6 on page 77 for more information. Figure 28 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA:WPA-PSK The following table describes the labels not previously discussed. Table 18 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA-PSK LABEL Key Management Protocol Pre-Shared Key WPA Mixed Mode DESCRIPTION Choose WPA-PSK in this field. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 printable characters (including spaces;

alphabetic characters are case-sensitive). The Prestige can operate in WPA Mixed Mode, which supports both clients running WPA and clients running dynamic WEP key exchange with 802.1x in the same Wi-Fi network. Select the check box to activate WPA mixed mode. Otherwise, clear the check box and configure the Group Data Privacy field. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 84 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 18 Wireless LAN: 802.1x/WPA: WPA-PSK (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Group Data Privacy Group Data Privacy allows you to choose TKIP (recommended) or WEP for broadcast and multicast ("group") traffic if the Key Management Protocol is WPA and WPA Mixed Mode is disabled. WEP is used automatically if you have enabled WPA Mixed Mode. All unicast traffic is automatically encrypted by TKIP when WPA or WPA-PSK Key Management Protocol is selected. This field is only visible when WPA Mixed Mode is enabled. Authentication Databases 5.8 Configuring Local User Authentication By storing user profiles locally, your Prestige is able to authenticate wireless users without interacting with a network RADIUS server. However, there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way. To change your Prestiges local user database, click Wireless LAN, Local User Database. The screen appears as shown. 85 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 29 Local User Database P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 19 Local User Database LABEL

Active User Name Password Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the index number of a local user account. Select this check box to enable the user profile. Enter a user name of up to 31 alphanumeric characters (case-sensitive), hyphens ('-') and underscores ('_') if youre using MD5 encryption and maximum 14 if youre using PEAP. Enter a password of up to 31 printable characters (including spaces; alphabetic characters are case-sensitive) if youre using MD5 encryption and maximum 14 if youre using PEAP. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save these settings back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen again. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 86 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 5.9 Configuring RADIUS To set up your Prestiges RADIUS server settings, click WIRELESS LAN, RADIUS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 30 RADIUS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 20 RADIUS LABEL Authentication Server Active Server IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Accounting Server Active Server IP Address DESCRIPTION Select Yes from the drop-down list box to enable user authentication through an external authentication server. Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the access points. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and Prestige. Select Yes from the drop-down list box to enable user authentication through an external accounting server. Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation. 87 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 20 RADIUS (continued) LABEL Port Number Shared Secret Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION The default port of the RADIUS server for accounting is 1813. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the access points. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external accounting server and the Prestige. Click Back to go to the main wireless LAN setup screen. Click Apply to save these settings back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen again. Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 88 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 89 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings. 6.1 WAN Overview A WAN (Wide Area Network) is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. 6.1.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Prestige supports the following methods. 6.1.1.1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP Gateway field in the second wizard screen. You can get this information from your ISP. 6.1.1.2 PPP over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. The Prestige bridges a PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) from your computer to an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) which connects to ADSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates. One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN. For more information on PPPoE, see the appendices. 6.1.1.3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Prestige encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 90 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 6.1.1.4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information. 6.1.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. 6.1.2.1 VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit;

for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. 6.1.2.2 LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 6.1.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 6.1.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway. 6.1.4.1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field. 91 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 6.1.4.2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP Address Assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above. 6.1.4.3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the Prestige acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the Prestige. 6.1.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The Prestige does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the Prestige will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons. Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 6.1.6 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 6.2 Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". The metric sets the priority for the Prestiges routes to the Internet. If any two of the default routes have the same metric, the Prestige uses the following pre-defined priorities:

Normal route: designated by the ISP (see Section 6.7 on page 95) Traffic-redirect route (see Section 6.8 on page 98) WAN-backup route, also called dial-backup (see Section 6.9 on page 99) Chapter 6 WAN Setup 92 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide For example, if the normal route has a metric of "1" and the traffic-redirect route has a metric of "2" and dial-backup route has a metric of "3", then the normal route acts as the primary default route. If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet, the Prestige tries the traffic-

redirect route next. In the same manner, the Prestige uses the dial-backup route if the traffic-

redirect route also fails. If you want the dial-backup route to take first priority over the traffic-redirect route or even the normal route, all you need to do is set the dial-backup routes metric to "1" and the others to

"2" (or greater). IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above. 6.3 PPPoE Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). PPPoE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microsoft Dial-Up Networking software can activate, and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users. One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the Prestige (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Prestige does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 6.4 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. 93 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 31 Example of Traffic Shaping 6.5 Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you turn on and connect the Prestige to a telephone jack, it automatically detects the Internet connection settings (such as the VCI/VPI numbers and the encapsulation method) from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes. In cases where additional account information (such as an Internet account user name and password) is required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP, you will be redirected to web screen(s) for information input or troubleshooting. Zero configuration for Internet access is disable when the Prestige is in bridge mode you set the Prestige to use a static (fixed) WAN IP address. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 94 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 6.6 The Main WAN Screen Click WAN in the navigation panel to display the man WAN screen. See Section 6.1 on page 90 for more information. Figure 32 WAN The following table describes the links in this screen. Table 21 WAN LINK WAN Setup WAN Backup DESCRIPTION Click this link to go to the screen where you can configure your Prestige for an Internet connection. Click this link to go to the screen where you can configure WAN backup connections

(traffic redirect and dial backup). 6.7 Configuring WAN Setup To change your Prestiges WAN remote node settings, click WAN and WAN Setup. The screen differs by the encapsulation. See Section 6.1 on page 90 for more information. 95 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Figure 33 WAN Setup (PPPoE) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 22 WAN Setup LABEL Name Mode DESCRIPTION Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider, e.g., MyISP. This information is for identification purposes only. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise select Bridge. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 96 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 22 WAN Setup (continued) LABEL Encapsulation Multiplex Virtual Circuit ID VPI VCI ATM QoS Type Cell Rate Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate DESCRIPTION Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC 1483. If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select VBR (Variable Bit Rate) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications. Cell rate configuration often helps eliminate traffic congestion that slows transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. Login Information

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Service Name

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here. User Name Password IP Address Connection

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Nailed-Up Connection Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 have priority over your Connection settings. Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. 97 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Table 22 WAN Setup (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide LABEL Connect on Demand Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time DESCRIPTION Max Idle Timeout PPPoE Passthrough

(PPPoE encapsulation only) Subnet Mask

(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only) ENET ENCAP Gateway

(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only) Zero Configuration Back Apply Cancel and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout. This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the Prestige's built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field This feature is not applicable/available when you configure the Prestige to use a static WAN IP address or in bridge mode. Select Yes to set the Prestige to automatically detect the Internet connection settings (such as the VCI/VPI numbers and the encapsulation method) from the ISP and make the necessary configuration changes. Select No to disable this feature. You must manually configure the Prestige for Internet access. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 6.8 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet. An example is shown in the figure below. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 98 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 34 Traffic Redirect Example The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN. Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Put the protected LAN in one subnet (Subnet 1 in the following figure) and the backup gateway in another subnet (Subnet 2). Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN

(Subnet 1) to the backup gateway (Subnet 2). Figure 35 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup 6.9 Configuring WAN Backup To change your Prestiges WAN backup settings, click WAN, then WAN Backup. The screen appears as shown. 99 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Figure 36 WAN Backup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 23 WAN Backup LABEL Backup Type Check WAN IP Address1-3 DESCRIPTION Select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection. Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check if the connection to the DSLAM is up. Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields. Configure this field to test your Prestige's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address). Note: If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup, you must configure at least one IP address here. When using a WAN backup connection, the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response. Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection). Fail Tolerance Recovery Interval When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection (usually a WAN backup connection), it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection. Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the Prestige to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic. Chapter 6 WAN Setup 100 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 23 WAN Backup (continued) LABEL Timeout Traffic Redirect Active Metric DESCRIPTION Type the number of seconds (3 recommended) for your Prestige to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request. The WAN connection is considered "down" after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field. Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested. Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet. Select this check box to have the Prestige use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down. Note: If you activate traffic redirect, you must configure at least one Check WAN IP Address. This field sets this route's priority among the routes the Prestige uses. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15"

means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation. The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige's Internet connection terminates. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save the changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Back Apply Cancel 101 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 7 Network Address Translation

(NAT) Screens This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige. 7.1 NAT Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 7.1.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Prestige, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 24 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 102 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7.1.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping see Table 25 on page 105), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Prestige filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 7.1.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Prestige keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. 103 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens Figure 37 How NAT Works P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7.1.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP Alias) behind the Prestige can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. More examples follow at the end of this chapter. Figure 38 NAT Application With IP Alias Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 104 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7.1.5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

One to One: In One-to-One mode, the Prestige maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the Prestige maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in todays routers). Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the Prestige maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the Prestige maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping types. The following table summarizes these types. Table 25 NAT Mapping Types TYPE One-to-One Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) Many-to-Many Overload Many-to-Many No Overload Server IP MAPPING ILA1 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA3 Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 SMT ABBREVIATION 1:1 M:1 M:M Ov M:M No OV Server 105 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7.2 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 25 on page 105. Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. 7.3 SUA Server A SUA server set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. 7.3.1 Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 (default server) the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. 7.3.2 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Table 26 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) PORT NUMBER 7 21 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 106 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 26 Services and Port Numbers (continued) SERVICES SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) PORT NUMBER 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 7.3.3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. IP address assigned by ISP. Figure 39 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 7.4 Selecting the NAT Mode You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige. Click NAT to open the following screen. 107 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens Figure 40 NAT Mode P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 NAT Mode LABEL None SUA Only Edit Details Full Feature Edit Details Apply DESCRIPTION Select this radio button to disable NAT. Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. The Prestige uses Address Mapping Set 1 in the NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set screen. Click this link to go to the NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set screen. Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. Click this link to go to the NAT - Address Mapping Rules screen. Click Apply to save your configuration. 7.5 Configuring SUA Server Set If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 (default server) the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. Click NAT, select SUA Only and click Edit Details to open the following screen. See Section 7.3 on page 106 for more information. See Table 26 on page 106 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 108 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 41 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 28 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set LABEL Start Port No. End Port No. DESCRIPTION Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port No. field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port No. field. Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Start Port No. field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port No. field above. Server IP Address Enter your server IP address in this field. Save Cancel Click Save to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 109 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 7.6 Configuring Address Mapping Rules P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and 6. To change your Prestiges address mapping settings, click NAT, Select Full Feature and click Edit Details to open the following screen. Figure 42 Address Mapping Rules The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 29 Address Mapping Rules LABEL Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP DESCRIPTION This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping. This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-one and Server mapping types. This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for Many-to-One and Server mapping types. This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-one, Many-to-One and Server mapping types. Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 110

 

 

Figure 43 Edit Address Mapping Rule P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 30 Edit Address Mapping Rule LABEL Type Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Server Mapping Set Edit Details Apply DESCRIPTION Choose the port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only. Many-to-Many Overload: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping. This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types. This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-

to-One and Server mapping types. Only available when Type is set to Server. Select a number from the drop-down menu to choose a server set from the NAT -

Address Mapping Rules screen. Click this link to go to the NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set screen to edit a server set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 112 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 30 Edit Address Mapping Rule (continued) LABEL Cancel Delete DESCRIPTION Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. Click Delete to exit this screen without saving. 113 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 8 Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your Prestige to use Dynamic DNS. 8.1 Dynamic DNS Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 8.1.1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. See Section 8.2 on page 114 for configuration instruction. 8.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your Prestiges DDNS, click Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. See Section 8.1 on page 114 for more information. Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup 114 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 44 Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 31 Dynamic DNS DESCRIPTION Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. LABEL Active Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Host Names E-mail Address User Password Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DYNDNS Wildcard. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Type the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your Dynamic DNS provider. Type your e-mail address. Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. 115 Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 9 Time and Date This screen is not available on all models. Use this screen to configure the Prestiges time and date settings. 9.1 Configuring Time and Date To change your Prestiges time and date, click Time And Date. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the Prestiges time based on your local time zone. Figure 45 Time and Date The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 9 Time and Date 116 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 32 Time and Date LABEL Time Server Use Protocol when Bootup DESCRIPTION Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Prestige. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main difference between them is the format. Daytime (RFC 867) format is day/month/year/time zone of the server. Time (RFC 868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0. NTP (RFC 1305) is similar to Time (RFC 868). Select None to enter the time and date manually. IP Address or URL Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network Time and Date Daylight Savings Start Date End Date Synchronize system clock with Time Server now. Date Current Date New Date (yyyy-

mm-dd) Time Current Time New Time Apply Cancel administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Select this option if you use daylight savings time. Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Enter the month and day that your daylight-savings time starts on if you selected Daylight Savings. Enter the month and day that your daylight-savings time ends on if you selected Daylight Savings. Select this option to have your Prestige use the time server (that you configured above) to set its internal system clock. Please wait for up to 60 seconds while the Prestige locates the time server. If the Prestige cannot find the time server, please check the time server protocol and its IP address. If the IP address was entered correctly, try pinging it for example to test the connection. This field displays the date of your Prestige. Each time you reload this page, the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the last updated date from the time server. When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the time of your Prestige. Each time you reload this page, the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the last updated time from the time server. When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 117 Chapter 9 Time and Date P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 10 Firewalls This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and introduces the Prestige firewall. 10.1 Firewall Overview Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. Refer to Section 11.5 on page 135 to configure default firewall settings. Refer to Section 11.6 on page 136 to view firewall rules. Refer to Section 11.6.1 on page 138 to configure firewall rules. Refer to Section 11.7 on page 141 to configure a custom service. Refer to Section 11.12.3 on page 151 to configure firewall thresholds. 10.2 Types of Firewalls There are three main types of firewalls:

Packet Filtering Firewalls Application-level Firewalls Stateful Inspection Firewalls 10.2.1 Packet Filtering Firewalls Packet filtering firewalls restrict access based on the source/destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application. Chapter 10 Firewalls 118 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 10.2.2 Application-level Firewalls Application-level firewalls restrict access by serving as proxies for external servers. Since they use programs written for specific Internet services, such as HTTP, FTP and telnet, they can evaluate network packets for valid application-specific data. Application-level gateways have a number of general advantages over the default mode of permitting application traffic directly to internal hosts:

Information hiding prevents the names of internal systems from being made known via DNS to outside systems, since the application gateway is the only host whose name must be made known to outside systems. Robust authentication and logging pre-authenticates application traffic before it reaches internal hosts and causes it to be logged more effectively than if it were logged with standard host logging. Filtering rules at the packet filtering router can be less complex than they would be if the router needed to filter application traffic and direct it to a number of specific systems. The router need only allow application traffic destined for the application gateway and reject the rest. 10.2.3 Stateful Inspection Firewalls Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also

"inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency, however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. See Section 10.5 on page 124 for more information on stateful inspection. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. 10.3 Introduction to ZyXELs Firewall The Prestige firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (in SMT menu 21.2 or in the web configurator). The Prestiges purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The Prestige can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The Prestige also has packet filtering capabilities. The Prestige is installed between the LAN and the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The Prestige has one DSL/ISDN port and one Ethernet LAN port, which physically separate the network into two areas. The DSL/ISDN port connects to the Internet. 119 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP, and the World Wide Web. However, inbound access will not be allowed unless you configure remote management or create a firewall rule to allow a remote host to use a specific service. 10.3.1 Denial of Service Attacks Figure 46 Prestige Firewall Application 10.4 Denial of Service Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The Prestige is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. 10.4.1 Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP/IP. TCP/

IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions. An extension number, called the "TCP port" or "UDP port" identifies these protocols, such as HTTP

(Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), POP3 (E-mail), etc. For example, Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80. When computers communicate on the Internet, they are using the client/server model, where the server "listens" on a specific TCP/UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web server typically listens on port 80. Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also active. If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful, a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port. Some of the most common IP ports are:

Chapter 10 Firewalls 120 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 33 Common IP Ports 21 23 25 FTP Telnet SMTP 53 80 110 DNS HTTP POP3 10.4.2 Types of DoS Attacks There are four types of DoS attacks:

1 Those that exploit bugs in a TCP/IP implementation. 2 Those that exploit weaknesses in the TCP/IP specification. 3 Brute-force attacks that flood a network with useless data. 4 IP Spoofing. 5 "Ping of Death" and "Teardrop" attacks exploit bugs in the TCP/IP implementations of various computer and host systems. Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. The oversize packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system. Systems may crash, hang or reboot. Teardrop attack exploits weaknesses in the re-assembly of IP packet fragments. As data is transmitted through a network, IP packets are often broken up into smaller chunks. Each fragment looks like the original IP packet except that it contains an offset field that says, for instance, "This fragment is carrying bytes 200 through 400 of the original (non fragmented) IP packet." The Teardrop program creates a series of IP fragments with overlapping offset fields. When these fragments are reassembled at the destination, some systems will crash, hang, or reboot. 6 Weaknesses in the TCP/IP specification leave it open to "SYN Flood" and "LAND"

attacks. These attacks are executed during the handshake that initiates a communication session between two applications. 121 Chapter 10 Firewalls Figure 47 Three-Way Handshake P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN

(synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK

(acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK

(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established. SYN Attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer (which is set at relatively long intervals) terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. Figure 48 SYN Flood In a LAND Attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the targeted system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. 7 A brute-force attack, such as a "Smurf" attack, targets a feature in the IP specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting, to quickly flood the target network with useless data. A Smurf hacker floods a router with Internet Control Message Protocol Chapter 10 Firewalls 122 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

(ICMP) echo request packets (pings). Since the destination IP address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network, the router will broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network. If there are numerous hosts, this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request and response traffic. If a hacker chooses to spoof the source IP address of the ICMP echo request packet, the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the "intermediary" network, but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address, known as the "victim" network. This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all available bandwidth, making communications impossible. Figure 49 Smurf Attack 10.4.2.1 ICMP Vulnerability ICMP is an error-reporting protocol that works in concert with IP. The following ICMP types trigger an alert:

Table 34 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts 5 13 14 17 18 REDIRECT TIMESTAMP_REQUEST TIMESTAMP_REPLY ADDRESS_MASK_REQUEST ADDRESS_MASK_REPLY 10.4.2.2 Illegal Commands (NetBIOS and SMTP) The only legal NetBIOS commands are the following - all others are illegal. Table 35 Legal NetBIOS Commands MESSAGE:

REQUEST:

POSITIVE:

VE:

123 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 35 Legal NetBIOS Commands RETARGET:

KEEPALIVE:

All SMTP commands are illegal except for those displayed in the following tables. Table 36 Legal SMTP Commands AUTH QUIT DATA RCPT EHLO RSET ETRN SAML EXPN SEND HELO SOML HELP TURN MAIL VRFY NOOP 10.4.2.3 Traceroute Traceroute is a utility used to determine the path a packet takes between two endpoints. Sometimes when a packet filter firewall is configured incorrectly an attacker can traceroute the firewall gaining knowledge of the network topology inside the firewall. Often, many DoS attacks also employ a technique known as "IP Spoofing" as part of their attack. IP Spoofing may be used to break into systems, to hide the hacker's identity, or to magnify the effect of the DoS attack. IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking that the communications are coming from within the trusted network. To engage in IP spoofing, a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed through the router or firewall. The Prestige blocks all IP Spoofing attempts. 10.5 Stateful Inspection With stateful inspection, fields of the packets are compared to packets that are already known to be trusted. For example, if you access some outside service, the proxy server remembers things about your original request, like the port number and source and destination addresses. This remembering is called saving the state. When the outside system responds to your request, the firewall compares the received packets with the saved state to determine if they are allowed in. The Prestige uses stateful packet inspection to protect the private LAN from hackers and vandals on the Internet. By default, the Prestiges stateful inspection allows all communications to the Internet that originate from the LAN, and blocks all traffic to the LAN that originates from the Internet. In summary, stateful inspection:

Allows all sessions originating from the LAN (local network) to the WAN (Internet). Denies all sessions originating from the WAN to the LAN. Chapter 10 Firewalls 124 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 50 Stateful Inspection The previous figure shows the Prestiges default firewall rules in action as well as demonstrates how stateful inspection works. User A can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN and responses to this request are allowed. However other Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked. 10.5.1 Stateful Inspection Process In this example, the following sequence of events occurs when a TCP packet leaves the LAN network through the firewall's WAN interface. The TCP packet is the first in a session, and the packet's application layer protocol is configured for a firewall rule inspection:

1 The packet travels from the firewall's LAN to the WAN. 2 The packet is evaluated against the interface's existing outbound access list, and the packet is permitted (a denied packet would simply be dropped at this point). 3 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule to determine and record information about the state of the packet's connection. This information is recorded in a new state table entry created for the new connection. If there is not a firewall rule for this packet and it is not an attack, then the settings in the Default Policy screen determine the action for this packet. 4 Based on the obtained state information, a firewall rule creates a temporary access list entry that is inserted at the beginning of the WAN interface's inbound extended access list. This temporary access list entry is designed to permit inbound packets of the same connection as the outbound packet just inspected. 5 The outbound packet is forwarded out through the interface. 6 Later, an inbound packet reaches the interface. This packet is part of the connection previously established with the outbound packet. The inbound packet is evaluated against the inbound access list, and is permitted because of the temporary access list entry previously created. 7 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule, and the connection's state table entry is updated as necessary. Based on the updated state information, the inbound extended access list 125 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide temporary entries might be modified, in order to permit only packets that are valid for the current state of the connection. 8 Any additional inbound or outbound packets that belong to the connection are inspected to update the state table entry and to modify the temporary inbound access list entries as required, and are forwarded through the interface. 9 When the connection terminates or times out, the connection's state table entry is deleted and the connection's temporary inbound access list entries are deleted. 10.5.2 Stateful Inspection and the Prestige Additional rules may be defined to extend or override the default rules. For example, a rule may be created which will:

Block all traffic of a certain type, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic from the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow access to a Web server to everyone but competitors. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by evaluating the network traffics Source IP address, Destination IP address, IP protocol type, and comparing these to rules set by the administrator. Note: The ability to define firewall rules is a very powerful tool. Using custom rules, it is possible to disable all firewall protection or block all access to the Internet. Use extreme caution when creating or deleting firewall rules. Test changes after creating them to make sure they work correctly. Below is a brief technical description of how these connections are tracked. Connections may either be defined by the upper protocols (for instance, TCP), or by the Prestige itself (as with the "virtual connections" created for UDP and ICMP). 10.5.3 TCP Security The Prestige uses state information embedded in TCP packets. The first packet of any new connection has its SYN flag set and its ACK flag cleared; these are "initiation" packets. All packets that do not have this flag structure are called "subsequent" packets, since they represent data that occurs later in the TCP stream. If an initiation packet originates on the WAN, this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the Internet into the LAN. Except in a few special cases (see "Upper Layer Protocols" shown next), these packets are dropped and logged. If an initiation packet originates on the LAN, this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the LAN to the Internet. Assuming that this is an acceptable part of the security policy (as is the case with the default policy), the connection will be allowed. A cache entry is added which includes connection information such as IP addresses, TCP ports, sequence numbers, etc. Chapter 10 Firewalls 126 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide When the Prestige receives any subsequent packet (from the Internet or from the LAN), its connection information is extracted and checked against the cache. A packet is only allowed to pass through if it corresponds to a valid connection (that is, if it is a response to a connection which originated on the LAN). 10.5.4 UDP/ICMP Security UDP and ICMP do not themselves contain any connection information (such as sequence numbers). However, at the very minimum, they contain an IP address pair (source and destination). UDP also contains port pairs, and ICMP has type and code information. All of this data can be analyzed in order to build "virtual connections" in the cache. For instance, any UDP packet that originates on the LAN will create a cache entry. Its IP address and port pairs will be stored. For a short period of time, UDP packets from the WAN that have matching IP and UDP information will be allowed back in through the firewall. A similar situation exists for ICMP, except that the Prestige is even more restrictive. Specifically, only outgoing echoes will allow incoming echo replies, outgoing address mask requests will allow incoming address mask replies, and outgoing timestamp requests will allow incoming timestamp replies. No other ICMP packets are allowed in through the firewall, simply because they are too dangerous and contain too little tracking information. For instance, ICMP redirect packets are never allowed in, since they could be used to reroute traffic through attacking machines. 10.5.5 Upper Layer Protocols Some higher layer protocols (such as FTP and RealAudio) utilize multiple network connections simultaneously. In general terms, they usually have a "control connection" which is used for sending commands between endpoints, and then "data connections" which are used for transmitting bulk information. Consider the FTP protocol. A user on the LAN opens a control connection to a server on the Internet and requests a file. At this point, the remote server will open a data connection from the Internet. For FTP to work properly, this connection must be allowed to pass through even though a connection from the Internet would normally be rejected. In order to achieve this, the Prestige inspects the application-level FTP data. Specifically, it searches for outgoing "PORT" commands, and when it sees these, it adds a cache entry for the anticipated data connection. This can be done safely, since the PORT command contains address and port information, which can be used to uniquely identify the connection. Any protocol that operates in this way must be supported on a case-by-case basis. You can use the web configurators Custom Ports feature to do this. 10.6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall Change the default password via SMT or web configurator. 127 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Limit who can telnet into your router. Don't enable any local service (such as SNMP or NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 10.6.1 Security In General You can never be too careful! Factors outside your firewall, filtering or NAT can cause security breaches. Below are some generalizations about what you can do to minimize them. Encourage your company or organization to develop a comprehensive security plan. Good network administration takes into account what hackers can do and prepares against attacks. The best defense against hackers and crackers is information. Educate all employees about the importance of security and how to minimize risk. Produce lists like this one!

DSL or cable modem connections are always-on connections and are particularly vulnerable because they provide more opportunities for hackers to crack your system. Turn your computer off when not in use. Never give out a password or any sensitive information to an unsolicited telephone call or e-mail. Never e-mail sensitive information such as passwords, credit card information, etc., without encrypting the information first. Never submit sensitive information via a web page unless the web site uses secure connections. You can identify a secure connection by looking for a small key icon on the bottom of your browser (Internet Explorer 3.02 or better or Netscape 3.0 or better). If a web site uses a secure connection, it is safe to submit information. Secure web transactions are quite difficult to crack. Never reveal your IP address or other system networking information to people outside your company. Be careful of files e-mailed to you from strangers. One common way of getting BackOrifice on a system is to include it as a Trojan horse with other files. Change your passwords regularly. Also, use passwords that are not easy to figure out. The most difficult passwords to crack are those with upper and lower case letters, numbers and a symbol such as % or #. Upgrade your software regularly. Many older versions of software, especially web browsers, have well known security deficiencies. When you upgrade to the latest versions, you get the latest patches and fixes. If you use chat rooms or IRC sessions, be careful with any information you reveal to strangers. If your system starts exhibiting odd behavior, contact your ISP. Some hackers will set off hacks that cause your system to slowly become unstable or unusable. Chapter 10 Firewalls 128 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Always shred confidential information, particularly about your computer, before throwing it away. Some hackers dig through the trash of companies or individuals for information that might help them in an attack. 10.7 Packet Filtering Vs Firewall Below are some comparisons between the Prestiges filtering and firewall functions. 10.7.1 Packet Filtering:

The router filters packets as they pass through the routers interface according to the filter rules you designed. Packet filtering is a powerful tool, yet can be complex to configure and maintain, especially if you need a chain of rules to filter a service. Packet filtering only checks the header portion of an IP packet. 10.7.1.1 When To Use Filtering To block/allow LAN packets by their MAC addresses. To block/allow special IP packets which are neither TCP nor UDP, nor ICMP packets. To block/allow both inbound (WAN to LAN) and outbound (LAN to WAN) traffic between the specific inside host/network "A" and outside host/network "B". If the filter blocks the traffic from A to B, it also blocks the traffic from B to A. Filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address. To block/allow IP trace route. 10.7.2 Firewall The firewall inspects packet contents as well as their source and destination addresses. Firewalls of this type employ an inspection module, applicable to all protocols, that understands data in the packet is intended for other layers, from the network layer (IP headers) up to the application layer. The firewall performs stateful inspection. It takes into account the state of connections it handles so that, for example, a legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request for that packet and allowed in. Conversely, an incoming packet masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be blocked. The firewall uses session filtering, i.e., smart rules, that enhance the filtering process and control the network session rather than control individual packets in a session. The firewall provides e-mail service to notify you of routine reports and when alerts occur. 10.7.2.1 When To Use The Firewall To prevent DoS attacks and prevent hackers cracking your network. 129 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide A range of source and destination IP addresses as well as port numbers can be specified within one firewall rule making the firewall a better choice when complex rules are required. To selectively block/allow inbound or outbound traffic between inside host/networks and outside host/networks. Remember that filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address. The firewall performs better than filtering if you need to check many rules. Use the firewall if you need routine e-mail reports about your system or need to be alerted when attacks occur. The firewall can block specific URL traffic that might occur in the future. The URL can be saved in an Access Control List (ACL) database. Chapter 10 Firewalls 130 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 131 Chapter 10 Firewalls P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 11 Firewall Configuration This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Prestige firewall. 11.1 Access Methods The web configurator is, by far, the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your Prestige has to offer. For this reason, it is recommended that you configure your firewall using the web configurator. SMT screens allow you to activate the firewall. CLI commands provide limited configuration options and are only recommended for advanced users. 11.2 Firewall Policies Overview Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:

LAN to LAN/ Router LAN to WAN WAN to LAN WAN to WAN/ Router Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN. By default, the Prestiges stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:

LAN to LAN/ Router This allows computers on the LAN to manage the Prestige and communicate between networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface. LAN to WAN By default, the Prestiges stateful packet inspection blocks packets traveling in the following directions:

WAN to LAN WAN to WAN/ Router This prevents computers on the WAN from using the Prestige as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN and/or managing the Prestige. You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 132 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: If you configure firewall rules without a good understanding of how they work, you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them. For example, you may create rules to:

Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow everyone except your competitors to access a Web server. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the Prestiges default rules. 11.3 Rule Logic Overview Note: Study these points carefully before configuring rules. 11.3.1 Rule Checklist State the intent of the rule. For example, This restricts all IRC access from the LAN to the Internet. Or, This allows a remote Lotus Notes server to synchronize over the Internet to an inside Notes server. 1 Is the intent of the rule to forward or block traffic?

2 What direction of traffic does the rule apply to?

3 What IP services will be affected?

4 What computers on the LAN are to be affected (if any)?

5 What computers on the Internet will be affected? The more specific, the better. For example, if traffic is being allowed from the Internet to the LAN, it is better to allow only certain machines on the Internet to access the LAN. 11.3.2 Security Ramifications 1 Once the logic of the rule has been defined, it is critical to consider the security ramifications created by the rule:

2 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?

3 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?

133 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 5 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?

6 Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of plugging the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 11.3.3 Key Fields For Configuring Rules 11.3.3.1 Action Should the action be to Block or Forward? Block means the firewall silently discards the packet. 11.3.3.2 Service Select the service from the Service scrolling list box. If the service is not listed, it is necessary to first define it. See Section 11.10 on page 146 for more information on predefined services. 11.3.3.3 Source Address What is the connections source address; is it on the LAN, WAN? Is it a single IP, a range of IPs or a subnet?

11.3.3.4 Destination Address What is the connections destination address; is it on the LAN, WAN? Is it a single IP, a range of IPs or a subnet?

11.4 Connection Direction This section describes examples for firewall rules for connections going from LAN to WAN and from WAN to LAN. LAN to LAN/ Router, WAN to WAN/ Router rules apply to packets coming in on the associated interface (LAN, WAN respectively). LAN to LAN/ Router means policies for LAN-to-Prestige (the policies for managing the Prestige through the LAN interface) and policies for LAN-to-LAN (the policies that control routing between two subnets on the LAN). Similarly, WAN to WAN/ Router polices apply in the same way to the WAN ports. 11.4.1 LAN to WAN Rules The default rule for LAN to WAN traffic is that all users on the LAN are allowed non-

restricted access to the WAN. When you configure a LAN to WAN rule, you in essence want to limit some or all users from accessing certain services on the WAN. WAN to LAN Rules Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 134 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The default rule for WAN to LAN traffic blocks all incoming connections (WAN to LAN). If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN, you will need to create custom rules to allow it. 11.4.2 Alerts Alerts are reports on events, such as attacks, that you may want to know about right away. You can choose to generate an alert when an attack is detected in the Edit Rule screen (select the Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched check box) or when a rule is matched in the Edit Rule screen. When an event generates an alert, a message can be immediately sent to an e-mail account that you specify in the Log Settings screen (see the chapter on logs). 11.5 Configuring Default Firewall Policy Click Firewall and then Default Policy to display the following screen. Activate the firewall by selecting the Firewall Enabled check box as seen in the following screen. Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Figure 51 Firewall: Default Policy The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Firewall: Default Policy LABEL Firewall Enabled Allow Asymmetrical Route DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate the firewall. The Prestige performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Select this check box to have the Prestige firewall permit the use of triangle route topology on the network. See the appendix for more on triangle route topology. 135 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 37 Firewall: Default Policy (continued) LABEL Packet Direction Default Action Log Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to LAN/Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to WAN/Router, WAN to LAN). Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to LAN/Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to either another computer/subnet on the LAN interface of the Prestige or the Prestige itself. Use the radio buttons to select whether to Block (silently discard) or Forward

(allow the passage of) packets that are traveling in the selected direction. Select the check box to create a log (when the above action is taken) for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the rules below. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.6 Rule Summary Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Click on Firewall, then Rule Summary to bring up the following screen. This screen is a summary of the existing rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 136 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 52 Firewall: Rule Summary The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Rule Summary LABEL Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use Packet Direction Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you DESCRIPTION This read-only bar shows how much of the Prestige's memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red. Default Policy Rule Active Source IP Destination IP Service want to configure firewall rules. This field displays the default action and log policy you selected in the Default Rule screen for the packet direction shown in the field above. The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure

(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings above. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. Click a rules number to go to the Firewall Edit Rule screen to configure or edit a firewall rule. This field displays whether a firewall is turned on (Y) or not (N). This drop-down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. This drop-down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. This drop-down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank service type is equivalent to Any. See Section 11.10 on page 146 for more information. 137 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 38 Rule Summary (continued) LABEL Action Schedule Log Alert Insert/Append Move Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the specified action for that rule, either Block or Forward. Note that Block means the firewall silently discards the packet. This field tells you whether a schedule is specified (Yes) or not (No). This field shows you whether a log is created when packets match this rule

(Enabled) or not (Disable). This field tells you whether this rule generates an alert (Yes) or not (No) when the rule is matched. Type the index number for where you want to put a rule. For example, if you type 6, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7. Click Insert to add a new firewall rule before the specified index number. Click Append to add a new firewall rule after the specified index number. Type a rules index number and the number for where you want to put that rule. Click Move to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.6.1 Configuring Firewall Rules Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Follow these directions to create a new rule. 1 In the Rule Summary screen, type the index number for where you want to put the rule. For example, if you type 6, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7. 2 Click Insert to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 138 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 53 Firewall: Edit Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen. 139 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 39 Firewall: Edit Rule LABEL Active Action for Matched Packet Source/Destination Address Address Type Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Add Edit Delete Services Available/ Selected Services Edit Customized Service Schedule DESCRIPTION Select this option to enable this firewall rule. Use the radio button to select whether to discard (Block) or allow the passage of

(Forward) packets that match this rule. Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (e.g., 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?

Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address. Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here. Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. Click Add to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box. You can add multiple addresses, ranges of addresses, and/or subnets. To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click Edit. Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it. Please see Section 11.10 on page 146 for more information on services available. Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left, then click Add>> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right, then click Remove. Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services. Day to Apply Select everyday or the day(s) of the week to apply the rule. Time of Day to Apply (24-Hour Format) Log Select All Day or enter the start and end times in the hour-minute format to apply the rule. Log Packet Detail Information This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created (Enable) or not (Disable). Go to the Log Settings page and select the Access Control logs category to have the Prestige record these logs. Alert Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched Back Apply Cancel Delete Select the check box to have the Prestige generate an alert when the rule is matched. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click Delete to remove this firewall rule and return to the Firewall Rule Summary screen. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 140 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 11.7 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the Prestige. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. For further information on these services, please read Section 11.10 on page 146. Click the Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen. Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Figure 54 Firewall: Customized Services The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Customized Services LABEL No. Name Protocol Port Back DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port. Click a rules number of a service to go to the Firewall Customized Services Config screen to configure or edit a customized service. This is the name of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized service. This is the port number or range that defines your customized service. Click Back to return the Firewall Edit Rule screen. 11.8 Configuring A Customized Service Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to create a new custom port or edit an existing one. This action displays the following screen. 141 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Figure 55 Firewall: Configure Customized Services The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Firewall: Configure Customized Services LABEL Service Name Service Type DESCRIPTION Type a unique name for your custom port. Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box. Port Configuration Type Port Number Back Apply Cancel Delete Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Click Back to return to the Firewall Customized Services screen. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. Click Delete to delete the current rule. 11.9 Example Firewall Rule The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical My Service connection from the Internet. 1 Click Firewall in the navigation panel and click Rule Summary. 2 Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 142 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 56 Firewall Example: Rule Summary 3 In the Rule Summary screen, type the index number for where you want to put the rule. For example, if you type 6, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7. 4 Click Insert to display the firewall rule configuration screen. 5 Select Any in the Destination Address box and then click Delete. 6 Configure the destination address screen as follows and click Add. 143 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 57 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7 In the Edit Rule screen, click the Customized Services link to open the Customized Service screen. 8 Click an index number to display the Customized Services -Config screen and configure the screen as follows and click Apply. Figure 58 Edit Custom Port Example 9 In the Edit Rule screen, use the Add>> and Remove buttons between Available Services and Selected Services list boxes to configure it as follows. Click Apply when you are done. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 144 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 59 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Select Customized Services Note: Custom ports show up with an * before their names in the Services list box and the Rule Summary list box. Click Apply after youve created your custom port. On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the Rule Summary screen should look like the following. 145 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Rule 2 allows a My Service connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10.0.0.10 through 10.0.0.15 on the LAN. Figure 60 Firewall Example: Rule Summary: My Service 11.10 Predefined Services The Available Services list box in the Edit Rule screen (see Section 11.6.1 on page 138) displays all predefined services that the Prestige already supports. Next to the name of the service, two fields appear in brackets. The first field indicates the IP protocol type (TCP, UDP, or ICMP). The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service. (Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type. For example, look at the default configuration labeled (DNS). (UDP/TCP:53) means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53. Up to 128 entries are supported. Custom service ports may also be configured using the Edit Customized Services function discussed previously. Table 42 Predefined Services DESCRIPTION SERVICE AOLs Internet Messenger service, used as a listening port by ICQ. AIM/NEW_ICQ(TCP:5190) Authentication protocol used by some servers. AUTH(TCP:113) Border Gateway Protocol. BGP(TCP:179) DHCP Client. BOOTP_CLIENT(UDP:68) BOOTP_SERVER(UDP:67) DHCP Server. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 146 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 42 Predefined Services (continued) SERVICE CU-SEEME(TCP/UDP:7648, 24032) DNS(UDP/TCP:53) FINGER(TCP:79) FTP(TCP:20.21) H.323(TCP:1720) HTTP(TCP:80) HTTPS ICQ(UDP:4000) IPSEC_TRANSPORT/

TUNNEL(AH:0) IPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0) DESCRIPTION A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. Net Meeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. This is a popular Internet chat program. The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. This is another popular Internet chat program. IRC(TCP/UDP:6667) MSN Messenger(TCP:1863) Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. MULTICAST(IGMP:0) NEWS(TCP:144) NFS(UDP:2049) NNTP(TCP:119) PING(ICMP:0) POP3(TCP:110) PPTP(TCP:1723) PPTP_TUNNEL(GRE:0) RCMD(TCP:512) REAL_AUDIO(TCP:7070) REXEC(TCP:514) RLOGIN(TCP:513) RTELNET(TCP:107) RTSP(TCP/UDP:554) SFTP(TCP:115) Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file-sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Simple File Transfer Protocol. 147 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 42 Predefined Services (continued) SERVICE SMTP(TCP:25) SNMP(TCP/UDP:161) SNMP-TRAPS (TCP/

UDP:162) SQL-NET(TCP:1521) SSDP(UDP:1900) SSH(TCP/UDP:22) STRMWORKS(UDP:1558) SYSLOG(UDP:514) TACACS(UDP:49) TELNET(TCP:23) TFTP(UDP:69) VDOLIVE(TCP:7000) DESCRIPTION Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Simole Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) is a discovery service searching for Universal Plug and Play devices on your home network or upstream Internet gateways using DUDP port 1900. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP

(Transmission Control Protocol). Another videoconferencing solution. 11.11 Anti-Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Prestige, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the Prestige exists. The Prestige supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your Prestige when unsupported ports are probed. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. Refer to Section 10.1 on page 118 for more information. Click Firewall in the navigation panel and click Anti Probing to display the screen as shown. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 148 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 61 Firewall: Anti Probing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Firewall: Anti Probing LABEL Respond to PING on Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services. Back Apply Reset DESCRIPTION The Prestige does not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the Prestige by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the Prestige will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the Prestige unseen. By default this option is not selected and the Prestige will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports. Note that the probing packets must first traverse the Prestige 's firewall mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the Prestige reacts based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command "sys firewall tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response packet. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.12 DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks, the Prestige uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements. Refer to Section 11.12.3 on page 151 to configure thresholds. 149 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 11.12.1 Threshold Values Tune these parameters when something is not working and after you have checked the firewall counters. These default values should work fine for most small offices. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:

The maximum number of opened sessions. The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network. The CPU power of servers in your LAN network. Network bandwidth. Type of traffic for certain servers. If your network is slower than average for any of these factors (especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy), then the default values should be reduced. You should make any changes to the threshold values before you continue configuring firewall rules. 11.12.2 Half-Open Sessions An unusually high number of half-open sessions (either an absolute number or measured as the arrival rate) could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is occurring. For TCP, "half-

open" means that the session has not reached the established state-the TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed (see Figure 47 on page 122). For UDP, "half-open"

means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. The Prestige measures both the total number of existing half-open sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts. Both TCP and UDP half-open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements. Measurements are made once a minute. When the number of existing half-open sessions rises above a threshold (max-incomplete high), the Prestige starts deleting half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. The Prestige continues to delete half-open requests as necessary, until the number of existing half-open sessions drops below another threshold (max-incomplete low). When the rate of new connection attempts rises above a threshold (one-minute high), the Prestige starts deleting half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. The Prestige continues to delete half-open sessions as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below another threshold (one-minute low). The rate is the number of new attempts detected in the last one-minute sample period. 11.12.2.1 TCP Maximum Incomplete and Blocking Time An unusually high number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is being launched against the host. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 150 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Whenever the number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address rises above a threshold (TCP Maximum Incomplete), the Prestige starts deleting half-open sessions according to one of the following methods:

If the Blocking Time timeout is 0 (the default), then the Prestige deletes the oldest existing half-open session for the host for every new connection request to the host. This ensures that the number of half-open sessions to a given host will never exceed the threshold. If the Blocking Time timeout is greater than 0, then the Prestige blocks all new connection requests to the host giving the server time to handle the present connections. The Prestige continues to block all new connection requests until the Blocking Time expires. 11.12.3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds The Prestige also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded. The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all TCP connections. Click Firewall, and Threshold to bring up the next screen. Figure 62 Firewall: Threshold The following table describes the labels in this screen. 151 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 44 Firewall: Threshold LABEL Denial of Service Thresholds One Minute Low One Minute High Maximum Incomplete Low Maximum Incomplete High TCP Maximum Incomplete DESCRIPTION DEFAULT VALUES 80 existing half-open sessions. 100 half-open sessions per minute. The above numbers cause the Prestige to start deleting half-open sessions when more than 100 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute, and to stop deleting half-

open sessions when fewer than 80 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute. 80 existing half-open sessions. 100 existing half-open sessions. The above values causes the Prestige to start deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions rises above 100, and to stop deleting half-open sessions with the number of existing half-open sessions drops below 80. 30 existing half-open TCP sessions. This is the rate of new half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The Prestige continues to delete half-open sessions as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number. This is the rate of new half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the Prestige deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The Prestige continues to delete half-open requests as necessary, until the number of existing half-

open sessions drops below this number. This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the number of existing half-open sessions rises above this number, the Prestige deletes half-

open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. Do not set Maximum Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete Low number. This is the number of existing half-open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half-open sessions to that same destination host IP address. Enter a number between 1 and 256. As a general rule, you should choose a smaller number for a smaller network, a slower system or limited bandwidth. Action taken when the TCP Maximum Incomplete threshold is reached. Delete the oldest half open session when new connection request comes Select this radio button to clear the oldest half open session when a new connection request comes. Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 152 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 44 Firewall: Threshold (continued) LABEL Deny new connection request for Back Apply Cancel DEFAULT VALUES DESCRIPTION Select this radio button and specify for how long the Prestige should block new connection requests when TCP Maximum Incomplete is reached. Enter the length of blocking time in minutes

(between 1 and 256). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 153 Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 12 Content Filtering This chapter covers how to configure content filtering. 12.1 Content Filtering Overview Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering gives you the ability to block web sites that contain key words

(that you specify) in the URL. You can set a schedule for when the Prestige performs content filtering. You can also specify trusted IP addresses on the LAN for which the Prestige will not perform content filtering. 12.2 The Main Content Filter Screen Click Content Filter to display the main Content Filtering screen. Figure 63 Content Filtering The following table describes the links in this screen. Table 45 LINK Keyword Schedule Trusted DESCRIPTION Click this link to display a screen where you can configure your Prestige to block Web sites containing keywords in their URLs, Click this link to display a screen where you can set the days and times for the Prestige to perform content filtering, Click this link to display a screen where you can exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your Prestige Chapter 12 Content Filtering 154 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 12.3 Configuring Keyword Blocking Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL. For example, if you enable the keyword "bad", the Prestige blocks all sites containing this keyword including the URL http://www.website.com/bad.html, even if it is not included in the Filter List. To have your Prestige block Web sites containing keywords in their URLs, click Content Filter and Keyword. The screen appears as shown. Figure 64 Content Filter: Keyword The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Content Filter: Keyword LABEL Enable Keyword Blocking Block Websites that contain these keywords in the URL:

Delete Clear All Keyword Add Keyword Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable this feature. This box contains the list of all the keywords that you have configured the Prestige to block. Highlight a keyword in the box and click Delete to remove it. Click Clear All to remove all of the keywords from the list. Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 127 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. Click Add Keyword after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 155 Chapter 12 Content Filtering P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 12.4 Configuring the Schedule To set the days and times for the Prestige to perform content filtering, click Content Filter and Schedule. The screen appears as shown. Figure 65 Content Filter: Schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Content Filter: Schedule LABEL Days to Block: Select a check box to configure which days of the week (or everyday) you want the DESCRIPTION Time of Day to Block:

Back Apply Cancel content filtering to be active. Use the 24 hour format to configure which time of the day (or select the All day check box) you want the content filtering to be active. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 12.5 Configuring Trusted Computers To exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your Prestige, click Content Filter and Trusted. The screen appears as shown. Chapter 12 Content Filtering 156 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 66 Content Filter: Trusted The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Content Filter: Trusted LABEL Trusted User IP Range From To Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer (or the beginning IP address of a specific range of computers) on the LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering. Type the ending IP address of a specific range of users on your LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering. Leave this field blank if you want to exclude an individual computer. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 157 Chapter 12 Content Filtering P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 13 Remote Management Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring remote management. 13.1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Prestige interface (if any) from which computers. When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via:

Internet (WAN only) ALL (LAN and WAN) LAN only, Neither (Disable). When you Choose WAN only or ALL (LAN & WAN), you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field. You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The Prestige automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows. 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 13.1.1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

Chapter 13 Remote Management Configuration 158 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide A filter in SMT menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) is applied to block a Telnet, FTP or Web service. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. 13.1.2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the Prestiges WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the Prestiges LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 13.1.3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. 13.2 Telnet You can configure your Prestige for remote Telnet access as shown next. Figure 67 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network 159 Chapter 13 Remote Management Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 13.3 FTP You can upload and download Prestige firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. 13.4 Web You can use the Prestiges embedded web configurator for configuration and file management. See the online help for details. 13.5 Configuring Remote Management Click Remote Management to open the following screen. See Section 13.1 on page 158 for more information. Figure 68 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 49 Remote Management LABEL Server Type Access Status Port Secured Client IP Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Each of these labels denotes a service that you may use to remotely manage the Prestige. Select the access interface. Choices are All, LAN Only, WAN Only and Disable. This field shows the port number for the remote management service. You may change the port number for a service in this field, but you must use the same port number to use that service for remote management. The default 0.0.0.0 allows any client to use this service to remotely manage the Prestige. Type an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address. Click Apply to save your settings back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Chapter 13 Remote Management Configuration 160 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 161 Chapter 13 Remote Management Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator. 14.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See Section 14.2.1 on page 163 for configuration instructions. 14.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 14.1.2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 162 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 14.1.3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. 14.2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports IGD 1.0

(Internet Gateway Device). At the time of writing ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4.6 and 4.7 while Windows Messenger 5.0 and Xbox are still being tested. UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN. See later sections for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows. 14.2.1 Configuring UPnP From the Site Map in the main menu, click UPnP under Advanced Setup to display the screen shown next. See Section 14.1 on page 162 for more information. Figure 69 Configuring UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen. 163 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 50 Configuring UPnP LABEL Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Service Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Prestige's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Prestige so that they can communicate through the Prestige, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled applications to bypass the firewall. Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application packets (for example, MSN packets). Click Apply to save the setting to the Prestige. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 14.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 164 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 70 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 71 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. 5 Restart the computer when prompted. 165 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Figure 72 Network Connections 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 166 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 73 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. 167 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 74 Networking Services P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 14.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Prestige. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Prestige. Turn on your computer and the Prestige. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 168 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 75 Network Connections 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. 169 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 76 Internet Connection Properties P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 170

 

 

P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 77 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 78 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. 171 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 79 System Tray Icon P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 80 Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Prestige without finding out the IP address of the Prestige first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Prestige. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 172 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 81 Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 5 Right-click on the icon for your Prestige and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. 173 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 82 Network Connections: My Network Places P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 6 Right-click on the icon for your Prestige and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the Prestige. Figure 83 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 174 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 175 Chapter 14 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 15 Logs Screens This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the Prestiges logs. Refer to the appendix for example log message explanations. 15.1 Logs Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the Prestige log and then display the logs or have the Prestige send them to an administrator

(as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 15.1.1 Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. 15.2 Configuring Log Settings Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the Prestige is to send logs; the schedule for when the Prestige is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Prestige is to record. See Section 15.1 on page 176 for more information. To change your Prestiges log settings, click Logs, then the Log Settings. The screen appears as shown. Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full. Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-

mails being sent. Chapter 15 Logs Screens 176 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 84 Log Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 51 Log Settings LABEL Address Info Mail Server Mail Subject Send log to DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via e-mail. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the Prestige sends. Logs are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, logs will not be sent via e-mail. 177 Chapter 15 Logs Screens P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 51 Log Settings LABEL Send alerts to UNIX Syslog Active Syslog IP Address Log Facility Send Log Log Schedule Day for Sending Log Time for Sending Log Log Send Immediate Alert Back Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Alerts are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, alerts will not be sent via e-mail. Syslog logging sends a log to an external syslog server used to store logs. Click Active to enable syslog logging. Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None. If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs. Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to send the logs. Select the categories of logs that you want to record. Logs include alerts. Select the categories of alerts for which you want the Prestige to instantly e-mail alerts to the e-mail address specified in the Send Alerts To field. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 15.3 Displaying the Logs Click Logs and then View Log to open the View Logs screen. Use the View Logs screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 15.2 on page 176). Log entries in red indicate alerts. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Chapter 15 Logs Screens 178 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 85 View Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 52 View Logs LABEL Display Time Message Source Destination DESCRIPTION The categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop-down list box. Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field states the reason for the log. This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet. This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet. This field displays additional information about the log entry. Click Back to return to the previous screen Notes Back Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings). Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. Refresh Clear Log 15.4 SMTP Error Messages If there are difficulties in sending e-mail the following error messages appear. E-mail error messages appear in SMT menu 24.3.1 as "SMTP action request failed. ret= ??". The ??"are described in the following table. Table 53 SMTP Error Messages

-1 means Prestige out of socket

-2 means tcp SYN fail

-3 means smtp server OK fail

-4 means HELO fail

-5 means MAIL FROM fail 179 Chapter 15 Logs Screens P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 53 SMTP Error Messages

-6 means RCPT TO fail

-7 means DATA fail

-8 means mail data send fail 15.4.1 Example E-mail Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. Figure 86 E-mail Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Prestige Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log Chapter 15 Logs Screens 180 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 181 Chapter 15 Logs Screens P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup This chapter describes bandwidth management with one level of child class. 16.1 Media Bandwidth Management Overview Bandwidth management allows you to allocate an interfaces outgoing capacity to specific types of traffic. It can also help you make sure that the Prestige forwards certain types of traffic (especially real-time applications) with minimum delay. With the use of real-time applications such as Voice-over-IP (VoIP) increasing, the requirement for bandwidth allocation is also increasing. Bandwidth management addresses questions such as:

Who gets how much access to specific applications?

What priority level should you give to each type of traffic?

Which traffic must have guaranteed delivery?

How much bandwidth should be allotted to guarantee delivery?

Bandwidth management also allows you to configure the allowed output for an interface to match what the network can handle. This helps reduce delays and dropped packets at the next routing device. For example, you can set the WAN interface speed to 1000kbps if the ADSL connection has an upstream speed of 1Mbps. All configuration screens display measurements in kbps (kilobits per second), but this Users Guide also uses Mbps (megabits per second) for brevitys sake. Refer to Section 16.9 on page 188 to enable and configure bandwidth on the interfaces. Refer to Section 16.10 on page 190 to configure bandwidth classes. Refer to Section 16.11 on page 194 to view bandwidth usage information. 16.2 Bandwidth Classes and Filters Use bandwidth classes and child-classes to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity

(bandwidth budgets). Configure a bandwidth filter to define a bandwidth class (or child-class) based on a specific application and/or subnet. Use the Class Configuration screen (see Section 16.10 on page 190) to set up a bandwidth classs name, bandwidth allotment, and Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 182 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide bandwidth filter. You can configure up to one bandwidth filter per bandwidth class. You can also configure bandwidth classes without bandwidth filters. However, it is recommended that you configure child-classes with filters for any classes that you configure without filters. The Prestige leaves the bandwidth budget allocated and unused for a class that does not have a filter itself or child-classes with filters. View your configured bandwidth classes and child-

classes in the Class Setup screen (see Section 16.10 on page 190 for details). The total of the configured bandwidth budgets for child-classes cannot exceed the configured bandwidth budget speed of the parent class. 16.3 Proportional Bandwidth Allocation Bandwidth management allows you to define how much bandwidth each class gets; however, the actual bandwidth allotted to each class decreases or increases in proportion to actual available bandwidth. 16.4 Bandwidth Management Usage Examples These examples show bandwidth management allotments on a WAN interface that is configured for 640Kbps. 16.4.1 Application-based Bandwidth Management Example The bandwidth classes in the following example are based solely on application. Each bandwidth class (VoIP, Web, FTP, E-mail and Video) is allotted 128kbps. Figure 87 Application-based Bandwidth Management Example 16.4.2 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example The following example uses bandwidth classes based solely on LAN subnets. Each bandwidth class (Subnet A and Subnet B) is allotted 320kbps. 183 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup Figure 88 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 16.4.3 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example The following example uses bandwidth classes based on LAN subnets and applications

(specific applications in each subnet are allotted bandwidth). Table 54 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example TRAFFIC TYPE VoIP Web FTP E-mail Video FROM SUBNET A 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps FROM SUBNET B 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps Figure 89 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 184 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 16.5 Scheduler The scheduler divides up an interfaces bandwidth among the bandwidth classes. The Prestige has two types of scheduler: fairness-based and priority-based. 16.5.1 Priority-based Scheduler With the priority-based scheduler, the Prestige forwards traffic from bandwidth classes according to the priorities that you assign to the bandwidth classes. The larger a bandwidth classs priority number is, the higher the priority. Assign real-time applications (like those using audio or video) a higher priority number to provide smoother operation. 16.5.2 Fairness-based Scheduler The Prestige divides bandwidth equally among bandwidth classes when using the fairness-

based scheduler; thus preventing one bandwidth class from using all of the interfaces bandwidth. 16.6 Maximize Bandwidth Usage The maximize bandwidth usage option (see Section 16.7.1 on page 187) allows the Prestige to divide up any available bandwidth on the interface (including unallocated bandwidth and any allocated bandwidth that a class is not using) among the bandwidth classes that require more bandwidth. When you enable maximize bandwidth usage, the Prestige first makes sure that each bandwidth class gets up to its bandwidth allotment. Next, the Prestige divides up an interfaces available bandwidth (bandwidth that is unbudgeted or unused by the classes) depending on how many bandwidth classes require more bandwidth and on their priority levels. When only one class requires more bandwidth, the Prestige gives extra bandwidth to that class. When multiple classes require more bandwidth, the Prestige gives the highest priority classes the available bandwidth first (as much as they require, if there is enough available bandwidth), and then to lower priority classes if there is still bandwidth available. The Prestige distributes the available bandwidth equally among classes with the same priority level. 16.6.1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non-Bandwidth Class Traffic Do the following three steps to configure the Prestige to allow bandwidth for traffic that is not defined in a bandwidth filter. 1 Leave some of the interfaces bandwidth unbudgeted. 2 Do not enable the interfaces Maximize Bandwidth Usage option. 3 Do not enable bandwidth borrowing on the child-classes that have the root class as their parent (see Section 16.7 on page 187). 185 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 16.6.2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example Here is an example of a Prestige that has maximized bandwidth usage enabled on an interface. The first figure shows each bandwidth classs bandwidth budget and priority. The classes are set up based on subnets. The interface is set to 10 Mbps. Each subnet is allocated 2 Mbps. The unbudgeted 2 Mbps allows traffic not defined in one of the bandwidth filters to go out when you do not select the maximize bandwidth option. Figure 90 Bandwidth Allotment Example The following figure shows the bandwidth usage with the maximize bandwidth usage option enabled. The Prestige divides up the unbudgeted 2 Mbps among the classes that require more bandwidth. If the administration department only uses 1 Mbps of the budgeted 2 Mbps, the Prestige also divides the remaining 1 Mbps among the classes that require more bandwidth. Therefore, the Prestige divides a total of 3 Mbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth among the classes that require more bandwidth. In this case, suppose that all of the classes except for the administration class need more bandwidth. Each class gets up to its budgeted bandwidth. The administration class only uses 1 Mbps of its budgeted 2 Mbps. Sales and Marketing are first to get extra bandwidth because they have the highest priority (6). If they each require 1.5 Mbps or more of extra bandwidth, the Prestige divides the total 3 Mbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth equally between the sales and marketing departments (1.5 Mbps extra to each for a total of 3.5 Mbps for each) because they both have the highest priority level. R&D requires more bandwidth but only gets its budgeted 2 Mbps because all of the unbudgeted and unused bandwidth goes to the higher priority sales and marketing classes. The Prestige does not send any traffic that is not defined in the bandwidth filters because all of the unbudgeted bandwidth goes to the classes that need it. Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 186 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 91 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example 16.7 Bandwidth Borrowing Bandwidth borrowing allows a child-class to borrow unused bandwidth from its parent class, whereas maximize bandwidth usage allows bandwidth classes to borrow any unused or unbudgeted bandwidth on the whole interface. Enable bandwidth borrowing on a child-class to allow the child-class to use its parent classs unused bandwidth. A parent classs unused bandwidth is given to the highest-priority child-

class that has bandwidth borrowing configured, first. The total of the bandwidth allotments for child-classes cannot exceed the bandwidth allotment of their parent class. The Prestige uses the scheduler to divide a parent classs unused bandwidth among the child-classes. 16.7.1 Maximize Bandwidth Usage With Bandwidth Borrowing If you configure both maximize bandwidth usage (on the interface) and bandwidth borrowing

(on individual child-classes), the Prestige functions as follows. 1 The Prestige sends traffic according to each bandwidth classs bandwidth budget. 2 The Prestige assigns a parent classs unused bandwidth to its child-classes that have more traffic than their budgets and have bandwidth borrowing enabled. The Prestige gives priority to bandwidth child-classes of higher priority and treats bandwidth classes of the same priority equally. 3 The Prestige assigns any remaining unused or unbudgeted bandwidth on the interface to any bandwidth class that requires it. The Prestige gives priority to bandwidth classes of higher priority and treats bandwidth classes of the same level equally. 187 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4 The Prestige assigns any remaining unbudgeted bandwidth to traffic that does not match any of the bandwidth classes. 16.8 The Main Media Bandwidth Management Screen Click Media Bandwidth Mgnt. to display the main Media Bandwidth Management screen as shown. Figure 92 Media Bandwidth Mgnt. The following table describes the links in this screen. Table 55 Media Bandwidth Mgnt. LINK Summary Class Setup Monitor DESCRIPTION Click this link to display a screen where you can enable bandwidth management on an interface and set the maximum allowed bandwidth for that interface. Click this link to display a screen thwere you can configure bandwidth classes. Click this link to display a screen wehre you can view bandwidth usage. 16.9 Configuring Summary Click Media Bandwidth Management, Summary to open the screen as shown next. Enable bandwidth management on an interface and set the maximum allowed bandwidth for that interface. Refer to Section 16.1 on page 182 for more information. Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 188 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 93 Media Bandwidth Management: Summary The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Media Bandwidth Management: Summary LABEL LAN WLAN WAN DESCRIPTION These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Select an interfaces check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffics source. Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the Prestige and be managed by bandwidth management. Select an interfaces check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface. Active Speed (kbps) Enter the amount of bandwidth for this interface that you want to allocate using bandwidth management. This appears as the bandwidth budget of the interfaces root class. The recommendation is to set this speed to match what the interfaces connection can handle. For example, set the WAN interface speed to 10000 kbps if the ADSL connection has an upstream speed of 10Mbps. Select either Priority-Based or Fairness-Based from the drop-down menu to control the traffic flow. Select Priority-Based to give preference to bandwidth classes with higher priorities. Select Fairness-Based to treat all bandwidth classes equally. Select this check box to have the Prestige divide up all of the interfaces unallocated and/or unused bandwidth among the bandwidth classes that require bandwidth. Do not select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a bandwidth class or you want to limit the speed of this interface (see the Speed field description). Click Back to go to the main Media Bandwidth Management screen. Click Apply to save your settings back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Scheduler Maximize Bandwidth Usage Back Apply Cancel 189 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 16.10 Configuring Class Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The class setup screen displays the configured bandwidth classes by individual interface. Select an interface and click the buttons to perform the actions described next. Click + to expand the class tree or click -to collapse the class tree. Each interface has a permanent root class. The bandwidth budget of the root class is equal to the speed you configured on the interface (see Section 16.9 on page 188 to configure the speed of the interface). Configure child-class layers for the root class. Refer to Section 16.1 on page 182 for more information. To add or delete child classes on an interface, click Media Bandwidth Management, then Class Setup. The screen appears as shown (with example classes). Figure 94 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Setup LABEL Interface Back Add Child-Class Edit Delete Statistics DESCRIPTION Select an interface from the drop-down list box for which you wish to set up classes. Click Back to go to the main Media Bandwidth Management screen. Click Add Child-class to add a sub-class. Click Edit to configure the selected class. You cannot edit the root class. Click Delete to delete the class and all its child-classes. You cannot delete the root class. Click Statistics to display the status of the selected class. 16.10.1 Media Bandwidth Management Class Configuration Configure a bandwidth management class in the Class Configuration screen. You must use the Media Bandwidth Management - Summary screen to enable bandwidth management on an interface before you can configure classes for that interface. Refer to Section 16.1 on page 182 for more information. Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 190 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide To add a child class, click Media Bandwidth Management, then Class Setup. Click the Add Child-Class button to open the following screen. Figure 95 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Configuration LABEL Class Name BW Budget (kbps) Priority Borrow bandwidth from parent class DESCRIPTION Use the auto-generated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters, including spaces. Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the class in kbps. The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual class. Enter a number between 0 and 7 to set the priority of this class. The higher the number, the higher the priority. The default setting is 3. Select this option to allow a child-class to borrow bandwidth from its parent class if the parent class is not using up its bandwidth budget. Bandwidth borrowing is governed by the priority of the child-classes. That is, a child-class with the highest priority (7) is the first to borrow bandwidth from its parent class. Do not select this for the classes directly below the root class if you want to leave bandwidth available for other traffic types or you want to set the interfaces speed to match what the next device in network can handle (see the Speed field description in the Summary screen). Bandwidth Filter The Prestige uses a bandwidth filter to identify the traffic that belongs to a bandwidth class. 191 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management: Class Configuration (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide LABEL Active Service Destination IP Address Destination Subnet Mask Destination Port DESCRIPTION Select the check box to have the Prestige use this bandwidth filter when it performs bandwidth management. You can select a predefined service instead of configuring the Destination Port, Source Port and Protocol ID fields. SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is a signaling protocol used in Internet telephony, instant messaging and other VoIP (Voice over IP) applications. Select SIP from the drop-down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses SIP. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP/IP networks. A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. The service allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files. Select FTP from the drop-down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for FTP traffic. H.323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio, data and video conferencing. It allows for real-time point-to-point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet-based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service. Select H.323 from the drop-

down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses H.323. When you select None, the bandwidth class applies to all services unless you specify one by configuring the Destination Port, Source Port and Protocol ID fields. Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank destination IP address means any destination IP address. Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Destination IP Address. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting. Enter the port number of the destination. A blank destination port means any destination port. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address. A blank source IP address means any source IP Source Subnet Mask Source Port Protocol ID Back Apply Cancel address. Enter the source subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Source IP Address. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting. Enter the port number of the source. See the following table for some common services and port numbers. A blank source port means any source port number. Enter the protocol ID (service type) number, for example: 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP or 17 for UDP. A blank protocol ID means any protocol number. Click Back to go to the main Media Bandwidth Management screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Table 59 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) PORT NUMBER 7 21 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 192 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 59 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) PORT NUMBER 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 16.10.2 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics Use the Media Bandwidth Management Statistics screen to view network performance information. Click the Statistics button in the Class Setup screen to open the Statistics screen. Figure 96 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics LABEL Class Name Budget (kbps) Tx Packets Tx Bytes Dropped Packets Dropped Bytes Bandwidth Statistics for the Past 8 Seconds (t-8 to t-1) DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the class the statistics page is showing. This field displays the amount of bandwidth allocated to the class. This field displays the total number of packets transmitted. This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted. This field displays the total number of packets dropped. This field displays the total number of bytes dropped. 193 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Statistics P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide DESCRIPTION LABEL This field displays the bandwidth statistics (in bps) for the past one to eight seconds. For example, t-1 means one second ago. Update Period

(seconds) Set Interval Enter the time interval in seconds to define how often the information should be refreshed. Click Set Interval to apply the new update period you entered in the Update Period field above. Click Stop Update to stop the browser from refreshing bandwidth management statistics. Click Clear Counter to clear all of the bandwidth management statistics. Stop Update Clear Counter 16.11 Bandwidth Monitor To view the Prestiges bandwidth usage and allotments, click Media Bandwidth Management, then Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 97 Media Bandwidth Management: Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Media Bandwidth Management: Monitor LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION Select an interface from the drop-down list box to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth classes. This field displays the name of the class. This field displays the amount of bandwidth allocated to the class. Class Name Budget (kbps) Current Usage (kbps) This field displays the amount of bandwidth that each class is using. Back Refresh Click Back to go to the main Media Bandwidth Management screen. Click Refresh to update the page. Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup 194 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 195 Chapter 16 Media Bandwidth Management Advanced Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 17 Maintenance This chapter displays system information such as ZyNOS firmware, port IP addresses and port traffic statistics. 17.1 Maintenance Overview The maintenance screens can help you view system information, upload new firmware, manage configuration and restart your Prestige. 17.2 System Status Screen Click System Status under Maintenance to open the following screen, where you can use to monitor your Prestige. Note that these fields are READ-ONLY and only for diagnostic purposes. Chapter 17 Maintenance 196 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 98 System Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 System Status LABEL System Status System Name DESCRIPTION This is the name of your Prestige. It is for identification purposes. 197 Chapter 17 Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 62 System Status (continued) LABEL ZyNOS Firmware Version DSL FW Version Standard WAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway VPI/VCI LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP DHCP Start IP DHCP Pool Size WLAN Information ESSID Channel WEP Show Statistics DESCRIPTION This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date created. ZyNOS is ZyXEL's proprietary Network Operating System design. This is the DSL firmware version associated with your Prestige. This is the standard that your Prestige is using. This is the WAN port IP address. This is the WAN port IP subnet mask. This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the first Wizard screen. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your Prestige. This is the LAN port IP address. This is the LAN port IP subnet mask. This is the WAN port DHCP role - Server, Relay (not all Prestige models) or None. This is the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This is the number of IP addresses in the IP address pool. This is the descriptive name used to identify the Prestige in the wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the Prestige now. This displays the status of WEP data encryption. Click Show Statistics to see the performance statistics such as number of packets sent and number of packets received for each port. 17.2.1 System Statistics Click Show Statistics in the System Status screen to open the following screen. Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics. Also provided are "system up time" and "poll interval(s)". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable. Chapter 17 Maintenance 198 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 99 System Status: Show Statistics The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 63 System Status: Show Statistics DESCRIPTION This is the elapsed time the system has been up. This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization. This is the WAN or LAN port. LABEL System up Time CPU Load LAN or WAN Port Statistics Link Status Upstream Speed Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your Prestige. Node-Link This is the status of your WAN link. This is the upstream speed of your Prestige. Interface Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time Collisions This field displays the remote node index number and link type. Link types are PPPoA, ENET, RFC 1483 and PPPoE. This field displays the type of port. For the WAN port, this displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and down (line is down), idle (line (ppp) idle), dial

(starting to trigger a call) and drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For a LAN port, this shows the port speed and duplex setting. This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port. This field displays the number of packets received on this port. This field displays the number of error packets on this port. This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second. This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second. This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up. This is the number of collisions on this port. 199 Chapter 17 Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 63 System Status: Show Statistics (continued) LABEL Poll Interval(s) Set Interval Stop DESCRIPTION Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above. Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics. 17.3 DHCP Table Screen DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Prestige provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If set to None, DHCP service will be disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click Maintenance, and then the DHCP Table tab. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP Client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the DHCP server. Figure 100 DHCP Table The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 64 DHCP Table LABEL Host Name IP Address MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the computer with the DESCRIPTION This is the name of the host computer. This field displays the IP address relative to the Host Name field. displayed host name. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Chapter 17 Maintenance 200 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 17.4 Any IP Table Screen Click Maintenance, Any IP. The Any IP table shows current read-only information

(including the IP address and the MAC address) of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige. Figure 101 Any IP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION

IP Address MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the computer with the This field displays the index number. This field displays the IP address of the network device. displayed IP address. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Click Refresh to update this screen. Refresh 17.5 Wireless Screen The read-only screen displays information about the Prestiges wireless LAN. 17.5.1 Association List This screen displays the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently logged in to the network. Click Wireless LAN and then Association List to open the screen shown next. 201 Chapter 17 Maintenance Figure 102 Association List P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 66 Association List LABEL

MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an associated wireless DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. station. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. This field displays the time a wireless station is associated to the Prestige. Association Time Back Refresh Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Refresh to renew the information in the table. 17.6 Diagnostic Screens These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige. 17.6.1 General Diagnostic Click Diagnostic and then General to open the screen shown next. Chapter 17 Maintenance 202 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 103 Diagnostic: General The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 Diagnostic: General DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. LABEL TCP/IP Address Ping Reset System Click this button to reboot the Prestige. A warning dialog box is then displayed asking Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered. Back you if you're sure you want to reboot the system. Click OK to proceed. Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen. 17.6.2 DSL Line Diagnostic Click Diagnostic and then DSL Line to open the screen shown next. 203 Chapter 17 Maintenance Figure 104 Diagnostic: DSL Line P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 68 Diagnostic: DSL Line LABEL Reset ADSL Line ATM Status ATM Loopback Test Upstream Noise Margin Downstream Noise Margin Back DESCRIPTION Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:

"Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F/W... Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"

Click this button to view ATM status. Click this button to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The Prestige sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the Prestige. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network. Click this button to display the upstream noise margin. Click this button to display the downstream noise margin. Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen. Chapter 17 Maintenance 204 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 17.7 Firmware Upgrade Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a.bin extension, for example, "Prestige.bin". The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See Chapter 33 on page 306 for upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your device. Click Firmware to open the following screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige. Figure 105 Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Firmware Upgrade LABEL File Path Browse... Upload Reset DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Click this button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Prestige to its factory defaults. Note: Do NOT turn off the Prestige while firmware upload is in progress!

After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Prestige again. 205 Chapter 17 Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 106 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the System Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Back to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 107 Error Message Chapter 17 Maintenance 206 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 207 Chapter 17 Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 18 Introducing the SMT This chapter explains how to access and navigate the System Management Terminal and gives an overview of its menus. 18.1 SMT Introduction The Prestiges SMT (System Management Terminal) is a menu-driven interface that you can access from a terminal emulator over a telnet connection. This chapter shows you how to access the SMT (System Management Terminal) menus via Telnet, how to navigate the SMT and how to configure SMT menus. 18.1.1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet The following procedure details how to telnet into your Prestige. 1 In Windows, click Start (usually in the bottom left corner), Run and then type "telnet 192.168.1.1" (the default IP address) and click OK. 2 Enter 1234 in the Password field. 3 After entering the password you will see the main menu. Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes (default timeout period) after you log in, your Prestige will automatically log you out. You will then have to telnet into the Prestige again. 18.1.2 Entering Password The login screen appears after you press [ENTER], prompting you to enter the password, as shown next. For your first login, enter the default password "1234". As you type the password, the screen displays an asterisk "*" for each character you type. Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in, your Prestige will automatically log you out. Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT 208 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 108 Login Screen Enter Password: ****

18.1.3 Prestige SMT Menus Overview The following table gives you an overview of your Prestiges various SMT menus. Table 70 SMT Menus Overview MENUS 1 General Setup 2 WAN Backup Setup 3 LAN Setup SUB MENUS 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Setup 3.5 Wireless LAN Setup 4 Internet Access Setup 11 Remote Node Setup 11.1 Remote Node Profile 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 11.5 Remote Node Filter 11.6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options 11.8 Advance Setup Options (PPPoE passthrough) 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup 3.5.1 WLAN MAC Address Filter 12 Static Routing Setup 12.1 Edit Static Route Setup 14 Dial-in User Setup 15 NAT Setup 12.3 Bridge Static Route Setup 14.1 Edit Dial-in User 15.1 Address Mapping Sets 12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route 15.1.x Address Mapping Rules 15.1.x.x Address Mapping Rule 21 Filter and Firewall Rule Setup 22 SNMP Configuration 23 System Security 15.2 NAT Server Sets 21.1 Filter Setup 15.2.x NAT Server Setup 21.1 Filter Rules Summary 21.1.x.1 Generic Filter Rule 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule 21.2 Firewall Setup 23.1 Change Password 23.2 RADIUS Server 23.4 IEEE 802.1X 209 Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 70 SMT Menus Overview (continued) MENUS 24 System Maintenance 24.1 Status SUB MENUS 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed 24.3 Log and Trace 24.4 Diagnostic 24.5 Backup Configuration 24.6 Restore Configuration 24.7 Upload Firmware 24.8 Command Interpreter Mode 24.9 Call Control 24.10 Time and Date Setting 24.11 Remote Management Control 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup 26.1 Schedule Set Setup 25 IP Routing Policy Setup 26 Schedule Setup 18.2 Navigating the SMT Interface 24.2.1 Information 24.2.2 Change Console Port Speed 24.3.1 View Error Log 24.3.2 UNIX Syslog 24.7.1 Upload System Firmware 24.7.2 Upload System Configuration File 24.9.1 Budget Management 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy The SMT (System Management Terminal) is the interface that you use to configure your Prestige. Several operations that you should be familiar with before you attempt to modify the configuration are listed in the table below. Table 71 Navigating the SMT Interface OPERATION Move down to another menu Move up to a previous menu Move to a hidden menu Move the cursor KEY STROKE

[ENTER]

[ESC]

DESCRIPTION To move forward to a submenu, type in the number of the desired submenu and press [ENTER]. Press [ESC] to move back to the previous menu. Press [SPACE BAR] to change No to Yes then press [ENTER].

[ENTER] or [UP]/

[DOWN] arrow keys. Fields beginning with "Edit" lead to hidden menus and have a default setting of No. Press [SPACE BAR] once to change No to Yes, then press [ENTER] to go to the "hidden" menu. Within a menu, press [ENTER] to move to the next field. You can also use the [UP]/[DOWN] arrow keys to move to the previous and the next field, respectively. Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT 210 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 71 Navigating the SMT Interface OPERATION Entering information Required fields KEY STROKE Type in or press

[SPACE BAR], then press

[ENTER].

<? > or ChangeMe N/A fields

<N/A>

[ENTER]

Save your configuration Exit the SMT DESCRIPTION You need to fill in two types of fields. The first requires you to type in the appropriate information. The second allows you to cycle through the available choices by pressing [SPACE BAR]. All fields with the symbol <?> must be filled in order to be able to save the new configuration. All fields with ChangeMe must not be left blank in order to be able to save the new configuration. Some of the fields in the SMT will show a <N/A>. This symbol refers to an option that is Not Applicable. Save your configuration by pressing [ENTER] at the message

"Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel". Saving the data on the screen will take you, in most cases to the previous menu. Type 99, then press [ENTER].Type 99 at the main menu prompt and press [ENTER] to exit the SMT interface. After you enter the password, the SMT displays the main menu, as shown next. Table 72 SMT Main Menu Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp. Prestige 660W-T1 Main Menu Getting Started Advanced Management 1. General Setup 21. Filter and Firewall Setup 2. WAN Backup Setup 22. SNMP Configuration 3. LAN Setup 23. System Security 4. Internet Access Setup 24. System Maintenance 25. IP Routing Policy Setup Advanced Applications 26. Schedule Setup 11. Remote Node Setup 12. Static Routing Setup 14. Dial-in User Setup 99. Exit 15. NAT Setup Enter Menu Selection Number:

18.2.1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary Table 73 Main Menu Summary

1 2 MENU TITLE General Setup WAN Backup Setup DESCRIPTION Use this menu to set up your general information. Use this menu to setup traffic redirect and dial-back up. 211 Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT Table 73 Main Menu Summary P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

3 4 11 12 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 26 99 MENU TITLE LAN Setup Internet Access Setup Remote Node Setup DESCRIPTION Use this menu to set up your wireless LAN and LAN connection. A quick and easy way to set up an Internet connection. Use this menu to set up the Remote Node for LAN-to-LAN connection, including Internet connection. Use this menu to set up static routes. Use this menu to set up local user profiles on the Prestige. Use this menu to specify inside servers when NAT is enabled. Static Routing Setup Dial-in User Setup NAT Setup Filter and Firewall Setup Use this menu to configure filters, activate/deactivate the firewall SNMP Configuration System Security System Maintenance IP Routing Policy Setup Schedule Setup Exit and view the firewall log. Use this menu to set up SNMP related parameters. Use this menu to set up wireless security and change your password. This menu provides system status, diagnostics, software upload, etc. Use this menu to configure your IP routing policy. Use this menu to schedule outgoing calls. Use this to exit from SMT and return to a blank screen. 18.3 Changing the System Password Change the Prestige default password by following the steps shown next. 1 Enter 23 in the main menu to display Menu 23 - System Security. 2 Enter 1 to display Menu 23.1 - System Security - Change Password as shown next. 3 Type your existing system password in the Old Password field, for example 1234", and press [ENTER]. Figure 109 Menu 23.1 Change Password Menu 23.1 - System Security - Change Password Old Password= ?

New Password= ?

Retype to confirm=?

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

4 Type your new system password in the New Password field (up to 30 characters), and press [ENTER]. 5 Re-type your new system password in the Retype to confirm field for confirmation and press [ENTER]. Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT 212 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an * for each character you type. 213 Chapter 18 Introducing the SMT P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 19 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 - General Setup contains administrative and system-related information. 19.1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system-related information (shown next). The System Name field is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". In Windows 95/98 click Start, Settings, Control Panel, Network. Click the Identification tab, note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name. In Windows 2000 click Start, Settings, Control Panel and then double-click System. Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name. In Windows XP, click start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name. The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP. 19.2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 Enter 1 in the Main Menu to open Menu 1 General Setup (shown next). Chapter 19 Menu 1 General Setup 214 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 110 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup System Name= ?

Location=

Contact Person's Name=

Domain Name=

Edit Dynamic DNS= No Route IP= Yes Bridge= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Fill in the required fields. Refer to the table shown next for more information about these fields. Table 74 Menu 1 General Setup FIELD System Name Location (optional) Contact Person's Name (optional) Domain Name Edit Dynamic DNS Route IP Bridge DESCRIPTION Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - and underscores "_" are accepted. Enter the geographic location (up to 31 characters) of your Prestige. Enter the name (up to 30 characters) of the person in charge of this Prestige. Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. You can go to menu 24.8 and type "sys domainname" to see the current domain name used by your gateway. If you want to clear this field just press the [SPACE BAR]. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Press the [SPACE BAR] to select Yes or No (default). Select Yes to configure Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS (discussed next). Set this field to Yes to enable or No to disable IP routing. You must enable IP routing for Internet access. Turn on/off bridging for protocols not supported (for example, SNA) or not turned on in the previous Route IP field. Select Yes to turn bridging on; select No to turn bridging off. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 19.2.1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use dynamic DNS. To configure dynamic DNS, go to Menu 1 General Setup and select Yes in the Edit Dynamic DNS field. Press [ENTER] to display Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS as shown next. 215 Chapter 19 Menu 1 General Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 111 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS Menu 1.1 - Configure Dynamic DNS Service Provider= WWW.DynDNS.ORG Active= No Host=

EMAIL=

USER=

Password= ********

Enable Wildcard= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Follow the instructions in the next table to configure dynamic DNS parameters. Table 75 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS DESCRIPTION FIELD Service Provider This is the name of your dynamic DNS service provider. Active Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and then press [ENTER] to make dynamic DNS active. Enter the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your dynamic DNS provider. Enter your e-mail address. Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Host EMAIL User Password Enable Wildcard Your Prestige supports DYNDNS Wildcard. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER]

to select Yes or No This field is N/A when you choose DDNS client as your service provider. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Chapter 19 Menu 1 General Setup 216 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 217 Chapter 19 Menu 1 General Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup This chapter describes how to configure traffic redirect and dial-backup using menu 2 and 2.1. 20.1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup This chapter explains how to configure the Prestige for traffic redirect and dial backup connections. 20.2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2 From the main menu, enter 2 to open menu 2. Figure 112 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Menu 2 - Wan Backup Setup Check Mechanism = DSL Link Check WAN IP Address1 = 0.0.0.0 Check WAN IP Address2 = 0.0.0.0 Check WAN IP Address3 = 0.0.0.0 KeepAlive Fail Tolerance = 0 Recovery Interval(sec) = 0 ICMP Timeout(sec) = 0 Traffic Redirect = No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 76 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup FIELD Check Mechanism Check WAN IP Address1-3 DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and then press [ENTER] to select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection. Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check the DSL connections physical layer. Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields. Configure this field to test your Prestige's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address). When using a WAN backup connection, the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response. Chapter 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 218 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 76 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup (continued) FIELD KeepAlive Fail Tolerance DESCRIPTION Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection). Recovery Interval(sec) When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection (usually a WAN backup connection), it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection. Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the Prestige to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic. Type the number of seconds for an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes or No. Select Yes and press [ENTER] to configure Menu 2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup. Select No (default) if you do not want to configure this feature. Traffic Redirect ICMP Timeout When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 20.2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup Configure parameters that determine when the Prestige will forward WAN traffic to the backup gateway using Menu 2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup. Figure 113 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup Menu 2.1 - Traffic Redirect Setup Active= No Configuration:

Backup Gateway IP Address= 0.0.0.0 Metric= 15 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 77 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup FIELD Active. DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and select Yes (to enable) or No (to disable) traffic redirect setup. The default is No Configuration Backup Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation. The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestiges Internet connection terminates. 219 Chapter 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 77 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup FIELD Metric DESCRIPTION This field sets this route's priority among the routes the Prestige uses. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15"

means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost"

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Chapter 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 220 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 221 Chapter 20 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup This chapter covers how to configure your wired Local Area Network (LAN) settings. 21.1 LAN Setup This section describes how to configure the Ethernet using Menu 3 LAN Setup. From the main menu, enter 3 to display menu 3. Figure 114 Menu 3 LAN Setup Menu 3 - LAN Setup 1. LAN Port Filter Setup 2. TCP/IP and DHCP Setup 5. Wireless LAN Setup Enter Menu Selection Number:

21.1.1 General Ethernet Setup This menu allows you to specify filter set(s) that you wish to apply to the Ethernet traffic. You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic; however, the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets, reduce traffic and prevent security breaches. Figure 115 Menu 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup Menu 3.1 - LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

If you need to define filters, please read Chapter 29 on page 272 first, then return to this menu to define the filter sets. Chapter 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup 222 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 21.2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup Depending on the protocols for your applications, you need to configure the respective Ethernet Setup, as outlined below. TCP/IP Ethernet setup Bridging Ethernet setup 21.3 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP Use menu 3.2 to configure your Prestige for TCP/IP. To edit menu 3.2, enter 3 from the main menu to display Menu 3 LAN Setup. When menu 3 appears, press 2 and press [ENTER] to display Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup, as shown next:

Figure 116 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP= Server Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33 Size of Client IP Pool= 32 Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Remote DHCP Server= N/A TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0 RIP Direction= None Version= N/A Multicast= None IP Policies=

Edit IP Alias= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

223 Chapter 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Follow the instructions in the following table on how to configure the DHCP fields. Table 78 DHCP Ethernet Setup FIELD DHCP Setup DHCP Client IP Pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Remote DHCP Serve DESCRIPTION If set to Server, your Prestige can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client. If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled. If set to Relay, the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server in this case. When DHCP server is used, the following items need to be set:

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool. Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask. If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here. Follow the instructions in the following table to configure TCP/IP parameters for the Ethernet port. Table 79 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup DESCRIPTION FIELD TCP/IP Setup IP Address IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address Enter the (LAN) IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation RIP Direction Version Multicast IP Policies Edit IP Alias that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige (refer to the appendices for more information). Press [SPACE BAR] to select the RIP direction. Choices are Both, In Only, Out Only or None. Press [SPACE BAR] to select the RIP version. Choices are RIP-1, RIP-2B or RIP-

2M. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group. The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and version 2 (IGMP-v2). Press the [SPACE BAR] to enable IP Multicasting or select None to disable it. Create policies using SMT menu 25 and apply them on the Prestige LAN interface here. You can apply up to four IP Policy sets (from twelve) by entering their numbers separated by commas. The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Press

[SPACE BAR] to change No to Yes and press [ENTER] to display Menu 3.2.1. Chapter 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup 224 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 225 Chapter 21 Menu 3 LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 22 Wireless LAN Setup This chapter covers how to configure wireless LAN settings in SMT menu 3.5 for P-660HW and P-660W. 22.1 Wireless LAN Overview Refer to the chapter on the wireless LAN screens for wireless LAN background information. 22.2 Wireless LAN Setup Use menu 3.5 to set up your Prestige as the wireless access point. To edit menu 3.5, enter 3 from the main menu to display Menu 3 LAN Setup. When menu 3 appears, press 5 and then press [ENTER] to display Menu 3.5 Wireless LAN Setup as shown next. Figure 117 Menu 3.5 - Wireless LAN Setup Menu 3.5- Wireless LAN Setup ESSID= Wireless Hide ESSID= No Channel ID= CH06 2437MHz RTS Threshold= 2432 Frag. Threshold= 2432 WEP= Disable Default Key= N/A Key1= N/A Key2= N/A Key3= N/A Key4= N/A Edit MAC Address Filter= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 80 Menu 3.5 - Wireless LAN Setup FIELD ESSID DESCRIPTION The ESSID (Extended Service Set IDentifier) identifies the AP to which the wireless stations associate. Wireless stations associating to the Access Point must have the same ESSID. Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters. Hide ESSID Press [SPACE BAR] and select Yes to hide the ESSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the ESSID through passive scanning. Chapter 22 Wireless LAN Setup 226 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 80 Menu 3.5 - Wireless LAN Setup (continued) FIELD Channel ID Press [SPACE BAR] to select a channel. This allows you to set the operating frequency/

DESCRIPTION RTS Threshold Frag. Threshold WEP channel depending on your particular region. RTS(Request To Send) threshold (number of bytes) enables RTS/CTS handshake. Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS/CTS handshake. Setting this attribute to be larger than the maximum MSDU (MAC Service Data Unit) size turns off the RTS/CTS handshake. Setting this attribute to zero turns on the RTS/CTS handshake. Enter a value between 0 and 2432. The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2432. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) provides data encryption to prevent wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the wireless network. Select Disable allows wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to for the type of data encryption. WEP causes performance degradation. Default Key Enter the number of the key as an active key. Key 1 to Key 4 If you chose 64-bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field, then enter 5 characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") preceded by 0x for each key (1-4). If you chose 128-bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field, then enter 13 characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") preceded by 0x for each key (1-4). There are four data encryption keys to secure your data from eavesdropping by unauthorized wireless users. The values for the keys must be set up exactly the same on the access points as they are on the wireless stations. To edit MAC address filtering table, press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press

[ENTER] to open menu 3.5.1. Edit MAC Address Filter When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 22.2.1 Wireless LAN MAC Address Filter The next layer of security is MAC address filter. To allow a wireless station to associate with the Prestige, enter the MAC address of the wireless LAN adapter on that wireless station in the MAC address table. 227 Chapter 22 Wireless LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 118 Menu 3.5.1 WLAN MAC Address Filtering Menu 3.5.1 - WLAN MAC Address Filter Active= No Filter Action= Allowed Association

1= 00:00:00:00:00:00 13= 00:00:00:00:00:00 25= 00:00:00:00:00:00 2= 00:00:00:00:00:00 14= 00:00:00:00:00:00 26= 00:00:00:00:00:00 3= 00:00:00:00:00:00 15= 00:00:00:00:00:00 27= 00:00:00:00:00:00 4= 00:00:00:00:00:00 16= 00:00:00:00:00:00 28= 00:00:00:00:00:00 5= 00:00:00:00:00:00 17= 00:00:00:00:00:00 29= 00:00:00:00:00:00 6= 00:00:00:00:00:00 18= 00:00:00:00:00:00 30= 00:00:00:00:00:00 7= 00:00:00:00:00:00 19= 00:00:00:00:00:00 31= 00:00:00:00:00:00 8= 00:00:00:00:00:00 20= 00:00:00:00:00:00 32= 00:00:00:00:00:00 9= 00:00:00:00:00:00 21= 00:00:00:00:00:00 10= 00:00:00:00:00:00 22= 00:00:00:00:00:00 11= 00:00:00:00:00:00 23= 00:00:00:00:00:00 12= 00:00:00:00:00:00 24= 00:00:00:00:00:00

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 81 Menu 3.5.1 WLAN MAC Address Filtering FIELD Active DESCRIPTION To enable MAC address filtering, press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press

[ENTER]. Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC address filter table. To deny access to the Prestige, press [SPACE BAR] to select Deny Association and press [ENTER]. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the router. The default action, Allowed Association, permits association with the Prestige. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the router. MAC Address Filter Address 1. Enter the MAC addresses (in XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX format) of the wireless stations that are allowed or denied access to the Prestige in these address fields. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Chapter 22 Wireless LAN Setup 228 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 229 Chapter 22 Wireless LAN Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 23 Internet Access This chapter shows you how to configure the LAN and WAN of your Prestige for Internet access. 23.1 Internet Access Overview Refer to the chapters on the web configurators wizard, LAN and WAN screens for more background information on fields in the SMT screens covered in this chapter. 23.2 IP Policies Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing. Create policies using SMT menu 25 and apply them on the Prestige LAN and/or WAN interfaces using menus 3.2 (LAN) and 11.3 (WAN). 23.3 IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's logical networks (subnets). Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap. The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C. Chapter 23 Internet Access 230 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 119 IP Alias Network Example Use menu 3.2.1 to configure IP Alias on your Prestige. 23.4 IP Alias Setup Use menu 3.2 to configure the first network. Move the cursor to Edit IP Alias field and press

[SPACEBAR] to choose Yes and press [ENTER] to configure the second and third network. Figure 120 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Setup Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP= Server Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33 Size of Client IP Pool= 32 Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Remote DHCP Server= N/A TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0 RIP Direction= None Version= N/A Multicast= None IP Policies=

Edit IP Alias= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Pressing [ENTER] displays Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup, as shown next. 231 Chapter 23 Internet Access Figure 121 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Menu 3.2.1 - IP Alias Setup IP Alias 1= No IP Address= N/A IP Subnet Mask= N/A RIP Direction= N/A Version= N/A Incoming protocol filters= N/A Outgoing protocol filters= N/A IP Alias 2= No IP Address= N/A IP Subnet Mask= N/A RIP Direction= N/A Version= N/A Incoming protocol filters= N/A Outgoing protocol filters= N/A Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Follow the instructions in the following table to configure IP Alias parameters. Table 82 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup FIELD IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address DESCRIPTION Choose Yes to configure the LAN network for the Prestige. Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation RIP Direction Version that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige Press [SPACE BAR] to select the RIP direction. Choices are None, Both, In Only or Out Only. Press [SPACE BAR] to select the RIP version. Choices are RIP-1, RIP-2B or RIP-

2M. Enter the filter set(s) you wish to apply to the incoming traffic between this node and the Prestige. Enter the filter set(s) you wish to apply to the outgoing traffic between this node and the Prestige. Incoming Protocol Filters Outgoing Protocol Filters When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 23.5 Route IP Setup The first step is to enable the IP routing in Menu 1 General Setup. To edit menu 1, type 1 in the main menu and press [ENTER]. Set the Route IP field to Yes by pressing [SPACE BAR]. Chapter 23 Internet Access 232 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 122 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 - General Setup System Name= ?

Location= location Contact Person's Name=

Domain Name=

Edit Dynamic DNS= No Route IP= Yes Bridge= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

23.6 Internet Access Configuration Menu 4 allows you to enter the Internet Access information in one screen. Menu 4 is actually a simplified setup for one of the remote nodes that you can access in menu 11. Before you configure your Prestige for Internet access, you need to collect your Internet account information. Use the Internet Account Information table in the Quick Start Guide to record your. Note that if you are using PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation, then the only ISP information you need is a login name and password. You only need to know the Ethernet Encapsulation Gateway IP address if you are using ENET ENCAP encapsulation. From the main menu, type 4 to display Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup, as shown next. Figure 123 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup ISP's Name= MyISP Encapsulation= RFC 1483 Multiplexing= LLC-based VPI #= 8 VCI #= 35 ATM QoS Type= CBR Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 My Login= N/A My Password= N/A ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A IP Address Assignment= Static IP Address= 0.0.0.0 Network Address Translation= SUA Only Address Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table contains instructions on how to configure your Prestige for Internet access 233 Chapter 23 Internet Access P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

. Table 83 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup FIELD ISPs Name Encapsulation Multiplexing VPI #

VCI #

ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate

(PCR) Sustain Cell Rate

(SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 My Login My Password ENET ENCAP Gateway Idle Timeout DESCRIPTION Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP). This information is for identification purposes only. Press [SPACE BAR] to select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. Choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, RFC 1483 or ENET ENCAP. Press [SPACE BAR] to select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP. Choices are VC-based or LLC-based. Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you. Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you. Press [SPACE BAR] and select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed

(always-on) bandwidth. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select VBR (Variable Bit Rate) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications. This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR. Sustained Cell Rate is the mean cell rate of a bursty, on-off traffic source that can be sent at the peak rate, and a parameter for burst-traffic. Type the SCR; it must be less than the PCR. Refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS. The MBS must be less than 65535. Configure the My Login and My Password fields for PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only. Enter the login name that your ISP gives you. If you are using PPPoE encapsulation, then this field must be of the form user@domain where domain identifies your PPPoE service name. Enter the password associated with the login name above. Enter the gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you are using ENET ENCAP encapsulation. This value specifies the number of idle seconds that elapse before the Prestige automatically disconnects the PPPoE session. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Static or Dynamic address assignment. IP Address Assignment IP Address Network Address Translation Address Mapping Set When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Enter the IP address supplied by your ISP if applicable. Press [SPACE BAR] to select None, SUA Only or Full Feature. Please see the NAT chapter for more details on the SUA (Single User Account) feature. Type the numbers of mapping sets (1-8) to use with NAT. If all your settings are correct your Prestige should connect automatically to the Internet. If the connection fails, note the error message that you receive on the screen and take the appropriate troubleshooting steps. Chapter 23 Internet Access 234 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 235 Chapter 23 Internet Access P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 24 Remote Node Configuration This chapter covers remote node configuration. 24.1 Remote Node Setup Overview This section describes the protocol-independent parameters for a remote node. A remote node is required for placing calls to a remote gateway. A remote node represents both the remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection. When you use menu 4 to set up Internet access, you are configuring one of the remote nodes. You first choose a remote node in Menu 11- Remote Node Setup. You can then edit that nodes profile in menu 11.1, as well as configure specific settings in three submenus: edit IP and bridge options in menu 11.3; edit ATM options in menu 11.6; and edit filter sets in menu 11.5. 24.2 Remote Node Setup This section describes the protocol-independent parameters for a remote node. 24.2.1 Remote Node Profile To configure a remote node, follow these steps:

1 From the main menu, enter 11 to display Menu 11 - Remote Node Setup. 2 When menu 11 appears, as shown in the following figure, type the number of the remote node that you want to configure. Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 236 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 124 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup Menu 11 - Remote Node Setup 1. MyISP (ISP, SUA) 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. ________ 5. ________ 6. ________ 7. ________ 8. ________ Enter Node # to Edit:

24.2.2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios For Internet access you should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP. Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN-to-LAN applications, for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters. There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined. What method(s) you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need. The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN-to-LAN application. Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application. 24.2.2.1 Scenario 1: One VC, Multiple Protocols PPPoA (RFC-2364) encapsulation with VC-based multiplexing is the best combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed. The PPP protocol already contains this information. 24.2.2.2 Scenario 2: One VC, One Protocol (IP) Selecting RFC-1483 encapsulation with VC-based multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead (0 octets). However, if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future, it may be safer to select PPPoA encapsulation instead of RFC-1483, so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later. 24.2.2.3 Scenario 3: Multiple VCs If you have an equal number (or more) of VCs than the number of protocols, then select RFC-

1483 encapsulation and VC-based multiplexing. 237 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 125 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name= MyISP Route= IP Active= Yes Bridge= No Encapsulation= RFC 1483 Edit IP/Bridge= No Multiplexing= LLC-based Edit ATM Options= No Service Name= N/A Edit Advance Options= N/A Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= N/A Allocated Budget(min)= N/A Rem Password= N/A Period(hr)= N/A Outgoing: Schedule Sets= N/A My Login= N/A Nailed-Up Connection= N/A My Password= N/A Session Options:

Authen= N/A Edit Filter Sets= No Idle Timeout(sec)= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

In Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile, fill in the fields as described in the following table. Table 84 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile FIELD Rem Node Name Active Encapsulation Multiplexing Service Name Incoming:

Rem Login Rem Password Outgoing:

My Login My Password Authen DESCRIPTION Type a unique, descriptive name of up to eight characters for this node. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate this node. Inactive nodes are displayed with a minus sign in SMT menu 11. PPPoA refers to RFC-2364 (PPP Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5). If RFC-1483 (Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5) of ENET ENCAP are selected, then the Rem Login, Rem Password, My Login, My Password and Authen fields are not applicable (N/A). Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the method of multiplexing that your ISP uses, either VC-based or LLC-based. When using PPPoE encapsulation, type the name of your PPPoE service here. Type the login name that this remote node will use to call your Prestige. The login name and the Rem Password will be used to authenticate this node. Type the password used when this remote node calls your Prestige. Type the login name assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node. Type the password assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node. This field sets the authentication protocol used for outgoing calls. Options for this field are:

CHAP/PAP Your Prestige will accept either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP accept CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) only. Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 238 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 84 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile (continued) FIELD Route Bridge Edit IP/Bridge Edit ATM Options Edit Advance Options Telco Option Allocated Budget

(min) Period (hr) Schedule Sets Nailed up Connection Session Options Edit Filter Sets Idle Timeout (sec) DESCRIPTION PAP accept PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) only. This field determines the protocol used in routing. Options are IP and None. When bridging is enabled, your Prestige will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded. Select Yes to enable and No to disable. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options. This field is only available when you select PPPoE in the Encapsulation field. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options. This sets a ceiling for outgoing call time for this remote node. The default for this field is 0 meaning no budget control. This field is the time period that the budget should be reset. For example, if we are allowed to call this remote node for a maximum of 10 minutes every hour, then the Allocated Budget is (10 minutes) and the Period (hr) is 1 (hour). This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation. You can apply up to four schedule sets here. For more details please refer to Chapter 37 on page 338. This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation. This field specifies if you want to make the connection to this remote node a nailed-up connection. More details are given earlier in this section. Use [SPACE BAR] to choose Yes and press [ENTER] to open menu 11.5 to edit the filter sets. See Chapter 29 on page 272 for more details. Type the number of seconds (0-9999) that can elapse when the Prestige is idle

(there is no traffic going to the remote node), before the Prestige automatically disconnects the remote node. 0 means that the session will not timeout. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 24.2.3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol For obvious reasons, you should employ the strongest authentication protocol possible. However, some vendors implementation includes specific authentication protocol in the user profile. It will disconnect if the negotiated protocol is different from that in the user profile, even when the negotiated protocol is stronger than specified. If the peer disconnects right after a successful authentication, make sure that you specify the correct authentication protocol when connecting to such an implementation. 239 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 24.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide For the TCP/IP parameters, perform the following steps to edit Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options as shown next. 1 In menu 11.1, make sure IP is among the protocols in the Route field. 2 Move the cursor to the Edit IP/Bridge field, press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes, then press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options. Figure 126 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment = Static Ethernet Addr Timeout(min)= N/A Rem IP Addr = 0.0.0.0 Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0 My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0 NAT= SUA Only Address Mapping Set= N/A Metric= 2 Private= No RIP Direction= None Version= RIP-1 Multicast= None IP Policies=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

The next table explains fields in Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options. Table 85 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options FIELD IP Address Assignment DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Dynamic if the remote node is using a dynamically assigned IP address or Static if it is using a static (fixed) IP address. You will only be able to configure this in the ISP node (also the one you configure in menu 4), all other nodes are set to Static. This is the IP address you entered in the previous menu. Type the subnet mask assigned to the remote node. Rem IP Addr Rem Subnet Mask My WAN Addr Some implementations, especially UNIX derivatives, require separate IP network numbers for the WAN and LAN links and each end to have a unique address within the WAN network number. In that case, type the IP address assigned to the WAN port of your Prestige. NOTE: Refers to local Prestige address, not the remote router address. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. Select SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. The SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 (seeFigure 144 on page 257). Select None to disable NAT. NAT Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 240 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 85 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options (continued) FIELD Address Mapping Set Metric Private RIP Direction Version Multicast IP Policies DESCRIPTION When Full Feature is selected in the NAT field, configure address mapping sets in menu 15.1. Select one of the NAT server sets (2-10) in menu 15.2 (see Chapter 27 on page 254 for details) and type that number here. When SUA Only is selected in the NAT field, the SMT uses NAT server set 1 in menu 15.2 (see Chapter 27 on page 254 for details). The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the cost measurement, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Type a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number. This determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to Yes, this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast. If No, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the RIP Direction. Options are Both, In Only, Out Only or None. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the RIP version. Options are RIP-1, RIP-2B or RIP-2M. IGMP-v1 sets IGMP to version 1, IGMP-v2 sets IGMP to version 2 and None disables IGMP. You can apply up to four IP Policy sets (from 12) by typing in their numbers separated by commas. Configure the filter sets in menu 25 first (see Chapter 36 on page 328) and then apply them here. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 24.3.1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses The following figure uses sample IP addresses to help you understand the field of My WAN Addr in menu 11.3. My WAN Addr indicates the local Prestige WAN IP (172.16.0.1 in the following figure) while Rem IP Addr indicates the peer WAN IP (172.16.0.2 in the following figure). 241 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration Figure 127 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP/IP LAN-to-LAN Connection P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 24.4 Remote Node Filter Move the cursor to the Edit Filter Sets field in menu 11.1, then press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes. Press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter. Use Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter to specify the filter set(s) to apply to the incoming and outgoing traffic between this remote node and the Prestige and also to prevent certain packets from triggering calls. You can specify up to 4 filter sets separated by comma, for example, 1, 5, 9, 12, in each filter field. Note that spaces are accepted in this field. The Prestige has a prepackaged filter set, NetBIOS_WAN, that blocks NetBIOS packets. Include this in the call filter sets if you want to prevent NetBIOS packets from triggering calls to a remote node. Figure 128 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation) Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 242 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 129 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation) Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Call Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

24.5 Editing ATM Layer Options Follow the steps shown next to edit Menu 11.6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options. In menu 11.1, move the cursor to the Edit ATM Options field and then press [SPACE BAR]

to select Yes. Press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options. There are two versions of menu 11.6 for the Prestige, depending on whether you chose VC-

based/LLC-based multiplexing and PPP encapsulation in menu 11.1. 24.5.1 VC-based Multiplexing (non-PPP Encapsulation) For VC-based multiplexing, by prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will carry IP. Separate VPI and VCI numbers must be specified for each protocol. Figure 130 Menu 11.6 for VC-based Multiplexing Menu 11.6 - Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPI/VCI (VC-Multiplexing) VC Options for IP:

VPI #= 8 VCI #= 35 ATM QoS Type= UBR Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 VC Options for Bridge:

VPI #= 1 VCI #= 36 ATM QoS Type= N/A Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= N/A Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= N/A Maximum Burst Size (MBR)= N/A Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

24.5.2 LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. 243 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 131 Menu 11.6 for LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation Menu 11.6 - Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPI/VCI (LLC-Multiplexing or PPP-Encapsulation) VPI #= 0 VCI #= 38 ATM QoS Type= UBR Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 ENTER here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (1 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). 24.5.3 Advance Setup Options In menu 11.1, select PPPoE in the Encapsulation field. Figure 132 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name= MyISP Route= IP Active= Yes Bridge= No Encapsulation= PPPoE Edit IP/Bridge= No Multiplexing= LLC-based Edit ATM Options= No Service Name= Edit Advance Options= Yes Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= Allocated Budget(min)= 0 Rem Password= ******** Period(hr)= 0 Outgoing: Schedule Sets=

My Login= ? Nailed-Up Connection= No My Password= ? Session Options:

Authen= CHAP/PAP Edit Filter Sets= No Idle Timeout(sec)= 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Move the cursor to the Edit Advance Options field, press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes, then press [ENTER] to display Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options. Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration 244 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 133 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options Menu 11.8 - Advance Setup Options PPPoE pass-through= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 86 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options FIELD PPPoE pass-through DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to enable PPPoE pass through. In addition to the Prestige's built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for applications where NAT is not appropriate. Press [SPACE BAR] to select No and press [ENTER] to disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 245 Chapter 24 Remote Node Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 25 Static Route Setup This chapter shows how to setup IP static routes. 25.1 IP Static Route Overview Static routes tell the Prestige routing information that it cannot learn automatically through other means. This can arise in cases where RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node. Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Prestige has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the Prestige knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1. However, the Prestige is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 (via Router 2). The static routes allow you to tell the Prestige about the networks beyond the remote nodes. Figure 134 Sample Static Routing Topology 25.2 Configuration To configure an IP static route, use Menu 12 Static Route Setup (shown next). Chapter 25 Static Route Setup 246 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 135 Menu 12 Static Route Setup Menu 12 - Static Route Setup 1. IP Static Route 3. Bridge Static Route Please enter selection:

From menu 12, select 1 to open Menu 12.1 IP Static Route Setup (shown next). Figure 136 Menu 12.1 IP Static Route Setup Menu 12.1 - IP Static Route Setup 1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. ________ 5. ________ 6. ________ 7. ________ 8. ________ 9. ________ 10. ________ 11. ________ 12. ________ 13. ________ 14. ________ 15. ________ 16. ________ Enter selection number:

Now, type the route number of a static route you want to configure. Figure 137 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route Menu 12.1.1 - Edit IP Static Route Route #: 1 Route Name= ?

Active= No Destination IP Address= ?

IP Subnet Mask= ?

Gateway IP Address= ?

Metric= 2 Private= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

247 Chapter 25 Static Route Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields for Menu 12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route Setup. Table 87 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route FIELD Route #

Route Name Active Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Private DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the static route that you chose in menu 12.1. Type a descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose only. This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Type the subnet mask for this destination. Type the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the devices LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Type a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number. This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to Yes, this route is kept private and is not included in RIP broadcasts. If No, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Chapter 25 Static Route Setup 248 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 249 Chapter 25 Static Route Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 26 Bridging Setup This chapter shows you how to configure the bridging parameters of your Prestige. 26.1 Bridging in General Bridging bases the forwarding decision on the MAC (Media Access Control), or hardware address, while routing does it on the network layer (IP) address. Bridging allows the Prestige to transport packets of network layer protocols that it does not route, for example, SNA, from one network to another. The caveat is that, compared to routing, bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol, and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory. For efficiency reasons, do not turn on bridging unless you need to support protocols other than IP on your network. For IP, enable the routing if you need it; do not bridge what the Prestige can route. 26.2 Bridge Ethernet Setup Basically, all non-local packets are bridged to the WAN. Your Prestige does not support IPX. 26.2.1 Remote Node Bridging Setup Follow the procedure in another section to configure the protocol-independent parameters in Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile. For bridging-related parameters, you need to configure Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options. 1 To setup Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options shown in the next figure, follow these steps:

2 In menu 11.1, make sure the Bridge field is set to Yes. Chapter 26 Bridging Setup 250 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 138 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name= ? Route= IP Active= Yes Bridge= Yes Encapsulation= ENET ENCAP Edit IP/Bridge= No Multiplexing= VC-based Edit ATM Options= No Service Name= N/A Edit Advance Options= N/A Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= N/A Allocated Budget(min)= N/A Rem Password= N/A Period(hr)= N/A Outgoing: Schedule Sets= N/A My Login= N/A Nailed-Up Connection= N/A My Password= N/A Session Options:

Authen= N/A Edit Filter Sets= No Idle Timeout(sec)= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP/Bridge field, then press [SPACE BAR] to set the value to Yes and press [ENTER] to edit Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options. Figure 139 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0 Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0 Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0 My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0 NAT= Full Feature Address Mapping Set=2 Metric= 2 Private= No RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-2B Multicast= IGMP-v2 IP Policies=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 88 Remote Node Network Layer Options: Bridge Fields FIELD Bridge (menu 11.1) Edit IP/Bridge (menu 11.1) Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to display menu DESCRIPTION Make sure this field is set to Yes. Ethernet Addr Timeout

(min.) (menu 11.3) 11.3. Type the time (in minutes) for the Prestige to retain the Ethernet Address information in its internal tables while the line is down. If this information is retained, your Prestige will not have to recompile the tables when the line comes back up. 251 Chapter 26 Bridging Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 26.2.2 Bridge Static Route Setup Similar to network layer static routes, a bridging static route tells the Prestige the route to a node before a connection is established. You configure bridge static routes in menu 12.3.1 (go to menu 12, choose option 3, then choose a static route to edit) as shown next. Figure 140 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route Menu 12.3.1 - Edit Bridge Static Route Route #: 1 Route Name=

Active= No Ether Address= ?

IP Address=

Gateway Node= 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the Edit Bridge Static Route menu. Table 89 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route FIELD Route #

Route Name Active Ether Address IP Address DESCRIPTION This is the route index number you typed in Menu 12.3 Bridge Static Route Setup. Type a name for the bridge static route for identification purposes. Indicates whether the static route is active (Yes) or not (No). Type the MAC address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to. If available, type the IP address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to. Gateway Node Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the number of the remote node (one to eight) that is the gateway of this static route. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Chapter 26 Bridging Setup 252 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 253 Chapter 26 Bridging Setup P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 27 Network Address Translation

(NAT) This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige. 27.1 Using NAT You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige. 27.1.1 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. See Section 27.3 on page 256 or a detailed description of the NAT set for SUA. The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types. Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. 27.2 Applying NAT You apply NAT via menus 4 or 11.3 as displayed next. The next figure shows you how to apply NAT for Internet access in menu 4. Enter 4 from the main menu to go to Menu 4 -

Internet Access Setup. Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 254 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 141 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup ISP's Name= MyISP Encapsulation= RFC 1483 Multiplexing= LLC-based VPI #= 8 VCI #= 35 ATM QoS Type= UBR Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 My Login= N/A My Password= N/A ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A IP Address Assignment= Static IP Address= 0.0.0.0 Network Address Translation= SUA Only Address Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following figure shows how you apply NAT to the remote node in menu 11.1. 1 Enter 11 from the main menu. 2 When menu 11 appears, as shown in the following figure, type the number of the remote node that you want to configure. 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP/Bridge field, press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and then press [ENTER] to bring up Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options. Figure 142 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3 Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment = Static Ethernet Addr Timeout(min)= N/A Rem IP Addr = 0.0.0.0 Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0 My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0 NAT= SUA Only Address Mapping Set= N/A Metric= 2 Private= No RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-2B Multicast= None IP Policies=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

The following table describes the options for Network Address Translation. 255 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 90 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3 FIELD NAT DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. The SMT uses the address mapping set that you configure and enter in the Address Mapping Set field (seeFigure 144 on page 257). Select None to disable NAT. When you select SUA Only, the SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 (seeFigure 145 on page 257). Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. 27.3 NAT Setup Use the address mapping sets menus and submenus to create the mapping table used to assign global addresses to computers on the LAN. Set 255 is used for SUA. When you select Full Feature in menu 4 or 11.3, the SMT will use Set 1. When you select SUA Only, the SMT will use the pre-configured Set 255 (read only). The server set is a list of LAN servers mapped to external ports. To use this set, a server rule must be set up inside the NAT address mapping set. Please see the web configurator NAT chapter for further information on these menus. To configure NAT, enter 15 from the main menu to bring up the following screen. Figure 143 Menu 15 NAT Setup Menu 15 - NAT Setup 1. Address Mapping Sets 2. NAT Server Sets Enter Menu Selection Number:

27.3.1 Address Mapping Sets Enter 1 to bring up Menu 15.1 Address Mapping Sets. Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 256 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 144 Menu 15.1 Address Mapping Sets Menu 15.1 - Address Mapping Sets 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 255. SUA (read only) Enter Menu Selection Number:

27.3.1.1 SUA Address Mapping Set Enter 255 to display the next screen (see also Section 27.1.1 on page 254). The fields in this menu cannot be changed. Figure 145 Menu 15.1.255 SUA Address Mapping Rules Menu 15.1.255 - Address Mapping Rules Set Name=

Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

1. 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 M-1 2. 0.0.0.0 Server 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table explains the fields in this menu. Menu 15.1.255 is read-only. Table 91 SUA Address Mapping Rules FIELD Set Name Idx Local Start IP DESCRIPTION This is the name of the set you selected in menu 15.1 or enter the name of a new set you want to create. This is the index or rule number. Local Start IP is the starting local IP address (ILA). 257 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 91 SUA Address Mapping Rules (continued) FIELD Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type DESCRIPTION Local End IP is the ending local IP address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IPs, then the Start IP is 0.0.0.0 and the End IP is 255.255.255.255. This is the starting global IP address (IGA). If you have a dynamic IP, enter 0.0.0.0 as the Global Start IP. This is the ending global IP address (IGA). These are the mapping types. Server allows us to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this machine. See later for some examples. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 27.3.1.2 User-Defined Address Mapping Sets Now lets look at option 1 in menu 15.1. Enter 1 to bring up this menu. Well just look at the differences from the previous menu. Note the extra Action and Select Rule fields mean you can configure rules in this screen. Note also that the [?] in the Set Name field means that this is a required field and you must enter a name for the set. Figure 146 Menu 15.1.1 First Set Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules Set Name= NAT_SET Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

1. 2 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

If the Set Name field is left blank, the entire set will be deleted. The Type, Local and Global Start/End IPs are configured in menu 15.1.1.1 (described later) and the values are displayed here. Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 258 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 27.3.1.3 Ordering Your Rules Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so as old rule 5 becomes rule 4, old rule 6 becomes rule 5 and old rule 7 becomes rule 6. Table 92 Menu 15.1.1 First Set FIELD Set Name Action Select Rule DESCRIPTION Enter a name for this set of rules. This is a required field. If this field is left blank, the entire set will be deleted. The default is Edit. Edit means you want to edit a selected rule (see following field). Insert Before means to insert a rule before the rule selected. The rules after the selected rule will then be moved down by one rule. Delete means to delete the selected rule and then all the rules after the selected one will be advanced one rule. None disables the Select Rule item. When you choose Edit, Insert Before or Delete in the previous field the cursor jumps to this field to allow you to select the rule to apply the action in question. You must press [ENTER] at the bottom of the screen to save the whole set. You must do this again if you make any changes to the set including deleting a rule. No changes to the set take place until this action is taken. Selecting Edit in the Action field and then selecting a rule brings up the following menu, Menu 15.1.1.1 - Address Mapping Rule in which you can edit an individual rule and configure the Type, Local and Global Start/End IPs. An End IP address must be numerically greater than its corresponding IP Start address. Figure 147 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule Type= One-to-One Local IP:

Start=

End = N/A Global IP:

Start=

End = N/A Server Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

259 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table explains the fields in this menu. Table 93 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select from a total of five types. These are the mapping types discussed in the web configurator NAT chapter. Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this computer. Only local IP fields are N/A for server; Global IP fields MUST be set for Server. This is the starting local IP address (ILA). This is the ending local IP address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IPs, then put the Start IP as 0.0.0.0 and the End IP as 255.255.255.255. This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server types. This is the starting inside global IP address (IGA). If you have a dynamic IP, enter 0.0.0.0 as the Global IP Start. Note that Global IP Start can be set to 0.0.0.0 only if the types are Many-to-One or Server. This is the ending inside global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-to-One and Server types. Only available when Type is set to Server. Type a number from 1 to 10 to choose a server set from menu 15.2. Server Mapping Set When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. FIELD Type Local IP Start End Global IP Start End 27.4 Configuring a Server behind NAT Follow these steps to configure a server behind NAT:

1 Enter 15 in the main menu to go to Menu 15 - NAT Setup. 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets as shown next. Figure 148 Menu 15.2 NAT Server Setup Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets 1. Server Set 1 (Used for SUA Only) 2. Server Set 2 3. Server Set 3 4. Server Set 4 5. Server Set 5 6. Server Set 6 7. Server Set 7 8. Server Set 8 9. Server Set 9 10. Server Set 10 Enter Set Number to Edit:

3 Enter 1 to go to Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup as follows. Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 260 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 149 Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

1. Default Default 0.0.0.0 2. 21 21 192.168.1.33 3. 0 0 0.0.0.0 4. 0 0 0.0.0.0 5. 0 0 0.0.0.0 6. 0 0 0.0.0.0 7. 0 0 0.0.0.0 8. 0 0 0.0.0.0 9. 0 0 0.0.0.0 10. 0 0 0.0.0.0 11. 0 0 0.0.0.0 12. 0 0 0.0.0.0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

4 Enter a port number in an unused Start Port No field. To forward only one port, enter it again in the End Port No field. To specify a range of ports, enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port No field. 5 Enter the inside IP address of the server in the IP Address field. In the following figure, you have a computer acting as an FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (ports 21, 23 and 25) at 192.168.1.33. 6 Press [ENTER] at the Press ENTER to confirm ... prompt to save your configuration after you define all the servers or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Figure 150 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 27.5 General NAT Examples The following are some examples of NAT configuration. 261 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 27.5.1 Example 1: Internet Access Only In the following Internet access example, you only need one rule where your ILAs (Inside Local addresses) all map to one dynamic IGA (Inside Global Address) assigned by your ISP. Figure 151 NAT Example 1 Figure 152 Menu 4 Internet Access & NAT Example Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup ISP's Name= MyISP Encapsulation= RFC 1483 Multiplexing= LLC-based VPI #= 8 VCI #= 35 ATM QoS Type= UBR Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0 Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0 My Login= N/A My Password= N/A ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A IP Address Assignment= Static IP Address= 0.0.0.0 Network Address Translation= SUA Only Address Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

From menu 4, choose the SUA Only option from the Network Address Translation field. This is the Many-to-One mapping discussed in Section 27.5 on page 261. The SUA Only read-only option from the Network Address Translation field in menus 4 and 11.3 is specifically pre-configured to handle this case. 27.5.2 Example 2: Internet Access with an Inside Server Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 262 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 153 NAT Example 2 In this case, you do exactly as above (use the convenient pre-configured SUA Only set) and also go to menu 15.2 to specify the Inside Server behind the NAT as shown in the next figure. Figure 154 Menu 15.2.1 Specifying an Inside Server Menu 15.2.1 - NAT Server Setup (Used for SUA Only) Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

1. Default Default 192.168.1.10 2. 0 0 0.0.0.0 3. 0 0 0.0.0.0 4. 0 0 0.0.0.0 5. 0 0 0.0.0.0 6. 0 0 0.0.0.0 7. 0 0 0.0.0.0 8. 0 0 0.0.0.0 9. 0 0 0.0.0.0 10. 0 0 0.0.0.0 11. 0 0 0.0.0.0 12. 0 0 0.0.0.0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

27.5.3 Example 3: Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers In this example, there are 3 IGAs from our ISP. There are many departments but two have their own FTP server. All departments share the same router. The example will reserve one IGA for each department with an FTP server and all departments use the other IGA. Map the FTP servers to the first two IGAs and the other LAN traffic to the remaining IGA. Map the third IGA to an inside web server and mail server. Four rules need to be configured, two bi-

directional and two unidirectional as follows. Map the first IGA to the first inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions (1 : 1 mapping, giving both local and global IP addresses). Map the second IGA to our second inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions (1 : 1 mapping, giving both local and global IP addresses). 263 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Map the other outgoing LAN traffic to IGA3 (Many : 1 mapping). You also map your third IGA to the web server and mail server on the LAN. Type Server allows you to specify multiple servers, of different types, to other computers behind NAT on the LAN. The example situation looks somewhat like this:

Figure 155 NAT Example 3 In this case you need to configure Address Mapping Set 1 from Menu 15.1 - Address Mapping Sets. Therefore you must choose the Full Feature option from the Network Address Translation field (in menu 4 or menu 11.3) inFigure 156 on page 265. 1 Enter 15 from the main menu. 2 Enter 1 to configure the Address Mapping Sets. 3 Enter 1 to begin configuring this new set. Enter a Set Name, choose the Edit Action and then enter 1 for the Select Rule field. Press [ENTER] to confirm. 4 Select Type as One-to-One (direct mapping for packets going both ways), and enter the local Start IP as 192.168.1.10 (the IP address of FTP Server 1), the global Start IP as 10.132.50.1 (our first IGA). (SeeFigure 157 on page 265). 5 Repeat the previous step for rules 2 to 4 as outlined above. When finished, menu 15.1.1 should look like as shown inFigure 158 on page 266. Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 264 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 156 Example 3: Menu 11.3 Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0 Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0 Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0 My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0 NAT= Full Feature Address Mapping Set= 2 Metric= 2 Private= No RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-2B Multicast= IGMP-v2 IP Policies=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following figures show how to configure the first rule Figure 157 Example 3: Menu 15.1.1.1 Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule Type= One-to-One Local IP:

Start= 192.168.1.10 End = N/A Global IP:

Start= 10.132.50.1 End = N/A Server Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

265 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 158 Example 3: Final Menu 15.1.1 Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules Set Name= Example3 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

1. 192.168.1.10 10.132.50.1 1-1 2 192.168.1.11 10.132.50.2 1-1 3. 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 10.132.50.3 M-1 4. 10.132.50.3 Server 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Now configure the IGA3 to map to our web server and mail server on the LAN. 1 Enter 15 from the main menu. 2 Enter 2 in Menu 15 - NAT Setup. 3 Enter 1 in Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets to see the following menu. Configure it as shown. Figure 159 Example 3: Menu 15.2.1 Menu 15.2.1 - NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

1. Default Default 0.0.0.0 2. 80 80 192.168.1.21 3. 25 25 192.168.1.20 4. 0 0 0.0.0.0 5. 0 0 0.0.0.0 6. 0 0 0.0.0.0 7. 0 0 0.0.0.0 8. 0 0 0.0.0.0 9. 0 0 0.0.0.0 10. 0 0 0.0.0.0 11. 0 0 0.0.0.0 12. 0 0 0.0.0.0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 266 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 27.5.4 Example 4: NAT Unfriendly Application Programs Some applications do not support NAT Mapping using TCP or UDP port address translation. In this case it is better to use Many-to-Many No Overload mapping as port numbers do not change for Many-to-Many No Overload (and One-to-One) NAT mapping types. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 160 NAT Example 4 Other applications such as some gaming programs are NAT unfriendly because they embed addressing information in the data stream. These applications wont work through NAT even when using One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload mapping types. Follow the steps outlined in example 3 to configure these two menus as follows. Figure 161 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule Type= Many-to-Many No Overload Local IP:

Start= 192.168.1.10 End = 192.168.1.12 Global IP:

Start= 10.132.50.1 End = 10.132.50.3 Server Mapping Set= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

After youve configured your rule, you should be able to check the settings in menu 15.1.1 as shown next. 267 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 162 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1 Address Mapping Rules Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules Set Name= Example4 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

1. 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.12 10.132.50.1 10.132.50.3 M:M NO OV 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) 268 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 269 Chapter 27 Network Address Translation (NAT) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 28 Enabling the Firewall This chapter shows you how to get started with the Prestige firewall. 28.1 Remote Management and the Firewall When SMT menu 24.11 is configured to allow management and the firewall is enabled:

The firewall blocks remote management from the WAN unless you configure a firewall rule to allow it. The firewall allows remote management from the LAN. 28.2 Access Methods The web configurator is, by far, the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your Prestige has to offer. For this reason, it is recommended that you configure your firewall using the web configurator, see the following chapters for instructions. SMT screens allow you to activate the firewall and view firewall logs. 28.3 Enabling the Firewall From the main menu enter 21 to go to Menu 21 - Filter Set and Firewall Configuration to display the screen shown next. Enter option 2 in this menu to bring up the following screen. Press [SPACE BAR] and then

[ENTER] to select Yes in the Active field to activate the firewall. The firewall must be active to protect against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Additional rules may be configured using the web configurator. Chapter 28 Enabling the Firewall 270 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 163 Menu 21.2 Firewall Setup Menu 21.2 - Firewall Setup The firewall protects against Denial of Service (DOS) attacks when it is active. The default Policy sets 1. allow all sessions originating from the LAN to the WAN and 2. deny all sessions originating from the WAN to the LAN You may define additional Policy rules or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so Active: Yes LAN-to-WAN Set Name: ACL Default Set WAN-to-LAN Set Name: ACL Default Set Please configure the Firewall function through Web Configurator. Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Use the web configurator or the command interpreter to configure the firewall rules 271 Chapter 28 Enabling the Firewall P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 29 Filter Configuration This chapter shows you how to create and apply filters. 29.1 About Filtering Your Prestige uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a data packet and/or to make a call. There are two types of filter applications: data filtering and call filtering. Filters are subdivided into device and protocol filters, which are discussed later. Data filtering screens data to determine if the packet should be allowed to pass. Data filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters, depending on the direction of the packet relative to a port. Data filtering can be applied on either the WAN side or the Ethernet side. Call filtering is used to determine if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call. Outgoing packets must undergo data filtering before they encounter call filtering. Call filters are divided into two groups, the built-in call filters and user-defined call filters. Your Prestige has built-in call filters that prevent administrative, for example, RIP packets from triggering calls. These filters are always enabled and not accessible to you. Your Prestige applies the built-in filters first and then the user-defined call filters, if applicable, as shown next. Figure 164 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process Two sets of factory filter rules have been configured in menu 21 to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls. A summary of their filter rules is shown in the figures that follow. The following figure illustrates the logic flow when executing a filter rule. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 272 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 165 Filter Rule Process You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block various types of packets. Because each filter set can have up to six rules, you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for a single port. For incoming packets, your Prestige applies data filters only. Packets are processed depending on whether a match is found. The following sections describe how to configure filter sets. 29.1.1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige A filter set consists of one or more filter rules. Usually, you would group related rules, for example, all the rules for NetBIOS, into a single set and give it a descriptive name. You can configure up to twelve filter sets with six rules in each set, for a total of 72 filter rules in the system. 273 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 29.2 Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide To configure a filter set, follow the steps shown next. 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to display Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup. 2 Enter 1 to display Menu 21.1 Filter Set Configuration as shown next. Figure 166 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Menu 21.1 - Filter Set Configuration Filter Set # Comments Set # Comments

1 _______________ 7 _______________ 2 _______________ 8 _______________ 3 _______________ 9 _______________ 4 _______________ 10 _______________ 5 _______________ 11 _______________ 6 _______________ 12 _______________ Enter Filter Set Number to Configure= 0 Edit Comments= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

3 Type the filter set to configure (no. 1 to 12) and press [ENTER]. 4 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field and press [ENTER]. 5 Press [ENTER] at the message Press ENTER to confirm to display Menu 21.1.1 Filter Rules Summary (that is, if you selected filter set 1 in menu 21.1). Figure 167 NetBIOS_WAN Filter Rules Summary Menu 21.1.2 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

1 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=137 N D N 2 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=138 N D N 3 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=139 N D N 4 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=137 N D N 5 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=138 N D N 6 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=139 N D F Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 274 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 168 NetBIOS_LAN Filter Rules Summary Menu 21.1.3 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

1 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, SP=137, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=53 N D F 2 N 3 N 4 N 5 N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 169 IGMP Filter Rules Summary Menu 21.1.4 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

1 Y Gen Off=0, Len=3, Mask=ffffff, Value=01005e N D F 2 N 3 N 4 N 5 N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

29.3 Filter Rules Summary Menus The following tables briefly describe the abbreviations used in menus 21.1.1 and 21.1.2. Table 94 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu FIELD

A Type Filter Rules M DESCRIPTION The filter rule number: 1 to 6. Active: Y means the rule is active. N means the rule is inactive. The type of filter rule: GEN for Generic, IP for TCP/IP. These parameters are displayed here. More. Y means there are more rules to check which form a rule chain with the present rule. An action cannot be taken until the rule chain is complete. N means there are no more rules to check. You can specify an action to be taken for instance, forward the packet, drop the packet or check the next rule. For the latter, the next rule is independent of the rule just checked. 275 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 94 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu (continued) FIELD m n DESCRIPTION Action Matched. F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules. D means to drop the packet. Nmeans to check the next rule. Action Not Matched. F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules. D means to drop the packet. N means to check the next rule. The protocol dependent filter rules abbreviation are listed as follows:

Table 95 Rule Abbreviations Used FILTER TYPE IP Pr SA SP DA DP GEN Off Len DESCRIPTION Protocol Source Address Source Port Number Destination Address Destination Port Number Offset Length 29.4 Configuring a Filter Rule To configure a filter rule, type its number in Menu 21.1.x Filter Rules Summary and press

[ENTER] to open menu 21.1.x.1 for the rule. There are two types of filter rules: TCP/IP and Generic. Depending on the type of rule, the parameters for each type will be different. Use [SPACE BAR] to select the type of rule that you want to create in the Filter Type field and press [ENTER] to open the respective menu. To speed up filtering, all rules in a filter set must be of the same class, for instance, protocol filters or generic filters. The class of a filter set is determined by the first rule that you create. When applying the filter sets to a port, separate menu fields are provided for protocol and device filter sets. If you include a protocol filter set in a device filters field or vice versa, the Prestige will warn you and will not allow you to save. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 276 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 29.4.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a TCP/IP filter rule. TCP/IP rules allow you to base the rule on the fields in the IP and the upper layer protocol, for example, UDP and TCP headers. To configure TCP/IP rules, select TCP/IP Filter Rule from the Filter Type field and press

[ENTER] to open Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule, as shown next. Figure 170 Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule Menu 21.1.1.1 - TCP/IP Filter Rule Filter #: 1,1 Filter Type= TCP/IP Filter Rule Active= No IP Protocol= 0 IP Source Route= No Destination: IP Addr=

IP Mask=

Port #=

Port # Comp= None Source: IP Addr=

IP Mask=

Port #=

Port # Comp= None TCP Estab= N/A More= No Log= None Action Matched= Check Next Rule Action Not Matched= Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes how to configure your TCP/IP filter rule. Table 96 Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule FIELD Filter #

Filter Type Active IP Protocol IP Source Route Destination:

IP Addr IP Mask DESCRIPTION This is the filter set, filter rule coordinates, for instance, 2, 3 refers to the second filter set and the third filter rule of that set. Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to choose a rule. Parameters displayed for each type will be different. Choices are TCP/IP Filter Rule or Generic Filter Rule. Select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the filter rule. This is the upper layer protocol, for example, TCP is 6, UDP is 17 and ICMP is 1. The value must be between 0 and 255. A value of 0 matches ANY protocol. IP Source Route is an optional header that dictates the route an IP packet takes from its source to its destination. If Yes, the rule applies to any packet with an IP source route. The majority of IP packets do not have source route. Type the destination IP address of the packet you want to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Type the IP mask to apply to the Destination: IP Addr field. 277 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration Table 96 Menu 21.1.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide FIELD Port #

Port # Comp Source:

IP Addr IP Mask Port #

Port # Comp TCP Estab More Log Action Matched DESCRIPTION Type the destination port of the packets you want to filter. The field range is 0 to 65535. A 0 field is ignored. Select the comparison to apply to the destination port in the packet against the value given in Destination: Port #. Choices are None, Less, Greater, Equal or Not Equal. Type the source IP Address of the packet you want to filter. A 0.0.0.0 field is ignored. Type the IP mask to apply to the Source: IP Addr field. Type the source port of the packets you want to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. A 0 field is ignored. Select the comparison to apply to the source port in the packet against the value given in Source: Port # field. Choices are None, Less, Greater, Equal or Not Equal. This applies only when the IP Protocol field is 6, TCP. If Yes, the rule matches packets that want to establish TCP connection(s) (SYN=1 and ACK=0); else it is ignored. If Yes, a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields. If More is Yes, then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N/A. Select the logging option from the following:

None No packets will be logged. Action Matched Only packets that match the rule parameters will be logged. Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged. Both All packets will be logged. Select the action for a matching packet. Choices are Check Next Rule, Forward or Drop. Select the action for a packet not matching the rule. Choices are Check Next Rule, Forward or Drop. Action Not Matched When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. The following figure illustrates the logic flow of an IP filter. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 278 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 171 Executing an IP Filter 29.4.2 Generic Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a generic filter rule. The purpose of generic rules is to allow you to filter non-IP packets. For IP, it is generally easier to use the IP rules directly. 279 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide For generic rules, the Prestige treats a packet as a byte stream as opposed to an IP packet. You specify the portion of the packet to check with the Offset (from 0) and the Length fields, both in bytes. The Prestige applies the Mask (bit-wise ANDing) to the data portion before comparing the result against the Value to determine a match. The Mask and Value fields are specified in hexadecimal numbers. Note that it takes two hexadecimal digits to represent a byte, so if the length is 4, the value in either field will take 8 digits, for example, FFFFFFFF. To configure a generic rule select an empty filter set in menu 21, for example 5. Select Generic Filter Rule in the Filter Type field and press [ENTER] to open Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule, as shown in the following figure. Figure 172 Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule Menu 21.1.5.1 - Generic Filter Rule Filter #: 5,1 Filter Type= Generic Filter Rule Active= No Offset= 0 Length= 0 Mask= N/A Value= N/A More= No Log= None Action Matched= Check Next Rule Action Not Matched= Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The next table describes the fields in the Generic Filter Rule menu. Table 97 Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule FIELD Filter #

Filter Type Active Offset Length Mask Value More DESCRIPTION This is the filter set, filter rule coordinates, for instance, 2, 3 refers to the second filter set and the third rule of that set. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select a type of rule. Parameters displayed below each type will be different. Choices are Generic Filter Rule or TCP/IP Filter Rule. Select Yes to turn on or No to turn off the filter rule. Type the starting byte of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare. The range for this field is from 0 to 255. Type the byte count of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare. The range for this field is 0 to 8. Type the mask (in Hexadecimal) to apply to the data portion before comparison. Type the value (in Hexadecimal) to compare with the data portion. If Yes, a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields. If More is Yes, then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N/A. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 280 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 97 Menu 21.1.5.1 Generic Filter Rule (continued) FIELD Log DESCRIPTION Select the logging option from the following:

None No packets will be logged. Action Matched Only matching packets and rules will be logged. Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged. Both All packets will be logged. Select the action for a matching packet. Choices are Check Next Rule, Forward or Drop. Select the action for a packet not matching the rule. Choices are Check Next Rule, Forward or Drop. Action Matched Action Not Matched When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 29.5 Filter Types and NAT There are two classes of filter rules, Generic Filter Device rules and Protocol Filter (TCP/IP) rules. Generic Filter rules act on the raw data from/to LAN and WAN. Protocol Filter rules act on IP packets. When NAT (Network Address Translation) is enabled, the inside IP address and port number are replaced on a connection-by-connection basis, which makes it impossible to know the exact address and port on the wire. Therefore, the Prestige applies the protocol filters to the native IP address and port number before NAT for outgoing packets and after NAT for incoming packets. On the other hand, the generic (or device) filters are applied to the raw packets that appear on the wire. They are applied at the point where the Prestige is receiving and sending the packets; for instance, the interface. The interface can be an Ethernet, or any other hardware port. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 173 Protocol and Device Filter Sets 29.6 Example Filter Lets look at an example to block outside users from telnetting into the Prestige. 281 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration Figure 174 Sample Telnet Filter P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 1 Enter 1 in the menu 21 to display Menu 21.1 Filter Set Configuration. 2 Enter the index number of the filter set you want to configure (in this case 6). 3 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field (for example, TELNET_WAN) and press [ENTER]. 4 Press [ENTER] at the message Press [ENTER] to confirm or [ESC] to cancel... to open Menu 21.1.6 Filter Rules Summary. 5 Type 1 to configure the first filter rule. Make the entries in this menu as shown next. When you press [ENTER] to confirm, the following screen appears. Note that there is only one filter rule in this set. Figure 175 Menu 21.1.6.1 Sample Filter Menu 21.1.6.1 - TCP/IP Filter Rule Filter #: 6,1 Filter Type= TCP/IP Filter Rule Active= Yes IP Protocol= 6 IP Source Route= No Destination: IP Addr= 0.0.0.0 IP Mask= 0.0.0.0 Port #= 23 Port # Comp= Equal Source: IP Addr= 0.0.0.0 IP Mask= 0.0.0.0 Port #=

Port # Comp= Equal TCP Estab= No More= No Log= None Action Matched= Drop Action Not Matched= Forward Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

After you have created the filter set, you must apply it. 1 Enter 11 in the main menu to display menu 11 and type the remote node number to edit. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 282 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 2 Go to the Edit Filter Sets field, press [SPACE BAR] to choose Yes and press [ENTER]. This brings you to menu 11.5. Apply the example filter set (for example, filter set 3) in this menu as shown in the next section. This shows you that you have configured and activated (A = Y) a TCP/IP filter rule (Type =

IP, Pr = 6) for destination telnet ports (DP = 23). M = N means an action can be taken immediately. The action is to drop the packet (m = D) if the action is matched and to forward the packet immediately (n = F) if the action is not matched no matter whether there are more rules to be checked (there arent in this example). Figure 176 Menu 21.1.6.1 Sample Filter Rules Summary Menu 21.1.6 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

1 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=23 N D F 2 N 3 N 4 N 5 N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure: 1 29.7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults This section shows you where to apply the filter(s) after you design it (them). Sets of factory default filter rules have been configured in menu 21 (but have not been applied) to filter traffic. Table 98 Filter Sets Table FILTER SETS Input Filter Sets:

Output Filter Sets:

Call Filter Sets:

DESCRIPTION Apply filters for incoming traffic. You may apply protocol or device filter rules. See earlier in this chapter for information on filters. Apply filters for traffic leaving the Prestige. You may apply filter rules for protocol or device filters. See earlier in this section for information on types of filters. Apply filters to decide if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call. 283 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 29.7.1 Ethernet Traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic; however, the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets, reduce traffic and prevent security breaches. Go to menu 3.1 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the filter set(s) that you want to apply as appropriate. You can choose up to four filter sets (from twelve) by typing their numbers separated by commas, for example, 3, 4, 6, 11. The factory default filter set, NetBIOS_LAN, is inserted in the protocol filters field under Input Filter Sets in menu 3.1 in order to prevent local NetBIOS messages from triggering calls to the DNS server. Figure 177 Filtering Ethernet Traffic Menu 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 3 device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

29.7.2 Remote Node Filters Go to menu 11.5 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the filter set(s) as appropriate. You can cascade up to four filter sets by typing their numbers separated by commas. The factory default filter set, NetBIOS_WAN, is inserted in the protocol filters field under Call Filter Sets in menu 11.5 to block local NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls to the ISP. Figure 178 Filtering Remote Node Traffic Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 6 device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 2 device filters=

Call Filter Sets:

Protocol filters=

Device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Note that call filter sets are visible when you select PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation. Chapter 29 Filter Configuration 284 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 285 Chapter 29 Filter Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 30 SNMP Configuration This chapter explains SNMP Configuration menu 22. 30.1 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the TCP/IP protocol suite. Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network. The Prestige supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two c (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured. Figure 179 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Prestige). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. Chapter 30 SNMP Configuration 286 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include the number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. 30.2 Supported MIBs The Prestige supports RFC-1215 and MIB II as defined in RFC-1213 as well as ZyXEL private MIBs. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistic data and monitor status and performance. 30.3 SNMP Configuration To configure SNMP, select option 22 from the main menu to open Menu 22 SNMP Configuration as shown next. The community for Get, Set and Trap fields is SNMP terminology for password. 287 Chapter 30 SNMP Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 180 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration Menu 22 - SNMP Configuration SNMP:

Get Community= public Set Community= public Trusted Host= 0.0.0.0 Trap:

Community= public Destination= 0.0.0.0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the SNMP configuration parameters. Table 99 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration DESCRIPTION Type the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext requests from the management station. Type the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. If you enter a trusted host, your Prestige will only respond to SNMP messages from this address. A blank (default) field means your Prestige will respond to all SNMP messages it receives, regardless of source. FIELD SNMP:

Get Community Set Community Trusted Host Trap:

Community Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Destination When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 30.4 SNMP Traps The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs:

Table 100 SNMP Traps TRAP #

1 2 3 TRAP NAME coldStart (defined in RFC-1215) warmStart (defined in RFC-1215) linkDown (defined in RFC-1215) 4 linkUp (defined in RFC-1215) DESCRIPTION A trap is sent after booting (power on). A trap is sent after booting (software reboot). A trap is sent with the port number when any of the links are down. See the following table. A trap is sent with the port number. Chapter 30 SNMP Configuration 288 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 100 SNMP Traps (continued) TRAP #

5 TRAP NAME authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215) DESCRIPTION A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any SNMP gets or sets requirements with wrong community (password). whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-MIB) A trap is sent with the reason of restart before 6 6a For intentional reboot :

rebooting when the system is going to restart (warm start). A trap is sent with the message "System reboot by user!" if reboot is done intentionally, (for example, download new files, CI command "sys reboot", etc.). The port number is its interface index under the interface group. Table 101 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits PORT 1 2 3 13 14 PVC (PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUIT) Ethernet LAN 1 2 12 xDSL 289 Chapter 30 SNMP Configuration P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 31 System Security This chapter describes how to configure the system security on the Prestige. 31.1 System Security You can configure the system password. 31.1.1 System Password Enter 23 in the main menu to display Menu 23 System Security. You should change the default password. If you forget your password you have to restore the default configuration file. Figure 181 Menu 23 System Security Menu 23 - System Security 1. Change Password 2. RADIUS Server 4. IEEE802.1x Enter Menu Selection Number:

31.1.2 Configuring External RADIUS Server From Menu 23- System Security, enter 2 to display Menu 23.2 - System Security-RADIAS Server. Chapter 31 System Security 290 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 182 Menu 23.2 System Security: RADIUS Server Menu 23.2 - System Security - RADIUS Server Authentication Server:

Active= No Server Address= 10.11.12.13 Port #= 1812 Shared Secret= ********

Accounting Server:

Active= No Server Address= 10.11.12.13 Port #= 1813 Shared Secret= ********

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 102 Menu 23.2 System Security: RADIUS Server FIELD Authentication Server Active Server Address Port Shared Secret Accounting Server Active Server Address Port Shared Secret DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to enable user authentication through an external authentication server. Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Specify a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the access points. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and Prestige. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to enable user authentication through an external accounting server. Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation. The default port of the RADIUS server for accounting is 1813. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Specify a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the access points. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external accounting server and Prestige. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 291 Chapter 31 System Security P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 31.1.3 IEEE 802.1x The IEEE 802.1x standards outline enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management. Follow the steps below to enable EAP authentication on your Prestige. 1 From the main menu, enter 23 to display Menu23 System Security. Figure 183 Menu 23 System Security Menu 23 - System Security 1. Change Password 2. RADIUS Server 4. IEEE802.1x Enter Menu Selection Number:

2 Enter 4 to display Menu 23.4 System Security IEEE 802.1x. Figure 184 Menu 23.4 System Security: IEEE 802.1x Menu 23.4 - System Security - IEEE 802.1x Wireless Port Control= No Authentication Required ReAuthentication Timer (in second)= N/A Idle Timeout (in second)= N/A Key Management Protocol= N/A Dynamic WEP Key Exchange= N/A PSK= N/A WPA Mixed Mode= N/A Data Privacy for Broadcast/Multicast packets= N/A WPA Broadcast/Multicast Key Update Timer= N/A Authentication Databases= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Chapter 31 System Security 292 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 103 Menu 23.4 System Security: IEEE 802.1x FIELD Wireless Port Control ReAuthentica-

tion Timer

(in second) Idle Timeout (in second) Key Management Protocol Dynamic WEP Key Exchange PSK WPA Mixed Mode Data Privacy for Broadcast/

Multicast packets WPA Broadcast/

Multicast Key Update Timer DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] and select a security mode for the wireless LAN access. Select No Authentication Required to allow any wireless stations access to your wired network without entering usernames and passwords. This is the default setting. Selecting Authentication Required means wireless stations have to enter usernames and passwords before access to the wired network is allowed. Select No Access Allowed to block all wireless stations access to the wired network. The following fields are not available when you select No Authentication Required or No Access Allowed. Specify how often a client has to re-enter username and password to stay connected to the wired network. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 (in seconds). The default time interval is 1800 seconds (or 30 minutes). The Prestige automatically disconnects a client from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The client needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour). Press [SPACE BAR] to select 802.1x, WPA or WPA-PSK and press [ENTER]. This field is activated only when you select Authentication Required in the Wireless Port Control field. Also set the Authentication Databases field to RADIUS Only. Local user database may not be used. Select Disable to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without using Dynamic WEP Key Exchange. Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption. Up to 32 stations can access the Prestige when you configure Dynamic WEP Key Exchange. This field is not available when you set Key Management Protocol to WPA or WPA-PSK. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) when you select WPA-PSK in the Key Management Protocol field. Select Enable to activate WPA mixed mode. Otherwise, select Disable and configure Group Data Privacy field. This field allows you to choose TKIP (recommended) or WEP for broadcast and multicast (group) traffic if the Key Management Protocol is WPA and WPA Mixed Mode is disabled. WEP is used automatically if you have enabled WPA Mixed Mode. All unicast traffic is automatically encrypted by TKIP when WPA or WPA-PSK Key Management Protocol is selected. The WPA Broadcast/Multicast Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the WPA Broadcast/Multicast Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK mode. The Prestige default is 1800 seconds

(30 minutes). 293 Chapter 31 System Security Table 103 Menu 23.4 System Security: IEEE 802.1x (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide FIELD Authentication Databases DESCRIPTION The authentication database contains wireless station login information. The local user database is the built-in database on the Prestige. The RADIUS is an external server. Use this field to decide which database the Prestige should use (first) to authenticate a wireless station. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first. When you configure Key Management Protocol to WPA, the Authentication Databases must be RADIUS Only. You can only use the Local User Database with 802.1x Key Management Protocol. Select Local User Database Only to have the Prestige just check the built-in user database on the Prestige for a wireless station's username and password. Select RADIUS Only to have the Prestige just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a wireless station's username and password. Select Local first, then RADIUS to have the Prestige first check the user database on the Prestige for a wireless station's username and password. If the user name is not found, the Prestige then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server. Select RADIUS first, then Local to have the Prestige first check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a wireless station's username and password. If the Prestige cannot reach the RADIUS server, the Prestige then checks the local user database on the Prestige. When the user name is not found or password does not match in the RADIUS server, the Prestige will not check the local user database and the authentication fails. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Once you enable user authentication, you need to specify an external RADIUS server or create local user accounts on the Prestige for authentication. 31.2 Creating User Accounts on the Prestige By storing user profiles locally, your Prestige is able to authenticate wireless users without interacting with a network RADIUS server. Follow the steps below to set up user profiles on your Prestige. 1 From the main menu, enter 14 to display Menu 14 - Dial-in User Setup. Chapter 31 System Security 294 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 185 Menu 14 Dial-in User Setup Menu 14 - Dial-in User Setup 1. ________ 9. ________ 17. ________ 25. ________ 2. ________ 10. ________ 18. ________ 26. ________ 3. ________ 11. ________ 19. ________ 27. ________ 4. ________ 12. ________ 20. ________ 28. ________ 5. ________ 13. ________ 21. ________ 29. ________ 6. ________ 14. ________ 22. ________ 30. ________ 7. ________ 15. ________ 23. ________ 31. ________ 8. ________ 16. ________ 24. ________ 32. ________ Enter Menu Selection Number:

2 Type a number and press [ENTER] to edit the user profile. Figure 186 Menu 14.1 Edit Dial-in User Menu 14.1 - Edit Dial-in User User Name= test Active= Yes Password= ********

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 104 Menu 14.1 Edit Dial-in User FIELD User Name DESCRIPTION Enter a username up to 31 alphanumeric characters long for this user profile. This field is case sensitive. Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes and press [ENTER] to enable the user profile. Enter a password up to 31 characters long for this user profile. Active Password When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 295 Chapter 31 System Security P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 32 System Information and Diagnosis This chapter covers the information and diagnostic tools in SMT menus 24.1 to 24.4. 32.1 Overview These tools include updates on system status, port status, log and trace capabilities and upgrades for the system software. This chapter describes how to use these tools in detail. Type 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance, as shown in the following figure. Figure 187 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 - System Maintenance 1. System Status 2. System Information and Console Port Speed 3. Log and Trace 4. Diagnostic 5. Backup Configuration 6. Restore Configuration 7. Upload Firmware 8. Command Interpreter Mode 9. Call Control 10. Time and Date Setting 11. Remote Management Enter Menu Selection Number:

32.2 System Status The first selection, System Status gives you information on the status and statistics of the ports, as shown next. System Status is a tool that can be used to monitor your Prestige. Specifically, it gives you information on your DSL telephone line status, number of packets sent and received. To get to System Status, type 24 to go to Menu 24 System Maintenance. From this menu, type 1. System Status. There are two commands in Menu 24.1 System Maintenance Status. Entering 1 resets the counters; [ESC] takes you back to the previous screen. Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis 296 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24.1 System Maintenance Status which are read-only and meant for diagnostic purposes. Figure 188 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status Menu 24.1 - System Maintenance - Status 23:08:47 Sat. Jan. 01, 2000 Node-Lnk Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time 1-ENET N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 2 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 3 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 4 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 5 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 6 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 7 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 8 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00 My WAN IP (from ISP): 0.0.0.0 Ethernet: WAN:

Status: 100M/Full Duplex Tx Pkts: 5731 Line Status: Down Collisions: 0 Rx Pkts: 8314 Upstream Speed: 0 kbps CPU Load = 25.52% Downstream Speed: 0 kbps Press Command:

COMMANDS: 1-Reset Counters TAB-Next Page ESC-Exit The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24.1 System Maintenance Status. Table 105 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance: Status FIELD Node-Lnk Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time My WAN IP

(from ISP) Ethernet Status Tx Pkts Rx Pkts DESCRIPTION This is the node index number and link type. Link types are: PPP, ENET, 1483. This shows the status of the remote node. The number of transmitted packets to this remote node. The number of received packets from this remote node. The number of error packets on this connection. This shows the transmission rate in bytes per second. This shows the receiving rate in bytes per second. This is the time this channel has been connected to the current remote node. This is the IP address of the ISP remote node. This shows statistics for the LAN. This shows the current status of the LAN. This is the number of transmitted packets to the LAN. This is the number of received packets from the LAN. 297 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 105 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance: Status (continued) FIELD Collision WAN Line Status Upstream Speed Downstream Speed CPU Load DESCRIPTION This is the number of collisions. This shows statistics for the WAN. This shows the current status of the xDSL line, which can be Up or Down. This shows the upstream transfer rate in kbps. This shows the downstream transfer rate in kbps. This specifies the percentage of CPU utilization. 32.3 System Information To get to the System Information:

1 Enter 24 to display Menu 24 System Maintenance. 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed. From this menu you have two choices as shown in the next figure:

Figure 189 Menu 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed Menu 24.2 - System Information and Console Port Speed 1. System Information 2. Console Port Speed Please enter selection:

32.3.1 System Information Enter 1 in menu 24.2 to display the screen shown next. Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis 298 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 190 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance: Information Menu 24.2.1 - System Maintenance - Information Name:

Routing: IP ZyNOS F/W Version: V3.40(ACC.0)| 04/26/2005 ADSL Chipset Vendor: DMT FwVer: 3.0.11.11_A_TC, HwVer: T14F+

Standard: Multi-Mode LAN Ethernet Address: 00:13:49:11:11:35 IP Address: 192.168.1.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.0 DHCP: Server Press ESC or RETURN to Exit:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 106 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance: Information FIELD Name DESCRIPTION Displays the system name of your Prestige. This information can be changed in Menu 1 General Setup. Refers to the routing protocol used. Routing ZyNOS F/W Version Refers to the ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) system firmware version. ZyNOS is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Displays the vendor of the ADSL chipset and DSL version. ADSL Chipset Vendor Standard LAN Ethernet Address IP Address IP Mask DHCP This refers to the operational protocol the Prestige and the DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) are using. Refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) of your Prestige. This is the IP address of the Prestige in dotted decimal notation. This shows the subnet mask of the Prestige. This field shows the DHCP setting (None, Relay or Server) of the Prestige. 32.3.2 Console Port Speed Note: The console port is internal and reserved for technician use only. You can set up different port speeds for the console port through Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance Console Port Speed. Your Prestige supports 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the desired speed in menu 24.2.2, as shown in the following figure. 299 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 191 Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance : Change Console Port Speed Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed Console Port Speed: 9600 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Once you change the Prestige console port speed, you must also set the speed parameter for the communication software you are using to connect to the Prestige. 32.4 Log and Trace There are two logging facilities in the Prestige. The first is the error logs and trace records that are stored locally. The second is the syslog facility for message logging. 32.4.1 Viewing Error Log The first place you should look for clues when something goes wrong is the error log. Follow the procedures to view the local error/trace log:

1 Type 24 in the main menu to display Menu 24 System Maintenance. 2 From menu 24, type 3 to display Menu 24.3 System Maintenance Log and Trace. Figure 192 Menu 24.3 System Maintenance: Log and Trace Menu 24.3 - System Maintenance - Log and Trace 1. View Error Log 2. UNIX Syslog Please enter selection 3 Enter 1 from Menu 24.3 System Maintenance Log and Trace to display the error log in the system. After the Prestige finishes displaying the error log, you will have the option to clear it. Samples of typical error and information messages are presented in the next figure. Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis 300

 

 

P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 193 Sample Error and Information Messages 53 Sat Jan 01 00:00:03 2000 PP01 -WARN SNMP TRAP 0: cold start 54 Sat Jan 01 00:00:03 2000 PP01 INFO main: init completed 55 Sat Jan 01 00:00:03 2000 PP01 INFO Starting Connectivity Monitor 56 Sat Jan 01 00:00:03 2000 PP20 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 57 Sat Jan 01 00:00:03 2000 PP21 INFO monitoring WAN connectivity 58 Sat Jan 01 00:03:06 2000 PP19 INFO SMT Password pass 59 Sat Jan 01 00:03:06 2000 PP01 INFO SMT Session Begin 60 Sat Jan 01 00:23:21 2000 PP01 INFO SMT Session End 62 Sat Jan 01 00:23:38 2000 PP19 INFO SMT Password pass 63 Sat Jan 01 00:23:38 2000 PP01 INFO SMT Session Begin Clear Error Log (y/n):

32.4.2 Syslog and Accounting The Prestige uses the syslog facility to log the CDR (Call Detail Record) and system messages to a syslog server. Syslog and accounting can be configured in Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance UNIX Syslog, as shown next. Figure 194 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance: Syslog and Accounting Menu 24.3.2 - System Maintenance - UNIX Syslog UNIX Syslog:

Active= No Syslog IP Address= ?

Log Facility= Local 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

You need to configure the UNIX syslog parameters described in the following table to activate syslog then choose what you want to log. Table 107 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER UNIX Syslog:

Active Syslog IP Address Log Facility DESCRIPTION Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to turn syslog on or off. Type the IP address of your syslog server. Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select one of seven different local options. The log facility lets you log the message in different server files. Refer to your UNIX manual. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. The following are examples of the four types of syslog messages sent by the Prestige:

301 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 195 Syslog Example 1 - CDR SdcmdSyslogSend ( SYSLOG_CDR, SYSLOG_INFO, String);

String = board xx line xx channel xx, call xx, str board = the hardware board ID line = the WAN ID in a board Channel = channel ID within the WAN call = the call reference number which starts from 1 and increments by 1 for each new call str = C01 Outgoing Call dev xx ch xx (dev:device No. ch:channel No.) C01 Incoming Call xxxxBps xxxxx (L2TP, xxxxx = Remote Call ID) C01 Incoming Call xxxx (= connected speed) xxxxx (= Remote Call ID) L02 Tunnel Connected (L2TP) C02 OutCall Connected xxxx (= connected speed) xxxxx (= Remote Call ID) C02 CLID call refused L02 Call Terminated C02 Call Terminated Jul 19 11:19:27 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C01 Outgoing Call dev=2 ch=0 40002 Jul 19 11:19:32 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C02 OutCall Connected 64000 40002 Jul 19 11:20:06 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C02 Call Terminated 2 - Packet Triggered SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_PKTTRI, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = Packet trigger: Protocol=xx Data=xxxxxxxxxx..x Protocol: (1:IP 2:IPX 3:IPXHC 4:BPDU 5:ATALK 6:IPNG) Data: We will send forty-eight Hex characters to the server Jul 19 11:28:39 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1, Data=4500003c100100001f010004c0a86614ca849a7b08004a5c020001006162636465666768696a6b6c 6d6e6f7071727374 Jul 19 11:28:56 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1, Data=4500002c1b0140001f06b50ec0a86614ca849a7b0427001700195b3e00000000600220008cd40000 020405b4 Jul 19 11:29:06 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1, Data=45000028240140001f06ac12c0a86614ca849a7b0427001700195b451d1430135004000077600000 3 - Filter Log SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_FILLOG, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = IP[Src=xx.xx.xx.xx Dst=xx.xx.xx.xx prot spo=xxxx dpo=xxxx] S04>R01mD IP[] is the packet header and S04>R01mD means filter set 4 (S) and rule 1 (R), match

(m), drop (D). Src: Source Address Dst: Destination Address Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis 302 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 195 Syslog Example (continued) prot: Protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP) spo: Source port dpo: Destination port Jul 19 14:43:55 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=202.132.154.123 Dst=255.255.255.255 UDP spo=0208 dpo=0208]} S03>R01mF Jul 19 14:44:00 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=192.168.102.20 Dst=202.132.154.1 UDP spo=05d4 dpo=0035]} S03>R01mF Jul 19 14:44:04 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=192.168.102.20 Dst=202.132.154.1 UDP spo=05d4 dpo=0035]} S03>R01mF 4 - PPP Log SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_PPPLOG, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = ppp:Proto Starting / ppp:Proto Opening / ppp:Proto Closing / ppp:Proto Shutdown Proto = LCP / ATCP / BACP / BCP / CBCP / CCP / CHAP/ PAP / IPCP / IPXCP Jul 19 11:42:44 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:LCP Closing Jul 19 11:42:49 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:IPCP Closing Jul 19 11:42:54 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:CCP Closing 32.5 Diagnostic The diagnostic facility allows you to test the different aspects of your Prestige to determine if it is working properly. Menu 24.4 allows you to choose among various types of diagnostic tests to evaluate your system, as shown in the following figure. Follow the procedure next to get to Diagnostic:

1 From the main menu, type 24 to open Menu 24 System Maintenance. 2 From this menu, type 4. Diagnostic to open Menu 24.4 System Maintenance Diagnostic. Figure 196 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance : Diagnostic Menu 24.4 - System Maintenance - Diagnostic xDSL System 1. Reset xDSL 21. Reboot System 22. Command Mode TCP/IP 12. Ping Host Enter Menu Selection Number:

Host IP Address= N/A 303 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table describes the diagnostic tests available in menu 24.4 for and the connections. Table 108 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance Menu: Diagnostic FIELD Reset xDSL Ping Host Reboot System Command Mode Host IP Address DESCRIPTION Re-initialize the xDSL link to the telephone company. Ping the host to see if the links and TCP/IP protocol on both systems are working. Reboot the Prestige. Type the mode to test and diagnose your Prestige using specified commands. If you typed 12 to Ping Host, now type the address of the computer you want to ping. Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis 304 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 305 Chapter 32 System Information and Diagnosis P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance This chapter tells you how to backup and restore your configuration file as well as upload new firmware and configuration files. 33.1 Filename Conventions The configuration file (often called the romfile or rom-0) contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password, DHCP Setup, TCP/IP Setup, etc. It arrives from ZyXEL with a rom filename extension. Once you have customized the Prestige's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing. ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file) is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension. With many FTP and TFTP clients, the filenames are similar to those seen next. Note: Only use firmware for your Prestiges specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige. ftp> put firmware.bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the Prestige. ftp> get rom-0 config.cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file config.cfg. If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the Prestige only recognizes rom-0 and ras. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use. Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 306 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The following table is a summary. Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the Prestige and the external filename refers to the filename not on the Prestige, that is, on your computer, local network or FTP site and so the name (but not the extension) may vary. After uploading new firmware, see the ZyNOS F/W Version field in Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance Information to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version. The AT command is the command you enter after you press y when prompted in the SMT menu to go into debug mode. Table 109 Filename Conventions FILE TYPE Configuration File INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME Rom-0 This is the configuration filename on the Prestige. Uploading the rom-0 file replaces the entire ROM file system, including your Prestige configurations, system-related data (including the default password), the error log and the trace log. This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Prestige. DESCRIPTION

*.rom

*.bin Firmware Ras 33.2 Backup Configuration Option 5 from Menu 24 System Maintenance allows you to backup the current Prestige configuration to your computer. Backup is highly recommended once your Prestige is functioning properly. FTP is the preferred methods for backing up your current configuration to your computer since they are faster. Any serial communications program should work fine;

however, you must use Xmodem protocol to perform the download/upload and you dont have to rename the files. Please note that terms download and upload are relative to the computer. Download means to transfer from the Prestige to the computer, while upload means from your computer to the Prestige. 33.2.1 Backup Configuration Follow the instructions as shown in the next screen. 307 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 197 Telnet in Menu 24.5 Menu 24.5 - System Maintenance - Backup Configuration To transfer the configuration file to your workstation, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation. 2. Type "open" and the IP address of your Prestige. Then type "root" and SMT password as requested. 3. Locate the 'rom-0' file. 4. Type 'get rom-0' to back up the current Prestige configuration to your workstation. For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on backup using TFTP (note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP), please see your Prestige manual. Press ENTER to Exit:

33.2.2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige. 3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username. 4 Enter your password as requested (the default is 1234). 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Use get to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer, for example, get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. 33.2.3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 308 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 198 FTP Session Example 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit 33.2.4 GUI-based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients. Table 110 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients COMMAND Host Address Login Type Transfer Type Initial Remote Directory Initial Local Directory DESCRIPTION Enter the address of the host server. Anonymous. This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option. Normal. The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login. Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Specify the default remote directory (path). Specify the default local directory (path). 33.2.5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations TFTP, FTP and Telnet over WAN will not work when:

You have disabled Telnet service in menu 24.11. You have applied a filter in menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) to block Telnet service. The IP address in the Secured Client IP field in menu 24.11 does not match the client IP. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the Telnet session immediately. You have an SMT console session running. 309 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 33.2.6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The Prestige supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter (CI) mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance. 3 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the SMT timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute SMT timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete. 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 5 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is rom-0 (rom-zero, not capital o). Note that the telnet connection must be active and the SMT in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer and binary to set binary transfer mode. 33.2.7 TFTP Command Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the Prestige IP address, get transfers the file source on the Prestige (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the Prestige) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom. 33.2.8 GUI-based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients. Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 310 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 111 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Enter the IP address of the Prestige. 192.168.1.1 is the Prestiges default IP address when shipped. Send/Fetch Use Send to upload the file to the Prestige and Fetch to back up the file on your computer. Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer. Local File Remote File This is the filename on the Prestige. The filename for the firmware is ras and for the Binary Abort configuration file, is rom-0. Transfer the file in binary mode. Stop transfer of the file. Refer to Section 33.2.5 on page 309 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 33.3 Restore Configuration This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration;

please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk. FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your Prestige since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete. Note: Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR Prestige. 33.3.1 Restore Using FTP For details about backup using (T)FTP please refer to earlier sections on FTP and TFTP file upload in this chapter. 311 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 199 Telnet into Menu 24.6 Menu 24.6 -- System Maintenance - Restore Configuration To transfer the firmware and configuration file to your workstation, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation. 2. Type "open" and the IP address of your Prestige. Then type "root" and SMT password as requested. 3. Type "put backupfilename rom-0" where backupfilename is the name of your backup configuration file on your workstation and rom-0 is the remote file name on the Prestige. This restores the configuration to your Prestige. 4. The system reboots automatically after a successful file transfer For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on backup using TFTP (note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP), please see your Prestige manual. Press ENTER to Exit:

1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige. 3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username. 4 Enter your password as requested (the default is 1234). 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Find the rom file (on your computer) that you want to restore to your Prestige. 7 Use put to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer, for example, put config.rom rom-0 transfers the configuration file config.rom on your computer to the Prestige. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 8 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. The Prestige will automatically restart after a successful restore process. 33.3.2 Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 200 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp> put config.rom rom-0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec. ftp>quit Refer to Section 33.2.5 on page 309 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 312 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 33.4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files. You can upload configuration files by following the procedure in Section 33.2 on page 307 or by following the instructions in Menu 24.7.2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File. Note: Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR Prestige. 33.4.1 Firmware File Upload FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. When you telnet into the Prestige, you will see the following screens for uploading firmware and the configuration file using FTP. Figure 201 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.1 Upload System Firmware Menu 24.7.1 - System Maintenance - Upload System Firmware To upload the system firmware, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation. 2. Type "open" and the IP address of your system. Then type "root" and SMT password as requested. 3. Type "put firmware filename ras" where "firmwarefilename" is the name of your firmware upgrade file on your workstation and "ras" is the remote file name on the system. 4. The system reboots automatically after a successful firmware upload. For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP (note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP), please see your manual. Press ENTER to Exit:

33.4.2 Configuration File Upload You see the following screen when you telnet into menu 24.7.2. 313 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 202 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.2 System Maintenance Menu 24.7.2 - System Maintenance - Upload System Configuration File To upload the system configuration file, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation. 2. Type "open" and the IP address of your system. Then type "root" and SMT password as requested. 3. Type "put configuration filename rom-0" where "configurationfilename"

is the name of your system configuration file on your workstation, which will be transferred to the "rom-0" file on the system. 4. The system reboots automatically after the upload system configuration file process is complete. For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP (note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP), please see your manual. Press ENTER to Exit:

To upload the firmware and the configuration file, follow these examples 33.4.3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer. 2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige. 3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username. 4 Enter your password as requested (the default is 1234). 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary. 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Prestige, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Prestige and renames it ras. Similarly, put config.rom rom-0 transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the Prestige and renames it rom-0. Likewise get rom-0 config.rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config.rom. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions. 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. The Prestige automatically restarts after a successful file upload. Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 314 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 33.4.4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 203 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin 200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed earlier in this chapter. Refer to Section 33.2.5 on page 309 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN. 33.4.5 TFTP File Upload The Prestige also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended. To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next. 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address. 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter (CI) mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance. 3 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the console timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter sys stdio 5 to restore the five-minute console timeout

(default) when the file transfer is complete. 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer. 5 Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer. The file name for the firmware is ras. Note that the telnet connection must be active and the Prestige in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer, put the other way around, and binary to set binary transfer mode. 315 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 33.4.6 TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command:

tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras where i specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), host is the Prestiges IP address and put transfers the file source on the computer

(firmware.bin name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the Prestige). Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter. Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 316 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 317 Chapter 33 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 34 System Maintenance This chapter leads you through SMT menus 24.8 to 24.10. 34.1 Command Interpreter Mode The Command Interpreter (CI) is a part of the main system firmware. The CI provides much of the same functionality as the SMT, while adding some low-level setup and diagnostic functions. Enter the CI from the SMT by selecting menu 24.8. See the included disk or the zyxel.com web site for more detailed information on CI commands. Enter 8 from Menu 24 System Maintenance. A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or ? at the command prompt. Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished. Figure 204 Command Mode in Menu 24 Menu 24 - System Maintenance 1. System Status 2. System Information and Console Port Speed 3. Log and Trace 4. Diagnostic 5. Backup Configuration 6. Restore Configuration 7. Upload Firmware 8. Command Interpreter Mode 9. Call Control 10. Time and Date Setting 11. Remote Management Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 205 Valid Commands Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp. ras> ?

Valid commands are:

sys exit device ether wan poe config pci wlan ip ppp bridge hdap bm lan radius 8021x ras>

Chapter 34 System Maintenance 318 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 34.2 Call Control Support Call Control Support is only applicable when Encapsulation is set to PPPoE in menu 4 or menu 11.1. The budget management function allows you to set a limit on the total outgoing call time of the Prestige within certain times. When the total outgoing call time exceeds the limit, the current call will be dropped and any future outgoing calls will be blocked. To access the call control menu, select option 9 in menu 24 to go to Menu 24.9 System Maintenance Call Control, as shown in the next table. Figure 206 Menu 24.9 System Maintenance: Call Control Menu 24.9 - System Maintenance - Call Control 1. Budget Management Enter Menu Selection Number:

34.2.1 Budget Management Menu 24.9.1 shows the budget management statistics for outgoing calls. Enter 1 from Menu 24.9 System Maintenance Call Control to bring up the following menu. 319 Chapter 34 System Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 207 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance: Budget Management Menu 24.9.1 - System Maintenance - Budget Management Remote Node 1.MyIsp 2.--------

3.--------

4.--------

5.--------

6.--------

7.--------

8.--------

Connection Time/Total Budget No Budget

Elapsed Time/Total Period No Budget

Reset Node (0 to update screen):

The total budget is the time limit on the accumulated time for outgoing calls to a remote node. When this limit is reached, the call will be dropped and further outgoing calls to that remote node will be blocked. After each period, the total budget is reset. The default for the total budget is 0 minutes and the period is 0 hours, meaning no budget control. You can reset the accumulated connection time in this menu by entering the index of a remote node. Enter 0 to update the screen. The budget and the reset period can be configured in menu 11.1 for the remote node when PPPoE encapsulation is selected. Table 112 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance: Budget Management FIELD Remote Node Connection Time/Total Budget Elapsed Time/Total Period DESCRIPTION Enter the index number of the remote node you want to reset (just one in this case) This is the total connection time that has gone by (within the allocated budget that you set in menu 11.1. The period is the time cycle in hours that the allocation budget is reset

(see menu 11.1.) The elapsed time is the time used up within this period. Enter 0 to update the screen or press [ESC] to return to the previous screen. 34.3 Time and Date Setting The Prestige keeps track of the time and date. There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige. Menu 24.10 allows you to update the time and date settings of your Prestige. The real time is then displayed in the Prestige error logs and firewall logs. Select menu 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance, as shown next. Chapter 34 System Maintenance 320 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 208 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 - System Maintenance 1. System Status 2. System Information and Console Port Speed 3. Log and Trace 4. Diagnostic 5. Backup Configuration 6. Restore Configuration 7. Upload Firmware 8. Command Interpreter Mode 9. Call Control 10. Time and Date Setting 11. Remote Management Enter Menu Selection Number:

Then enter 10 to go to Menu 24.10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting to update the time and date settings of your Prestige as shown in the following screen. Figure 209 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting Menu 24.10 - System Maintenance - Time and Date Setting Use Time Server when Bootup= None Time Server Address= N/A Current Time: 00 : 51 : 24 New Time (hh:mm:ss): 00 : 51 : 19 Current Date: 2000 - 01 - 01 New Date (yyyy-mm-dd): 2000 - 01 - 01 Time Zone= GMT Daylight Saving= No Start Date (mm-dd): 01 - 00 End Date (mm-dd): 01 - 00 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Table 113 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting FIELD Use Time Server when Bootup DESCRIPTION Enter the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Prestige. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main differences between them are the format. Daytime (RFC 867) format is day/month/year/time zone of the server. Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0. NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868). None. The default, enter the time manually. Time Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of your time server. Check with your ISP/

network administrator if you are unsure of this information. 321 Chapter 34 System Maintenance Table 113 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide FIELD Current Time New Time Current Date New Date Time Zone DESCRIPTION This field displays an updated time only when you reenter this menu. Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. This field displays an updated date only when you re-enter this menu. Enter the new date in year, month and day format. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If you use daylight savings time, then choose Yes. If using daylight savings time, enter the month and day that it starts on. If using daylight savings time, enter the month and day that it ends on Daylight Saving Start Date End Date When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 34.3.1 Resetting the Time The Prestige resets the time in three instances:

On leaving menu 24.10 after making changes. When the Prestige starts up, if there is a timeserver configured in menu 24.10. 24-hour intervals after starting. Chapter 34 System Maintenance 322 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 323 Chapter 34 System Maintenance P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 35 Remote Management This chapter covers remote management (SMT menu 24.11). 35.1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Prestige interface (if any) from which computers. When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules. 35.2 Remote Management To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field. Enter 11 from menu 24 to display Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control. 35.2.1 Remote Management Setup You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via:

the Internet (WAN only), the LAN only, All (LAN and WAN) or Disable (neither). WAN only (Internet) ALL (LAN and WAN) LAN only Disable (Neither) If you enable remote management of a service, but have applied a filter to block the service, then you will not be able to remotely manage the Prestige using the service. Enter 11, from menu 24, to display Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control (shown next). Chapter 35 Remote Management 324 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 210 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control Menu 24.11 - Remote Management Control TELNET Server:

Server Port = 23 Server Access = LAN only Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0 FTP Server:

Server Port = 21 Server Access = LAN only Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Web Server:

Server Port = 80 Server Access = LAN only Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 114 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control FIELD Telnet Server FTP Server Web Server Port Access DESCRIPTION Each of these read-only labels denotes a service or protocol. This field shows the port number for the service or protocol. You may change the port number if needed, but you must use the same port number to access the Prestige. Select the access interface (if any) by pressing the [SPACE BAR]. Choices are:

LAN only, WAN only, All or Disable. The default is LAN only. Secured Client IP The default 0.0.0.0 allows any client to use this service or protocol to access the Prestige. Enter an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 35.2.2 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

A filter in menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) is applied to block a Telnet, FTP or Web service. You have disabled that service in menu 24.11. The IP address in the Secured Client IP field (menu 24.11) does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. 325 Chapter 35 Remote Management P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 35.3 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the Prestiges WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the Prestiges LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 35.4 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when it is continuously updating the status in menu 24.1 or when sys stdio has been changed on the command line. Chapter 35 Remote Management 326 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 327 Chapter 35 Remote Management P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 36 IP Policy Routing This chapter covers setting and applying policies used for IP routing. 36.1 IP Policy Routing Overview Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the IAD takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Routing Policy (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing. 36.2 Benefits of IP Policy Routing Source-Based Routing Network administrators can use policy-based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections. Quality of Service (QoS) Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the precedence or TOS (Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic. Cost Savings IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high-bandwidth, high-cost paths while using low-cost paths for batch traffic. Load Sharing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths. 36.3 Routing Policy Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall IPPR process. A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria. The action is taken only when all the criteria are met. The criteria includes the source address and port, IP protocol

(ICMP, UDP, TCP, etc.), destination address and port, TOS and precedence (fields in the IP header) and length. The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between interactive and bulk traffic. Interactive applications, for example, telnet, tend to have short packets, while bulk traffic, for example, file transfer, tends to have large packets. The actions that can be taken include:

Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing 328 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide routing the packet to a different gateway (and hence the outgoing interface). setting the TOS and precedence fields in the IP header. IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation. The policies are divided into sets, where related policies are grouped together. A user defines the policies before applying them to an interface or a remote node, in the same fashion as the filters. There are 12 policy sets with six policies in each set. 36.4 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 shows all the policies defined. Figure 211 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 - IP Routing Policy Setup Policy Set # Name Set # Name

1 _______________ 7 _______________ 2 _______________ 8 _______________ 3 _______________ 9 _______________ 4 _______________ 10 _______________ 5 _______________ 11 _______________ 6 _______________ 12 _______________ Enter Policy Set Number to Configure= 0 Edit Name= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

To setup a routing policy, perform the following procedures:

1 Type 25 in the main menu to open Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup. 2 Type the index of the policy set you want to configure to open Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup. Menu 25.1 shows the summary of a policy set, including the criteria and the action of a single policy, and whether a policy is active or not. Each policy contains two lines. The former part is the criteria of the incoming packet and the latter is the action. Between these two parts, separator | means the action is taken on criteria matched and separator = means the action is taken on criteria not matched. 329 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 212 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25.1 - IP Routing Policy Setup

# A Criteria/Action

1 Y SA=1.1.1.1-1.1.1.1,DA=2.2.2.2-2.2.2.5 SP=20-25,DP=20-25,P=6,T=NM,PR=0 |GW=192.168.1.1,T=MT,PR=0 2 N ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3 N ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4 N ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5 N ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 6 N ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ Enter Policy Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Table 115 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup Source IP Address Source Port Destination IP Address Destination Port IP layer 4 protocol number (TCP=6, UDP=17) Type of service of incoming packet Precedence of incoming packet ABBREVIATION MEANING Criterion SA SP DA DP P T PR Action GW Gateway IP address T P Service NM Normal MD MT MR MC Minimum Delay Maximum Throughput Maximum Reliability Minimum Cost Outgoing Type of service Outgoing Precedence Type a number from 1 to 6 to display Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy (see the next figure). This menu allows you to configure a policy rule. Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing 330 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 213 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy Policy Set Name= test Active= No Criteria:

IP Protocol = 0 Type of Service= Don't Care Packet length= 0 Precedence = Don't Care Len Comp= N/A Source:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 end= N/A port start= N/A end= N/A Destination:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 end= N/A port start= N/A end= N/A Action= Matched Gateway addr = 0.0.0.0 Log= No Type of Service= No Change Precedence = No Change Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

The following table describes the fields in this menu. Table 116 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy FIELD Policy Set Name Active Criteria IP Protocol Type of Service Precedence Packet Length Len Comp Source:

addr start / end port start / end Destination:

addr start / end port start / end Action DESCRIPTION This is the policy set name assigned in Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the policy. Inactive policies are displayed with a minus sign - in SMT menu 25. IP layer 4 protocol, for example, UDP, TCP, ICMP, etc. Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing from Dont Care, Normal, Min Delay, Max Thruput, Min Cost or Max Reliable. Precedence value of the incoming packet. Press [SPACE BAR] and then

[ENTER] to select a value from 0 to 7 or Dont Care. Type the length of incoming packets (in bytes). The operators in the Len Comp

(next field) apply to packets of this length. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to choose from Equal, Not Equal, Less, Greater, Less or Equal or Greater or Equal. Source IP address range from start to end. Source port number range from start to end; applicable only for TCP/UDP. Destination IP address range from start to end. Destination port number range from start to end; applicable only for TCP/UDP. Specifies whether action should be taken on criteria Matched or Not Matched. 331 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 116 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy (continued) FIELD Gateway addr Type of Service Precedence Log DESCRIPTION Defines the outgoing gateway address. The gateway must be on the same subnet as the Prestige if it is on the LAN, otherwise, the gateway must be the IP address of a remote node. The default gateway is specified as 0.0.0.0. Set the new TOS value of the outgoing packet. Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing No Change, Normal, Min Delay, Max Thruput, Max Reliable or Min Cost. Set the new outgoing packet precedence value. Values are 0 to 7 or No Change. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Yes to make an entry in the system log when a policy is executed. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. 36.5 Applying an IP Policy This section shows you where to apply the IP policies after you design them. 36.5.1 Ethernet IP Policies From Menu 3 Ethernet Setup, type 2 to go to Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup. You can choose up to four IP policy sets (from 12) by typing their numbers separated by commas, for example, 2, 4, 7, 9. Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing 332 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 214 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP= Server Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33 Size of Client IP Pool= 32 Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Remote DHCP Server= N/A TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0 RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-1 Multicast= None IP Policies=

Edit IP Alias= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Go to menu 11.3 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the IP Routing Policy set(s) as appropriate. You can cascade up to four policy sets by typing their numbers separated by commas. Figure 215 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0 Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0 Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0 My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0 NAT= Full Feature Address Mapping Set= 2 Metric= 2 Private= No RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-2B Multicast= IGMP-v2 IP Policies=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

36.6 IP Policy Routing Example If a network has both Internet and remote node connections, you can route Web packets to the Internet using one policy and route FTP packets to a remote network using another policy. See the next figure. 333 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Route 1 represents the default IP route and route 2 represents the configured IP route. Figure 216 Example of IP Policy Routing To force packets coming from clients with IP addresses of 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 to be routed to the Internet via the WAN port of the Prestige, follow the steps as shown next. 1 Create a routing policy set in menu 25. 2 Create a rule for this set in Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy as shown next. Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing 334 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 217 IP Routing Policy Example Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy Packet length= 10 Len Comp= N/A end= 192.168.1.64 end= N/A end= N/A end= 80 Log= No Policy Set Name= set1 Active= Yes Criteria:

IP Protocol = 6 Type of Service= Don't Care Precedence = Don't Care Source:

addr start= 192.168.1.2 port start= 0 Destination:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 port start= 80 Action= Matched Gateway addr = 192.168.1.1 Type of Service= No Change Precedence = No Change Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

1 Check Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly. 2 Create another policy set in menu 25. 3 Create a rule in menu 25.1 for this set to route packets from any host (IP=0.0.0.0 means any host) with protocol TCP and port FTP access through another gateway

(192.168.1.100). 335 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 218 IP Routing Policy Example Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy Packet length= 10 Len Comp= N/A end= N/A end= N/A end= N/A end= 21 Log= No Policy Set Name= set2 Active= Yes Criteria:

IP Protocol = 6 Type of Service= Don't Care Precedence = Don't Care Source:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 port start= 0 Destination:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 port start= 20 Action= Matched Gateway addr =192.168.1.100 Type of Service= No Change Precedence = No Change Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

4 Check Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly. 5 Apply both policy sets in menu 3.2 as shown next. Figure 219 Applying IP Policies Example Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP Setup DHCP= Server Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33 Size of Client IP Pool= 64 Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0 Remote DHCP Server= N/A TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0 RIP Direction= Both Version= RIP-1 Multicast= None IP Policies= 1,2 Edit IP Alias= No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing 336 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 337 Chapter 36 IP Policy Routing P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 37 Call Scheduling Call scheduling (applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only) allows you to dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long. 37.1 Introduction The call scheduling feature allows the Prestige to manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long. This feature is similar to the scheduler in a videocassette recorder (you can specify a time period for the VCR to record). You can apply up to 4 schedule sets in Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile. From the main menu, enter 26 to access Menu 26 Schedule Setup as shown next. Figure 220 Menu 26 Schedule Setup Menu 26 - Schedule Setup Schedule Set # Name Set # Name

1 _______________ 7 _______________ 2 _______________ 8 _______________ 3 _______________ 9 _______________ 4 _______________ 10 _______________ 5 _______________ 11 _______________ 6 _______________ 12 _______________ Enter Schedule Set Number to Configure= 0 Edit Name= N/A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts. For example, if sets 1, 2 ,3 and 4 in are applied in the remote node then set 1 will take precedence over set 2, 3 and 4 as the Prestige, by default, applies the lowest numbered set first. Set 2 will take precedence over set 3 and 4, and so on. You can design up to 12 schedule sets but you can only apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node. To delete a schedule set, enter the set number and press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER]

(or delete) in the Edit Name field. Chapter 37 Call Scheduling 338 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide To setup a schedule set, select the schedule set you want to setup from menu 26 (1-12) and press [ENTER] to see Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup as shown next. Figure 221 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup Active= Yes Start Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2000 - 01 - 01 How Often= Once Once:

Date(yyyy-mm-dd)= 2000 - 01 - 01 Weekdays:

Sunday= N/A Monday= N/A Tuesday= N/A Wednesday= N/A Thursday= N/A Friday= N/A Saturday= N/A Start Time(hh:mm)= 00: 00 Duration(hh:mm)= 00: 00 Action= Forced On Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

If a connection has been already established, your Prestige will not drop it. Once the connection is dropped manually or it times out, then that remote node can't be triggered up until the end of the Duration. Table 117 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup FIELD Active Start Date How Often Once:

Date Weekday:

Day Start Time Duration DESCRIPTION Press [SPACE BAR] to select Yes or No. Choose Yes and press [ENTER] to activate the schedule set. Enter the start date when you wish the set to take effect in year -month-date format. Valid dates are from the present to 2036-February-5. Should this schedule set recur weekly or be used just once only? Press the [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select Once or Weekly. Both these options are mutually exclusive. If Once is selected, then all weekday settings are N/A. When Once is selected, the schedule rule deletes automatically after the scheduled time elapses. If you selected Once in the How Often field above, then enter the date the set should activate here in year-month-date format. If you selected Weekly in the How Often field above, then select the day(s) when the set should activate (and recur) by going to that day(s) and pressing [SPACE BAR] to select Yes, then press [ENTER]. Enter the start time when you wish the schedule set to take effect in hour-minute format. Enter the maximum length of time this connection is allowed in hour-minute format. 339 Chapter 37 Call Scheduling P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 117 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup (continued) FIELD Action DESCRIPTION Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and will persist for the time period specified in the Duration field. Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line. Enable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line. Disable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line. When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel: to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel. Once your schedule sets are configured, you must then apply them to the desired remote node(s). Enter 11 from the Main Menu and then enter the target remote node index. Using

[SPACE BAR], select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Encapsulation field and then press

[ENTER] to make the schedule sets field available as shown next. Figure 222 Applying Schedule Set(s) to a Remote Node (PPPoE) Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name= MyISP Route= IP Active= Yes Bridge= No Encapsulation= PPPoA Edit IP/Bridge= No Multiplexing= LLC-based Edit ATM Options= No Service Name= N/A Edit Advance Options= N/A Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= Allocated Budget(min)= 0 Rem Password= ******** Period(hr)= 0 Outgoing: Schedule Sets=

My Login= ChangeMe Nailed-Up Connection= No My Password= ******** Session Options:

Authen= CHAP/PAP Edit Filter Sets= No Idle Timeout(sec)= 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

You can apply up to four schedule sets, separated by commas, for one remote node. Change the schedule set numbers to your preference(s). Chapter 37 Call Scheduling 340 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 341 Chapter 37 Call Scheduling P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide CHAPTER 38 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies. 38.1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige Table 118 Troubleshooting Starting Up Your Prestige PROBLEM None of the LEDs turn on when I turn on the Prestige. CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure that the Prestiges power adaptor is connected to the Prestige and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure that the Prestige and the power source are both turned on. Turn the Prestige off and on. If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your vendor. 38.2 Problems with the LAN Table 119 Troubleshooting the LAN PROBLEM The LAN LEDs do not turn on. I cannot access the Prestige from the LAN. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check your Ethernet cable connections (refer to the Quick Start Guide for details). Check for faulty Ethernet cables. Make sure your computers Ethernet Card is working properly. If Any IP is disabled, make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and your computer(s) are on the same subnet. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 342 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 38.3 Problems with the WAN Table 120 Troubleshooting the WAN PROBLEM The DSL LED is off. I cannot get a WAN IP address from the ISP. I cannot access the Internet. The Internet connection disconnects. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check the telephone wire and connections between the Prestige DSL port and the wall jack. Make sure that the telephone company has checked your phone line and set it up for DSL service. Reset your ADSL line to reinitialize your link to the DSLAM. For details, refer to the Table 68 on page 204 (web configurator) or Table 108 on page 304 (SMT). The ISP provides the WAN IP address after authenticating you. Authentication may be through the user name and password, the MAC address or the host name. The username and password apply to PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation only. Make sure that you have entered the correct Service Type, User Name and Password (be sure to use the correct casing). Refer to the WAN Setup chapter

(web configurator or SMT). Make sure the Prestige is turned on and connected to the network. Verify your WAN settings. Refer to the chapter on WAN setup (web configurator) or the section on Internet Access (SMT). Make sure you entered the correct user name and password. If you use PPPoE pass through, make sure that bridge mode is turned on. Check the schedule rules. Refer to Chapter 37 on page 338 (SMT). If you use PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation, check the idle time-out setting. Refer to the Chapter 6 on page 90 (web configurator) or Chapter 24 on page 236 (SMT). Contact your ISP. 343 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 38.4 Problems Accessing the Prestige P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 121 Troubleshooting Accessing the Prestige PROBLEM I cannot access the Prestige. I cannot access the web configurator. CORRECTIVE ACTION The username is admin. The default password is 1234. The Password and Username fields are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing. If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password. Make sure that there is not an SMT console session running. Use the Prestiges WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Refer to the instructions on checking your WAN connection. Use the Prestiges LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. Refer to for instructions on checking your LAN connection. Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computers IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on remote management for details. Your computers and the Prestiges IP addresses must be on the same subnet for LAN access. If you changed the Prestiges LAN IP address, then enter the new one as the URL. Remove any filters in SMT menu 3.1 (LAN) or menu 11.5 (WAN) that block web service. See the following section to check that pop-up windows, JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed. 38.4.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. 38.4.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. 38.4.1.1.1 Disable pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 344 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 223 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 224 Internet Options 3 Click Apply to save this setting. 38.4.1.1.2 Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. 345 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting Figure 225 Internet Options P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.1.1. 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 346 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 226 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. 38.4.1.2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 347 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting Figure 227 Internet Options P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 348 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 228 Security Settings - Java Scripting 38.4.1.3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. 349 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting Figure 229 Security Settings - Java P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 38.4.1.3.1 JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 350 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 230 Java (Sun) 38.4.2 ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer If ActiveX is disabled, you will not be able to download ActiveX controls or to use Trend Micro Security Services. Make sure that ActiveX controls are allowed in Internet Explorer. Screen shots for Internet Explorer 6 are shown. Steps may vary depending on your version of Internet Explorer. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 In the Internet Options window, click Custom Level. 351 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting Figure 231 Internet Options Security P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 3 Scroll down to ActiveX controls and plug-ins. 4 Under Download signed ActiveX controls select the Prompt radio button. 5 Under Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins make sure the Enable radio button is selected. 6 Then click the OK button. Chapter 38 Troubleshooting 352 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 232 Security Setting ActiveX Controls 353 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix A Product Specifications See also the Introduction chapter for a general overview of the key features. Specification Tables Table 122 Device 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) 1234 192.168.1.32 to 192.168.1.64 Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask Default Password DHCP Pool Dimensions (W x D x H) 180 x 128 x 36 mm Power Specification Built-in Switch (P-660H/

P-660HW) Operation Temperature Storage Temperature Operation Humidity Storage Humidity 0 C ~ 40 C

-20 ~ 60 C 20% ~ 85% RH 10% ~ 90% RH 12VDC 1A Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports Appendix A 354 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 123 Firmware ADSL Standards Multi-Mode standard (ANSI T1.413,Issue 2; G.dmt(G.992.1); G.lite(G992.2)). ADSL2 G.dmt.bis (G.992.3) ADSL2 G.lite.bis (G.992.4) ADSL2+ (G.992.5) Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL) SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation) Auto-negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection ATM AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5) Multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC2684/1483) PPP over ATM AAL5 (RFC 2364) PPP over Ethernet (RFC 2516) RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM MAC encapsulated routing (ENET encapsulation) VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing Up to 8 PVCs (Permanent Virtual Circuits) I.610 F4/F5 OAM Other Protocol Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol. Management Wireless (P-660HW/ P-

660W) Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols. DHCP Server/Client/Relay RIP I/RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support (RFC 1213) IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy UPnP Embedded Web Configurator Menu-driven SMT (System Management Terminal) management CLI (Command Line Interpreter) Remote Management via Telnet or Web SNMP manageable FTP/TFTP for firmware downloading, configuration backup and restoration. Syslog Built-in Diagnostic Tools for FLASH memory, ADSL circuitry, RAM and LAN port MAP - Multimedia Auto Provisioner (multimedia installation tutorial and automatic configurator) (P-660HW) IEEE 802.11g compliance Frequency Range: 2.4 GHz Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Data Rates: 54Mbps and Auto Fallback Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Data Encryption 64/128/256 bit WLAN bridge to LAN Up to 32 MAC address filters WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK IEEE 802.1x Store up to 32 built-in user profiles using EAP-MD5 (Local User Database) External RADIUS server using EAP-MD5, TLS, TTLS 355 Appendix A P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 123 Firmware (continued) Firewall NAT/SUA Content Filtering Static Routes Other Features Stateful Packet Inspection. Prevent Denial of Service attacks such as Ping of Death, SYN Flood, LAND, Smurf etc. Real time E-mail alerts. Reports and logs. Port Forwarding 1024 NAT sessions Multimedia application PPTP under NAT/SUA IPSec passthrough SIP ALG passthrough VPN passthrough Web page blocking by URL keyword. 16 IP and 4 Bridge Any IP Zero Configuration (VC auto-hunting) Traffic Redirect Dynamic DNS IP Alias IP Policy Routing MBM (Multimedia Bandwidth Management) QoS (Quality of Service) Appendix A 356 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 357 Appendix A P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide APPENDIX B Wall-mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your Prestige on a wall. Note: See the product specifications appendix for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them. 1 Locate a high position on wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall. 2 Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix. Note: Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the Prestige with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the Prestige with the screws on the wall. Hang the Prestige on the screws. Figure 233 Wall-mounting Example Appendix B 358 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 359 Appendix B P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/

IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestiges LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Appendix C 360 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 234 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:

1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Adapter and then click Add. 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:

1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Protocol and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:

1 Click Add. 2 Select Client and then click Add. 361 Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 235 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Appendix C 362 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 236 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 4 Click the Gateway tab. If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. 6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run. 2 In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. 3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. 363 Appendix C Figure 237 Windows XP: Start Menu P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 238 Windows XP: Control Panel 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Appendix C 364 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 239 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 240 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. 365 Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Click Advanced. Figure 241 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. Appendix C 366 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 242 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. 367 Appendix C Figure 243 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. Appendix C 368 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 244 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 245 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. 369 Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. 6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 246 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Appendix C 370 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 247 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Click Apply Now and close the window. 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Linux 371 This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 248 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 249 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General Appendix C 372 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. 4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 250 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 5 Click the Devices tab. 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 251 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 373 Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-

eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. Figure 252 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 253 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 2 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 254 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter

./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Appendix C 374 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 255 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card

[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]

Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]

Setting network parameters: [OK]

Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]

Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]

Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. Figure 256 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties

[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000

[root@localhost]#

375 Appendix C P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix D IP Subnetting IP Addressing Routers route based on the network number. The router that delivers the data packet to the correct destination host uses the host ID. IP Classes An IP address is made up of four octets (eight bits), written in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1. IP addresses are categorized into different classes. The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet. Class A addresses have a 0 in the left most bit. In a class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID. Class B addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit. In a class B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID. Class C addresses begin (starting from the left) with 1 1 0. In a class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID. Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0. Class D addresses are used for multicasting.

(There is also a class E address. It is reserved for future use.) Table 124 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS:

Class A Class B Class C OCTET 1 Network number 0 Network number 10 110 Network number OCTET 2 Host ID Network number Network number OCTET 3 Host ID Host ID Network number OCTET 4 Host ID Host ID Host ID Note: Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed. Therefore:

A class C network (8 host bits) can have 28 2 or 254 hosts. A class B address (16 host bits) can have 216 2 or 65534 hosts. A class A address (24 host bits) can have 224 2 hosts (approximately 16 million hosts). Appendix D 376 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Since the first octet of a class A IP address must contain a 0, the first octet of a class A address can have a value of 0 to 127. Similarly the first octet of a class B must begin with 10, therefore the first octet of a class B address has a valid range of 128 to 191. The first octet of a class C address begins with 110, and therefore has a range of 192 to 223. Table 125 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS Class A Class B Class C Class D ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET

(BINARY) 00000000 to 01111111 10000000 to 10111111 11000000 to 11011111 11100000 to 11101111 ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0 to 127 128 to 191 192 to 223 224 to 239 Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). A subnet mask has 32 is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are. The natural masks for class A, B and C IP addresses are as follows. Table 126 Natural Masks CLASS A B C Subnetting NATURAL MASK 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 With subnetting, the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored. For example, a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID. With subnetting, some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits. By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. 377 Appendix D P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations. Table 127 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 SUBNET MASK 1 BITS

/24

/25

/26

/27

/28

/29

/30 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask. Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used. Example: Two Subnets As an example, you have a class C address 192.168.1.0 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Table 128 Two Subnets Example IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask Subnet Mask (Binary) NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 255.255.255. 11111111.11111111.11111111. HOST ID 0 00000000 0 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number (class C). You want to have two separate networks. Divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit. The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets; 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 and 192.168.1.128 with mask 255.255.255.128. Appendix D 378 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Note: In the following charts, shaded/bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to form network ID bits. The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have. The remaining number of host ID bits (after borrowing) determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet. Table 129 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 255.255.255. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 128 10000000 Table 130 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 255.255.255. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 10000000 128 10000000 The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have. Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet, so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 27 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet. 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the subnet itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. 379 Appendix D P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Example: Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets. Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00, 01, 10 and 11. The subnet mask is 26 bits (11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26-2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (all 0s is the subnet itself, all 1s is the broadcast address on the subnet). Table 131 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 Table 132 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 Table 133 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 10000000 11000000 Appendix D 380 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 134 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27-bit mask to create 8 subnets (001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110). The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 135 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS BROADCAST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning. Table 136 Class C Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 381 ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Appendix D Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks. P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID. A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets (see Table 124 on page 376) available for subnetting. The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning. Table 137 Class B Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Appendix D 382 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 383 Appendix D P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix E Boot Commands The BootModule AT commands execute from within the routers bootup software, when debug mode is selected before the main router firmware is started. When you start up your Prestige, you are given a choice to go into debug mode by pressing a key at the prompt shown in the following screen. In debug mode you have access to a series of boot module commands, for example ATUR (for uploading firmware) and ATLC (for uploading the configuration file). These are already discussed in the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter. Figure 257 Option to Enter Debug Mode Bootbase Version: V1.02 | 08/08/2001 15:40:50 RAM: Size = 16384 Kbytes DRAM Post: Testing: 16384K OK FLASH: Intel 16M RAS Version: V3.50(WB.0)b3 | 08/08/2001 16:21:27 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds. ................................................ Enter ATHE to view all available Prestige boot module commands as shown in the next screen. ATBAx allows you to change the console port speed. The x denotes the number preceding the colon to give the console port speed following the colon in the list of numbers that follows; for example ATBA3 will give a console port speed of 9.6 Kbps. ATSE displays the seed that is used to generate a password to turn on the debug flag in the firmware. The ATSH command shows product related information such as boot module version, vendor name, product model, RAS code revision, etc. ATGO allows you to continue booting the system. Most other commands aid in advanced troubleshooting and should only be used by qualified engineers. Appendix E 384 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 258 Boot Module Commands AT just answer OK ATHE print help ATBAx change baudrate. 1:38.4k, 2:19.2k, 3:9.6k 4:57.6k 5:115.2k ATENx,(y) set BootExtension Debug Flag (y=password) ATSE show the seed of password generator ATTI(h,m,s) change system time to hour:min:sec or show current time ATDA(y,m,d) change system date to year/month/day or show current date ATDS dump RAS stack ATDT dump Boot Module Common Area ATDUx,y dump memory contents from address x for length y ATRBx display the 8-bit value of address x ATRWx display the 16-bit value of address x ATRLx display the 32-bit value of address x ATGO(x) run program at addr x or boot router ATGR boot router ATGT run Hardware Test Program ATRTw,x,y(,z) RAM test level w, from address x to y (z iterations) ATSH dump manufacturer related data in ROM ATDOx,y download from address x for length y to PC via XMODEM ATTD download router configuration to PC via XMODEM ATUR upload router firmware to flash ROM ATLC upload router configuration file to flash ROM ATXSx xmodem select: x=0: CRC mode(default); x=1:

checksum mode ATSR system reboot 385 Appendix E P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix F Command Interpreter The following describes how to use the command interpreter. Enter 24 in the main menu to bring up the system maintenance menu. Enter 8 to go to Menu 24.8 - Command Interpreter Mode. See the included disk or zyxel.com for more detailed information on these commands. Note: Use of undocumented commands or misconfiguration can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable. Command Syntax The command keywords are in courier new font. Enter the command keywords exactly as shown, do not abbreviate. The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets <>. The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets []. The |symbol means or. For example, sys filter netbios config <type> <on|off>

means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off. Command Usage A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or? at the command prompt. Always type the full command. Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished. Appendix F 386 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 387 Appendix F P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix G Firewall Commands The following describes the firewall commands. Table 138 Firewall Commands FUNCTION Firewall SetUp COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall active

<yes | no>

This command turns the firewall on or off. config retrieve firewall This command returns the previously saved firewall settings. config save firewall This command saves the current firewall settings. Display config display firewall config display firewall set

<set #>

This command shows the of all the firewall settings including e-mail, attack, and the sets/

rules. This command shows the current configuration of a set; including timeout values, name, default-permit, and etc.If you dont put use a number (#) after set, information about all of the sets/rules appears. config display firewall set

<set #> rule <rule #>

This command shows the current entries of a rule in a firewall rule set. config display firewall attack This command shows all of the attack response settings. config display firewall e-mail This command shows all of the e-mail settings. config display firewall?

This command shows all of the available firewall sub commands. config edit firewall e-mail mail-server <ip address of mail server>

This command sets the IP address to which the e-mail messages are sent. 388 Edit E-mail Appendix G P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 138 Firewall Commands (continued) FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall e-mail return-addr <e-mail address>

This command sets the source e-mail address of the firewall e-mails. config edit firewall e-mail email-to <e-mail address>

This command sets the e-mail address to which the firewall e-mails are sent. config edit firewall e-mail policy <full | hourly | daily |

weekly>

config edit firewall e-mail day <sunday | monday | tuesday

| wednesday | thursday | friday

| saturday>

This command sets how frequently the firewall log is sent via e-mail. This command sets the day on which the current firewall log is sent through e-mail if the Prestige is set to send it on a weekly basis. config edit firewall e-mail hour <0-23>

This command sets the hour when the firewall log is sent through e- mail if the Prestige is set to send it on an hourly, daily or weekly basis. config edit firewall e-mail minute <0-59>

This command sets the minute of the hour for the firewall log to be sent via e- mail if the Prestige is set to send it on a hourly, daily or weekly basis. Attack config edit firewall attack send-alert <yes | no>

This command enables or disables the immediate sending of DOS attack notification e-mail messages. config edit firewall attack block <yes | no>

config edit firewall attack block-minute <0-255>

config edit firewall attack minute-high <0-255>

Set this command to yes to block new traffic after the tcp-max-incomplete threshold is exceeded. Set it to no to delete the oldest half-

open session when traffic exceeds the tcp-

max-incomplete threshold. This command sets the number of minutes for new sessions to be blocked when the tcp-

max-incomplete threshold is reached. This command is only valid when block is set to yes. This command sets the threshold rate of new half-open sessions per minute where the Prestige starts deleting old half-opened sessions until it gets them down to the minute-

low threshold. 389 Appendix G P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 138 Firewall Commands (continued) FUNCTION COMMAND config edit firewall attack minute-low <0-255>

DESCRIPTION This command sets the threshold of half-open sessions where the Prestige stops deleting half-opened sessions. config edit firewall attack max-incomplete-high <0-255>

This command sets the threshold of half-open sessions where the Prestige starts deleting old half-opened sessions until it gets them down to the max incomplete low. config edit firewall attack max-incomplete-low <0-255>

This command sets the threshold where the Prestige stops deleting half-opened sessions. config edit firewall attack tcp-max-incomplete <0-255>

This command sets the threshold of half-open TCP sessions with the same destination where the Prestige starts dropping half-open sessions to that destination. Sets config edit firewall set <set

#> name <desired name>

This command sets a name to identify a specified set. Config edit firewall set <set

#> default-permit <forward |

block>

This command sets whether a packet is dropped or allowed through, when it does not meet a rule within the set. Config edit firewall set <set

#> icmp-timeout <seconds>

This command sets the time period to allow an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response. Config edit firewall set <set

#> udp-idle-timeout <seconds>

This command sets how long a UDP connection is allowed to remain inactive before the Prestige considers the connection closed. Config edit firewall set <set

#> connection-timeout

<seconds>

This command sets how long Prestige waits for a TCP session to be established before dropping the session. Config edit firewall set <set

#> fin-wait-timeout <seconds>

This command sets how long the Prestige leaves a TCP session open after the firewall detects a FIN-exchange (indicating the end of the TCP session). Config edit firewall set <set

#> tcp-idle-timeout <seconds>

This command sets how long Prestige lets an inactive TCP connection remain open before considering it closed. Appendix G 390 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 138 Firewall Commands (continued) FUNCTION Rules COMMAND Config edit firewall set <set

#> log <yes | no>

DESCRIPTION This command sets whether or not the Prestige creates logs for packets that match the firewalls default rule set. Config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> permit

<forward | block>

This command sets whether packets that match this rule are dropped or allowed through. Config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> active <yes |

no>

Config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> protocol

<integer protocol value >

This command sets whether a rule is enabled or not. This command sets the protocol specification number made in this rule for ICMP. Config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> log <none |

match | not-match | both>

This command sets the Prestige to log traffic that matches the rule, doesn't match, both or neither. Config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> alert <yes |

no>

This command sets whether or not the Prestige sends an alert e-mail when a DOS attack or a violation of a particular rule occurs. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> srcaddr-

single <ip address>

This command sets the rule to have the Prestige check for traffic with this individual source address. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> srcaddr-

subnet <ip address> <subnet mask>

config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> srcaddr-range

<start ip address> <end ip address>

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for traffic from a particular subnet

(defined by IP address and subnet mask). This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for traffic from this range of addresses. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> destaddr-

single <ip address>

This command sets the rule to have the Prestige check for traffic with this individual destination address. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> destaddr-

subnet <ip address> <subnet mask>

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for traffic with a particular subnet destination (defined by IP address and subnet mask). 391 Appendix G Table 138 Firewall Commands (continued) FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> destaddr-

range <start ip address> <end ip address>

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for traffic going to this range of addresses. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> TCP destport-

single <port #>

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for TCP traffic with this destination address. You may repeat this command to enter various, non-consecutive port numbers. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> TCP destport-

range <start port #> <end port

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for TCP traffic with a destination port in this range. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> UDP destport-

single <port #>

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for UDP traffic with this destination address. You may repeat this command to enter various, non-consecutive port numbers. config edit firewall set <set

#> rule <rule #> UDP destport-

range <start port #> <end port

This command sets a rule to have the Prestige check for UDP traffic with a destination port in this range. config delete firewall e-mail This command removes all of the settings for e-mail alert. config delete firewall attack This command resets all of the attack response settings to their defaults. config delete firewall set

<set #>

This command removes the specified set from the firewall configuration. config delete firewall set

<set #> rule<rule #>

This command removes the specified rule in a firewall configuration set. Delete Appendix G 392 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 393 Appendix G P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix H NetBIOS Filter Commands The following describes the NetBIOS packet filter commands. Introduction NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. You can configure NetBIOS filters to do the following:

Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the DMZ and from the DMZ to the LAN. Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the WAN to the DMZ and from the DMZ to the WAN. Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets through VPN connections. Allow or disallow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls. Display NetBIOS Filter Settings Syntax:

sys filter netbios disp This command gives a read-only list of the current NetBIOS filter modes for The Prestige. NetBIOS Display Filter Settings Command Example

=========== NetBIOS Filter Status ===========

Between LAN and WAN: Block Between LAN and DMZ: Block Between WAN and DMZ: Block IPSec Packets: Forward Trigger Dial: Disabled Appendix H 394 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The filter types and their default settings are as follows. Table 139 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings NAME Between LAN and WAN Between LAN and DMZ Between WAN and DMZ IPSec Packets This field displays whether NetBIOS packets sent through a VPN DESCRIPTION This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded between the LAN and the WAN. This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded between the LAN and the DMZ. This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded between the WAN and the DMZ. connection are blocked or forwarded. This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are allowed to initiate calls. Disabled means that NetBIOS packets are blocked from initiating calls. Trigger dial EXAMPLE Block Block Block Forward Disabled NetBIOS Filter Configuration Syntax:sys filter netbios config <type> <on|off>

where

<type> =

<on|off> =

Identify which NetBIOS filter (numbered 0-3) to configure. 0 = Between LAN and WAN 1 = Between LAN and DMZ 2 = Between WAN and DMZ 3 = IPSec packet pass through 4 = Trigger Dial For type 0 and 1, use on to enable the filter and block NetBIOS packets. Use off to disable the filter and forward NetBIOS packets. For type 3, use on to block NetBIOS packets from being sent through a VPN connection. Use off to allow NetBIOS packets to be sent through a VPN connection. For type 4, use on to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate dial backup calls. Use off to block NetBIOS packets from initiating dial backup calls. Example commands sys filter netbios config 0 on sys filter netbios config 1 off This command blocks LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN NetBIOS packets. This command forwards LAN to DMZ and DMZ to LAN NetBIOS packets. 395 Appendix H P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide sys filter netbios config 3 on sys filter netbios config 4 off This command blocks IPSec NetBIOS packets. This command stops NetBIOS commands from initiating calls. Appendix H 396 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 397 Appendix H P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix I Splitters and Microfilters This appendix tells you how to install a POTS splitter or a telephone microfilter. Connecting a POTS Splitter When you use the Full Rate (G.dmt) ADSL standard, you can use a POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals. This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line. A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets. Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence, as shown in the following figure. Figure 259 Connecting a POTS Splitter 1 Connect the side labeled Phone to your telephone. 2 Connect the side labeled Modem to your Prestige. 3 Connect the side labeled Line to the telephone wall jack. Telephone Microfilters Telephone voice transmissions take place in the lower frequency range, 0 - 4KHz, while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range, above 4KHz. A microfilter acts as a low-pass filter, for your telephone, to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions. The use of a telephone microfilter is optional. Appendix I 398 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 1 Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y- Connector. 2 Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y-Connector to the wall side of the microfilter. 3 Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y-Connector to the Prestige. 4 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure. Figure 260 Connecting a Microfilter Prestige With ISDN This section relates to people who use their Prestige with ADSL over ISDN (digital telephone service) only. The following is an example installation for the Prestige with ISDN. Figure 261 Prestige with ISDN 399 Appendix I P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix I 400 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 401 Appendix I P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix J PPPoE PPPoE in Action An ADSL modem bridges a PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) from your computer to an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) which connects to a DSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates (see Figure 262 on page 403). One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN. PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. Benefits of PPPoE PPPoE offers the following benefits:

It provides you with a familiar dial-up networking (DUN) user interface. It lessens the burden on the carriers of provisioning virtual circuits all the way to the ISP on multiple switches for thousands of users. For GSTN (PSTN and ISDN), the switching fabric is already in place. It allows the ISP to use the existing dial-up model to authenticate and (optionally) to provide differentiated services. Traditional Dial-up Scenario The following diagram depicts a typical hardware configuration where the computers use traditional dial-up networking. Appendix J 402 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 262 Single-Computer per Router Hardware Configuration How PPPoE Works The PPPoE driver makes the Ethernet appear as a serial link to the computer and the computer runs PPP over it, while the modem bridges the Ethernet frames to the Access Concentrator

(AC). Between the AC and an ISP, the AC is acting as a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) LAC (L2TP Access Concentrator) and tunnels the PPP frames to the ISP. The L2TP tunnel is capable of carrying multiple PPP sessions. With PPPoE, the VC (Virtual Circuit) is equivalent to the dial-up connection and is between the modem and the AC, as opposed to all the way to the ISP. However, the PPP negotiation is between the computer and the ISP. Prestige as a PPPoE Client When using the Prestige as a PPPoE client, the computers on the LAN see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE. This alleviates the administrator from having to manage the PPPoE clients on the individual computers. Figure 263 Prestige as a PPPoE Client 403 Appendix J P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix K Log Descriptions This appendix provides descriptions of example log messages. Table 140 System Maintenance Logs WEB login failed DHCP client IP expired DHCP server assigns%s Successful SMT login SMT login failed Successful WEB login LOG MESSAGE Time calibration is successful Time calibration failed WAN interface gets IP:%s Successful TELNET login TELNET login failed Successful FTP login FTP login failed NAT Session Table is Full!

DESCRIPTION The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server. The router failed to get information from the time server. A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up server. A DHCP client's IP address has expired. The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client. Someone has logged on to the router's SMT interface. Someone has failed to log on to the router's SMT interface. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface. Someone has logged on to the router via telnet. Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet. Someone has logged on to the router via ftp. Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp. The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full. Starting Connectivity Monitor Starting Connectivity Monitor. Time initialized by Daytime Server Time initialized by Time server Time initialized by NTP server Connect to Daytime server fail Connect to Time server fail Connect to NTP server fail Too large ICMP packet has been dropped SMT Session Begin SMT Session End The router was not able to connect to the Time server. The router was not able to connect to the NTP server. The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large. An SMT management session has started. An SMT management session has ended. The router got the time and date from the Daytime server. The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server. The router got the time and date from the NTP server. The router got the time and date from the time server. Appendix K 404 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 140 System Maintenance Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Configuration Change: PC =

0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x Successful SSH login SSH login failed Successful HTTPS login HTTPS login failed DESCRIPTION The router is saving configuration changes. Someone has logged on to the routers SSH server. Someone has failed to log on to the routers SSH server. Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol. Table 141 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE

%s exceeds the max. number of session per host!

setNetBIOSFilter: calloc error readNetBIOSFilter: calloc error WAN connection is down. DESCRIPTION This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network through this interface. Table 142 Access Control Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: [TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]

<Packet Direction>

Firewall rule [NOT] match:[TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]

<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

[TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF]

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP

| GRE | OSPF]

Router sent blocked web site message: TCP DESCRIPTION Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the default policys setting. Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched (or did not match) a configured firewall rule

(denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry. The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested. 405 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide DESCRIPTION The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold.

(the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order.Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state. The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out. The default timeout values are as follows:

ICMP idle timeout: 3 minutes UDP idle timeout: 3 minutes TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout: 270 seconds TCP FIN-wait timeout: 2 MSL (Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header). TCP idle (established) timeout (s): 150 minutes TCP reset timeout: 10 seconds The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-

configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall.)Note: When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP) > Maximum Incomplete High, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections < Maximum Incomplete Low. The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst"). Table 143 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE Under SYN flood attack, sent TCP RST Exceed TCP MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Peer TCP state out of order, sent TCP RST Firewall session time out, sent TCP RST Exceed MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST Access block, sent TCP RST Table 144 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE

[TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |

Generic] packet filter matched (set:%d, rule:%d) DESCRIPTION Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (denoted by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. Appendix K 406 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 145 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE Firewall default policy: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,

<code:%d>

Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,

<type:%d>, <code:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

ICMP Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: ICMP Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:

ICMP Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP DESCRIPTION ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. ICMP access matched (or didnt match) a firewall rule

(denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through. The router blocked a packet that didnt have a corresponding NAT table entry. The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order. The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender. Table 146 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C01 Outgoing Call dev=%x ch=%x%s board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C02 OutCall Connected%d%s board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C02 Call Terminated DESCRIPTION The router received the setup requirements for a call. call is the reference (count) number of the call. dev is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP).

"channel" or ch is the call channel ID.For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0

"Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times. The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected. The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected. Table 147 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE ppp:LCP Starting ppp:LCP Opening ppp:CHAP Opening DESCRIPTION The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage has started. The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is opening. The PPP connections Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening. ppp:IPCP Starting The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting. ppp:IPCP Opening The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening. 407 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 147 PPP Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE ppp:LCP Closing ppp:IPCP Closing DESCRIPTION The PPP connections Link Control Protocol stage is closing. The PPP connections Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing. Table 148 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE UPnP pass through Firewall DESCRIPTION UPnP packets can pass through the firewall. Table 149 Content Filtering Logs DESCRIPTION The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword. The web site is not in a trusted domain, and the router blocks all traffic except trusted domain sites. LOG MESSAGE

%s: Keyword blocking

%s: Not in trusted web list

%s: Forbidden Web site The web site is in the forbidden web site list.

%s: Contains ActiveX

%s: Contains Java applet

%s: Contains cookie

%s: Proxy mode detected

%s The web site contains ActiveX. The web site contains a Java applet. The web site contains a cookie. The router detected proxy mode in the packet.

%s:%s

%s(cache hit)

%s:%s(cache hit)

%s: Trusted Web site

%s Waiting content filter server timeout DNS resolving failed The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, but it did not return the category type. The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, and returned the category type. The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache, but does not know the category type. The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache, and knows the category type. The web site is in a trusted domain. When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn't select the "Block Matched Web Site check box, the system forwards the web content. The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period. The Prestige cannot get the IP address of the external content filtering via DNS query. Creating socket failed The Prestige cannot issue a query because TCP/IP socket creation failed, port:port number. Appendix K 408 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 149 Content Filtering Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Connecting to content filter server fail License key is invalid The external content filtering license key is invalid. DESCRIPTION The connection to the external content filtering server failed. Table 150 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE attack [TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF]

attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) land [TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF]

land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) ip spoofing - WAN [TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF]

ip spoofing - WAN ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) icmp echo: ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) syn flood TCP ports scan TCP teardrop TCP teardrop UDP teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) illegal command TCP NetBIOS TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry [TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF]

ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) vulnerability ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) DESCRIPTION The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack. The firewall detected an ICMP attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack. The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack. The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack. The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack. The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack. The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack. The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack. The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. For type and code details, see Table 157 on page 416. 409 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide DESCRIPTION The router received and discarded a packet with an incorrect sequence number. The router received a packet that has been altered. A third party may have altered or tampered with the packet. The router dropped an inbound packet for which SPI could not find a corresponding phase 2 SA. The router dropped a connection that had outbound traffic and no inbound traffic for a certain time period. You can use the "ipsec timer chk_conn" CI command to set the time period. The default value is 2 minutes. The router dropped all connections with the MyIP configured as 0.0.0.0 when the WAN IP address changed. Table 151 IPSec Logs LOG MESSAGE Discard REPLAY packet Inbound packet authentication failed Receive IPSec packet, but no corresponding tunnel exists Rule <%d> idle time out, disconnect WAN IP changed to <IP>

Table 152 IKE Logs LOG MESSAGE Active connection allowed exceeded Start Phase 2: Quick Mode Verifying Remote ID failed:

Verifying Local ID failed:

IKE Packet Retransmit Failed to send IKE Packet DESCRIPTION The IKE process for a new connection failed because the limit of simultaneous phase 2 SAs has been reached. Phase 2 Quick Mode has started. The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peers Local/Remote Addresses dont match. The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peers Local/Remote Addresses dont match. The router retransmitted the last packet sent because there was no response from the peer. An Ethernet error stopped the router from sending IKE packets. Too many errors! Deleting SA An SA was deleted because there were too many errors. Phase 1 IKE SA process done Duplicate requests with the same cookie IKE Negotiation is in process The router has already started negotiating with the peer for The phase 1 IKE SA process has been completed. The router received multiple requests from the same peer while still processing the first IKE packet from the peer. No proposal chosen Local / remote IPs of incoming request conflict with rule <%d>

the connection, but the IKE process has not finished yet. Phase 1 or phase 2 parameters dont match. Please check all protocols / settings. Ex. One device being configured for 3DES and the other being configured for DES causes the connection to fail. The security gateway is set to 0.0.0.0 and the router used the peers Local Address as the routers Remote Address. This information conflicted with static rule #d; thus the connection is not allowed. Appendix K 410 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 152 IKE Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Cannot resolve Secure Gateway Addr for rule <%d>

Peer ID: <peer id> <My remote type> -<My local type>

vs. My Remote <My remote> -

<My remote>

vs. My Local <My local>-<My local>

Send <packet>

Recv <packet>

Recv <Main or Aggressive>

Mode request from <IP>

Send <Main or Aggressive>

Mode request to <IP>

Invalid IP <Peer local> /

<Peer local>

Remote IP <Remote IP> /

<Remote IP> conflicts Phase 1 ID type mismatch Phase 1 ID content mismatch No known phase 1 ID type found ID type mismatch. Local /

Peer: <Local ID type/Peer ID type>

ID content mismatch Configured Peer ID Content:

<Configured Peer ID Content>

Incoming ID Content:

<Incoming Peer ID Content>

Unsupported local ID Type:

<%d>

Build Phase 1 ID Adjust TCP MSS to%d Rule <%d> input idle time out, disconnect XAUTH succeed! Username:

<Username>

DESCRIPTION The router couldnt resolve the IP address from the domain name that was used for the secure gateway address. The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection. The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection. The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection. A packet was sent. IKE uses ISAKMP to transmit data. Each ISAKMP packet contains many different types of payloads. All of them show in the LOG. Refer to RFC2408 ISAKMP for a list of all ISAKMP payload types. The router received an IKE negotiation request from the peer address specified. The router started negotiation with the peer. The peers Local IP Address is invalid. The security gateway is set to 0.0.0.0 and the router used the peers Local Address as the routers Remote Address. This information conflicted with static rule #d; thus the connection is not allowed. This routers "Peer ID Type" is different from the peer IPSec router's "Local ID Type". This routers "Peer ID Content" is different from the peer IPSec router's "Local ID Content". The router could not find a known phase 1 ID in the connection attempt. The phase 1 ID types do not match. The phase 1 ID contents do not match. The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the configured

"Peer ID Content" is displayed. The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the incoming packet's ID content is displayed. The phase 1 ID type is not supported by the router. The router has started to build the phase 1 ID. The router automatically changed the TCP Maximum Segment Size value after establishing a tunnel. The tunnel for the listed rule was dropped because there was no inbound traffic within the idle timeout period. The router used extended authentication to authenticate the listed username. 411 Appendix K Table 152 IKE Logs (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The listed rules IKE phase 1 authentication method did not match between the router and the peer. DESCRIPTION The router was not able to use extended authentication to authenticate the listed username. The listed rules IKE phase 1 negotiation mode did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer. LOG MESSAGE XAUTH fail! Username:

<Username>

Rule[%d] Phase 1 negotiation mode mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 encryption algorithm mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 authentication algorithm mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 authentication method mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 key group mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 2 protocol mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 2 encryption algorithm mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 2 authentication algorithm mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 2 encapsulation mismatch Rule [%d]> Phase 2 pfs mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 ID mismatch The listed rules IKE phase 1 ID did not match between the The listed rules IKE phase 1 key group did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 protocol did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 encapsulation did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 perfect forward secret (pfs) setting did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 peers public key was not found. router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 hash did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 pre-shared key did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IPSec tunnel has been built successfully. Rule [%d] Phase 1 hash mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 1 preshared key mismatch Rule [%d] Tunnel built successfully Rule [%d] Peer's public key not found Rule [%d] Verify peer's signature failed Rule [%d] Sending IKE request IKE sent an IKE request for the listed rule. Rule [%d] Receiving IKE request Swap rule to rule [%d]

Rule [%d] Phase 1 key length mismatch IKE received an IKE request for the listed rule. The listed rules IKE phase 1verification of the peers signature failed. The router changed to using the listed rule. The listed rules IKE phase 1 key length (with the AES encryption algorithm) did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 1 did not match between the router and the peer. Rule [%d] phase 1 mismatch Appendix K 412 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 152 IKE Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Rule [%d] phase 2 mismatch Rule [%d] Phase 2 key length mismatch DESCRIPTION The listed rules IKE phase 2 did not match between the router and the peer. The listed rules IKE phase 2 key lengths (with the AES encryption algorithm) did not match between the router and the peer. Table 153 PKI Logs LOG MESSAGE Enrollment successful Enrollment failed Failed to resolve

<SCEP CA server url>

Enrollment successful Enrollment failed Failed to resolve <CMP CA server url>

Rcvd ca cert: <subject name>

Rcvd user cert:

<subject name>

Rcvd CRL <size>:

<issuer name>

Rcvd ARL <size>:

<issuer name>

Failed to decode the received ca cert Failed to decode the received user cert Failed to decode the received CRL Failed to decode the received ARL DESCRIPTION The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port. The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority servers IP address and port. The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority servers address cannot be resolved. The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority servers IP address and port. The CMP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority servers IP address and port. The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority servers IP address cannot be resolved. The router received a certification authority certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a user certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a CRL (Certificate Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received an ARL (Authority Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a corrupted CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The router received a corrupted ARL (Authority Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. 413 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 153 PKI Logs (continued) LOG MESSAGE Rcvd data <size> too large! Max size allowed: <max size>

Cert trusted: <subject name>

Due to <reason codes>, cert not trusted:

<subject name>

DESCRIPTION The router received directory data that was too large (the size is listed) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded. The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name. Due to the reasons listed, the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification. The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate. Please see Table 154 on page 414 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes. Table 154 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 DESCRIPTION Algorithm mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints. Key usage mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints. Certificate was not valid in the time interval.

(Not used) Certificate is not valid. Certificate signature was not verified correctly. Certificate was revoked by a CRL. Certificate was not added to the cache. Certificate decoding failed. Certificate was not found (anywhere). Certificate chain looped (did not find trusted root). Certificate contains critical extension that was not handled. Certificate issuer was not valid (CA specific information missing).

(Not used) CRL is too old. CRL is not valid. CRL signature was not verified correctly. CRL was not found (anywhere). CRL was not added to the cache. CRL decoding failed. CRL is not currently valid, but in the future. CRL contains duplicate serial numbers. Time interval is not continuous. Time information not available. Database method failed due to timeout. Appendix K 414 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 154 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes (continued) DESCRIPTION Database method failed. Path was not verified. Maximum path length reached. CODE 26 27 28 Table 155 802.1X Logs LOG MESSAGE Local User Database accepts user. Local User Database reports user credential error. Local User Database does not find user`s credential. RADIUS accepts user. RADIUS rejects user. Pls check RADIUS Server. Local User Database does not support authentication method. User logout because of session timeout expired. User logout because of user deassociation. User logout because of no authentication response from user. User logout because of idle timeout expired. User logout because of user request. Local User Database does not support authentication mothed. DESCRIPTION A user was authenticated by the local user database. A user was not authenticated by the local user database because of an incorrect user password. A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database. A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server. A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please check the RADIUS Server. The local user database only supports the EAP-MD5 method. A user tried to use another authentication method and was not authenticated. The router logged out a user whose session expired. The router logged out a user who ended the session. The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response. The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired. A user logged out. No response from RADIUS. Pls check RADIUS Server. Use Local User Database to authenticate user. Use RADIUS to authenticate user. The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication A user tried to use an authentication method that the local user database does not support (it only supports EAP-

MD5). There is no response message from the RADIUS server, please check the RADIUS server. The local user database is operating as the authentication server. No Server to authenticate user. Local User Database does not find user`s credential. server. There is no authentication server to authenticate a user. A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database. 415 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide DESCRIPTION ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the LAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the WAN. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the DMZ. ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the DMZ. ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or the Prestige. ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN or the Prestige. ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the DM or the Prestige. Table 156 ACL Setting Notes PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION LAN to WAN

(L to W) WAN to LAN

(W to L)

(D to L) DMZ to LAN DMZ to WAN

(D to W) WAN to DMZ

(W to D)

(L to D) LAN to DMZ LAN to LAN/

(L to L/ZW) Prestige WAN to WAN/

Prestige DMZ to DMZ/

Prestige

(W to W/ZW)

(D to D/ZW) Table 157 ICMP Notes CODE TYPE 0 3 4 5 8 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 0 DESCRIPTION Echo Reply Echo reply message Destination Unreachable Net unreachable Host unreachable Protocol unreachable Port unreachable A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF) Source route failed Source Quench A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network. Redirect Redirect datagrams for the Network Redirect datagrams for the Host Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message Appendix K 416 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 157 ICMP Notes (continued) DESCRIPTION Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error Timestamp Timestamp request message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message CODE TYPE 11 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 12 13 14 15 16 Table 158 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE

<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname src="<srcIP:srcPort>"

dst="<dstIP:dstPort>"

msg="<msg>" note="<note>"

devID="<mac address last three numbers>" cat="<category>

DESCRIPTION

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as the system name if you havent configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the logs syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The devID is the last three characters of the MAC address of the routers LAN port. The cat is the same as the category in the routers logs. The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type. Table 159 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY SA PROP TRANS KE ID CER CER_REQ HASH PAYLOAD TYPE Security Association Proposal Transform Key Exchange Identification Certificate Certificate Request Hash 417 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 159 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types (continued) LOG DISPLAY SIG NONCE NOTFY DEL VID PAYLOAD TYPE Signature Nonce Notification Delete Vendor ID Log Commands Go to the command interpreter interface. Configuring What You Want the Prestige to Log 1 Use the sys logs load command to load the log setting buffer that allows you to configure which logs the Prestige is to record. 2 Use sys logs category to view a list of the log categories. Figure 264 Displaying Log Categories Example Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp. ras>?

Valid commands are:

sys exit ether aux ip ipsec bridge bm certificates cnm 8021x radius ras>

3 Use sys logs category followed by a log category to display the parameters that are available for the category. Figure 265 Displaying Log Parameters Example ras> sys logs category access Usage: [0:none/1:log/2:alert/3:both] [0:don't show debug type/

1:show debug type]

4 Use sys logs category followed by a log category and a parameter to decide what to record. Appendix K 418 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Use 0 to not record logs for that category, 1 to record only logs for that category, 2 to record only alerts for that category, and 3 to record both logs and alerts for that category. Not every parameter is available with every category. 5 Step 5.Use the sys logs save command to store the settings in the Prestige (you must do this in order to record logs). Displaying Logs Use the sys logs display command to show all of the logs in the Prestiges log. Use the sys logs category display command to show the log settings for all of the log categories. Use the sys logs display [log category] command to show the logs in an individual Prestige log category. Use the sys logs clear command to erase all of the Prestiges logs. Log Command Example This example shows how to set the Prestige to record the access logs and alerts and then view the results. ras> sys logs load ras> sys logs category access 3 ras> sys logs save ras> sys logs display access

#.time source destination notes message 0|06/08/2004 05:58:21 |172.21.4.154 |224.0.1.24 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW) 1|06/08/2004 05:58:20 |172.21.3.56 |239.255.255.250 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW) 2|06/08/2004 05:58:20 |172.21.0.2 |239.255.255.254 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW) 3|06/08/2004 05:58:20 |172.21.3.191 |224.0.1.22 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW) 4|06/08/2004 05:58:20 |172.21.0.254 |224.0.0.1 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW) 5|06/08/2004 05:58:20 |172.21.4.187:137 |172.21.255.255:137 |ACCESS BLOCK Firewall default policy: UDP (W to W/ZW) 419 Appendix K P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Appendix L Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 266 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Appendix L 420 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 267 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. 421 Appendix L Figure 268 Infrastructure WLAN P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Appendix L 422 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 269 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. 423 Appendix L P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Preamble Type A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: Long and Short. Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead, so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it. Select Long if you have a noisy network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802.11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble. However, not all wireless adapters support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support, to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in noisy networks. Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble. Note: The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 160 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) Appendix L 424 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. 425 Appendix L P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-

Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of Authentication This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your network administrator for more information. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. Appendix L 426 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 427 Appendix L P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 161 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No EAP-TTLS Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes PEAP Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Moderate Moderate No WPA User Authentication WPA applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless stations using an external RADIUS database. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless stations. This all happens in the background automatically. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) also uses a secret key. This implementation of AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data. Appendix L 428 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-

use, consistent, single, alphanumeric password. Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 162 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open Open Shared WPA WPA WPA-PSK WPA-PSK ENCRYPTION METHOD ENTER MANUAL KEY ENABLE IEEE 802.1X None WEP WEP WEP TKIP WEP TKIP No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Yes Yes Yes Yes 429 Appendix L P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide APPENDIX M Internal SPTGEN Internal SPTGEN Overview Internal SPTGEN (System Parameter Table Generator) is a configuration text file useful for efficient configuration of multiple Prestiges. Internal SPTGEN lets you configure, save and upload multiple menus at the same time using just one configuration text file eliminating the need to navigate and configure individual SMT menus for each Prestige. The Configuration Text File Format All Internal SPTGEN text files conform to the following format:

<field identification number = field name = parameter values allowed = input>, where <input> is your input conforming to <parameter values allowed>. The figure shown next is an example of an Internal SPTGEN text file. Figure 270 Configuration Text File Format: Column Descriptions

/ Menu 1 General Setup 10000000 = Configured <0(No)| 1(Yes)> = 1 10000001 = System Name <Str> = Prestige 10000002 = Location <Str> =

10000003 = Contact Persons Name <Str> =

10000004 = Route IP <0(No)| 1(Yes)> = 1 10000005 = Route IPX <0(No)| 1(Yes)> = 0 10000006 = Bridge <0(No)| 1(Yes)> = 0 Note: DO NOT alter or delete any field except parameters in the Input column. For more text file examples, refer to the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Appendix. Internal SPTGEN File Modification - Important Points to Remember Each parameter you enter must be preceded by one =sign and one space. Appendix M 430 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Some parameters are dependent on others. For example, if you disable the Configured field in menu 1 (see Figure 270 on page 430), then you disable every field in this menu. If you enter a parameter that is invalid in the Input column, the Prestige will not save the configuration and the command line will display the Field Identification Number. Figure 271 on page 431, shown next, is an example of what the Prestige displays if you enter a value other than 0 or 1 in the Input column of Field Identification Number 1000000 (refer to Figure 270 on page 430). Figure 271 Invalid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example field value is not legal error:-1 ROM-t is not saved, error Line ID:10000000 reboot to get the original configuration Bootbase Version: V2.02 | 2/22/2001 13:33:11 RAM: Size = 8192 Kbytes FLASH: Intel 8M *2 The Prestige will display the following if you enter parameter(s) that are valid. Figure 272 Valid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example Please wait for the system to write SPT text file(ROM-t)... Bootbase Version: V2.02 | 2/22/2001 13:33:11 RAM: Size = 8192 Kbytes FLASH: Intel 8M *2 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example 1 Launch your FTP application. 2 Enter "bin". The command bin sets the transfer mode to binary. 3 Get "rom-t" file. The command get transfers files from the Prestige to your computer. The name rom-t is the configuration filename on the Prestige. 4 Edit the "rom-t" file using a text editor (do not use a word processor). You must leave this FTP screen to edit. 431 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Figure 273 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example c:\ftp 192.168.1.1 220 PPP FTP version 1.0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03:22:12 2000 User (192.168.1.1:(none)):

331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp>bin 200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-t ftp>bye c:\edit rom-t

(edit the rom-t text file by a text editor and save it) Note: You can rename your rom-t file when you save it to your computer but it must be named rom-t when you upload it to your Prestige. Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example 1 Launch your FTP application. 2 Enter "bin". The command bin sets the transfer mode to binary. 3 Upload your rom-t file from your computer to the Prestige using the put command. computer to the Prestige. 4 Exit this FTP application. Figure 274 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example c:\ftp 192.168.1.1 220 PPP FTP version 1.0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03:22:12 2000 User (192.168.1.1:(none)):

331 Enter PASS command Password:

230 Logged in ftp>bin 200 Type I OK ftp> put rom-t ftp>bye Example Internal SPTGEN Screens This section covers Prestige Internal SPTGEN screens. Table 163 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table ABBREVIATION MEANING FIN FN Field Identification Number (not seen in SMT screens) Field Name Appendix M 432 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 163 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table (continued) ABBREVIATION MEANING PVA INPUT

Parameter Values Allowed An example of what you may enter Applies to the Prestige. The following are Internal SPTGEN screens associated with the SMT screens of your Prestige. Table 164 Menu 1 General Setup (SMT Menu 1)

/ Menu 1 General Setup (SMT Menu 1) FIN 10000000 =

10000001 =

10000002 =

10000003 =

10000004 =

10000006 =

FN Configured System Name Location Contact Person's Name Route IP Bridge PVA

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<Str>

<Str>

<Str>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

INPUT

= 0

= Prestige

= 1

= 0 PVA Table 165 Menu 3 (SMT Menu 3 )

/ Menu 3.1 General Ethernet Setup (SMT menu 3.1) FIN 30100001 =

30100002 =

30100003 =

30100004 =

30100005 =

30100006 =

30100007 =

30100008 =

30100009 =

30100010 =

30100011 =

30100012 =

30100013 =

30100014 =

30100015 =

30100016 =

FN Input Protocol filters Set 1 Input Protocol filters Set 2 Input Protocol filters Set 3 Input Protocol filters Set 4 Input device filters Set 1 Input device filters Set 2 Input device filters Set 3 Input device filters Set 4 Output protocol filters Set 1 Output protocol filters Set 2 Output protocol filters Set 3 Output protocol filters Set 4 Output device filters Set 1 Output device filters Set 2 Output device filters Set 3 Output device filters Set 4

/ Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup (SMT Menu 3.2) INPUT

= 2

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256 433 Appendix M Table 165 Menu 3 (SMT Menu 3 (continued)) FIN 30200001 =

FN DHCP 30200002 =

Client IP Pool Starting Address 30200003 =

30200004 =

30200005 =

30200006 =

30200008 =

30200009 =

30200010 =

Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Remote DHCP Server IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction 30200011 =

Version 30200012 =

Multicast 30200013 =

30200014 =

30200015 =

30200016 =

IP Policies Set 1 (1~12) IP Policies Set 2 (1~12) IP Policies Set 3 (1~12) IP Policies Set 4 (1~12)

/ Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup (SMT Menu 3.2.1) FIN 30201001 =

30201002 =

30201003 =

30201004 =

FN IP Alias 1 IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction 30201005 =

Version 30201006 =

30201007 =

IP Alias #1 Incoming protocol filters Set 1 IP Alias #1 Incoming protocol filters Set 2 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide PVA

<0(None) |

1(Server) |

2(Relay)>

INPUT

= 0

192.168.1.33

= 32

= 0.0.0.0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0.0.0.0

172.21.2.200

= 16

= 0

= 0

= 2

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 256

= 256

<0(None) |

1(Both) | 2(In Only) | 3(Out Only)>

<0(Rip-1) |

1(Rip-2B)

|2(Rip-2M)>

<0(IGMP-v2) |

1(IGMP-v1) |

2(None)>

PVA

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(None) |

1(Both) | 2(In Only) | 3(Out Only)>

<0(Rip-1) |

1(Rip-2B)

|2(Rip-2M)>

Appendix M 434 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 165 Menu 3 (SMT Menu 3 (continued)) 30201008 =

30201009 =

30201010 =

30201011 =

30201012 =

30201013 =

30201014 =

30201015 =

30201016 =

30201017 =

IP Alias #1 Incoming protocol filters Set 3 IP Alias #1 Incoming protocol filters Set 4 IP Alias #1 Outgoing protocol filters Set 1 IP Alias #1 Outgoing protocol filters Set 2 IP Alias #1 Outgoing protocol filters Set 3 IP Alias #1 Outgoing protocol filters Set 4 IP Alias 2 <0(No) | 1(Yes)>

IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction 30201018 =

Version 30201019 =

30201020 =

30201021 =

30201022 =

30201023 =

30201024 =

30201025 =

30201026 =

IP Alias #2 Incoming protocol filters Set 1 IP Alias #2 Incoming protocol filters Set 2 IP Alias #2 Incoming protocol filters Set 3 IP Alias #2 Incoming protocol filters Set 4 IP Alias #2 Outgoing protocol filters Set 1 IP Alias #2 Outgoing protocol filters Set 2 IP Alias #2 Outgoing protocol filters Set 3 IP Alias #2 Outgoing protocol filters Set 4

*/ Menu 3.5 Wireless LAN Setup (SMT Menu 3.5) FIN 30500001 =

30500002 =

FN ESSID Hide ESSID 30500003 =

Channel ID

<0(None) |

1(Both) | 2(In Only) | 3(Out Only)>

<0(Rip-1) |

1(Rip-2B)

|2(Rip-2M)>

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256 PVA

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<1|2|3|4|5|6|7

|8|9|10|11|12|

13>

INPUT Wireless

= 0

= 1 435 Appendix M Table 165 Menu 3 (SMT Menu 3 (continued)) 30500004 =

30500005 =

30500006 =

RTS Threshold FRAG. Threshold WEP 30500007 =

30500008 =

30500009 =

30500010 =

30500011 =

30500012 =

Default Key WEP Key1 WEP Key2 WEP Key3 WEP Key4 Wlan Active

*/ MENU 3.5.1 WLAN MAC ADDRESS FILTER (SMT MENU 3.5.1) FIN 30501001 =

FN Mac Filter Active 30501002 =

Filter Action 30501003 =

Address 1 30501004 =

Address 2 30501005 =

Address 3 Continued 30501034 =

Address 32 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

= 2432

= 2432

= 0

<0 ~ 2432>

<256 ~ 2432>

<0(DISABLE) |

1(64-bit WEP)

| 2(128-bit WEP)>

<1|2|3|4> = 0

= 0

<0(Disable) |

1(Enable)>

PVA

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(Allow) |

1(Deny)>

INPUT

= 0

= 0

00:00:00:00:0 0:00

00:00:00:00:0 0:00

00:00:00:00:0 0:00

00:00:00:00:0 0:00 Table 166 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (SMT Menu 4)

/ Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (SMT Menu 4) FIN 40000000 =

FN Configured 40000001 =

ISP PVA

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

INPUT

= 1

= 1 Appendix M 436 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 166 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (SMT Menu 4) (continued) 40000002 =

Active 40000003 =

40000004 =

ISP's Name Encapsulation 40000005 =

Multiplexing 40000006 =

40000007 =

40000008 =

40000009 =

40000010 =

40000011 =

VPI #

VCI #

Service Name My Login My Password Single User Account 40000012 =

IP Address Assignment 40000013 =

40000014 =

40000015 =

40000016 =

40000017 =

40000018 =

40000019 =

40000020 =

40000021 =

40000022 =

40000023 =

40000024 =

40000025 =

IP Address Remote IP address Remote IP subnet mask ISP incoming protocol filter set 1 ISP incoming protocol filter set 2 ISP incoming protocol filter set 3 ISP incoming protocol filter set 4 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 1 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 2 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 3 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 4 ISP PPPoE idle timeout Route IP 40000026 =

Bridge 40000027 =

ATM QoS Type 40000028 =

40000029 =

40000030 =

40000031=

Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) Maximum Burst Size(MBS) RIP Direction

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

= 1

= ChangeMe

= 2

= 1

= 0

= 35

= any

= test@pqa

= 1234

= 1

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 6

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 256

= 0

= 1

= 0

= 1

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

<2(PPPOE) |

3(RFC 1483)|

4(PPPoA )|

5(ENET ENCAP)>

<1(LLC-based)

| 2(VC-based)

<Str>

<Str>

<Str>

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(Static)|1(D ynamic)>

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(No) |

1(Yes)>

<0(CBR) | (1

(UBR)>

<0(None) |

1(Both) | 2(In Only) | 3(Out Only)>

437 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 166 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (SMT Menu 4) (continued) 40000032=

RIP Version 40000033=

Nailed-up Connection

<0(Rip-1) |

1(Rip-2B)

|2(Rip-2M)>

<0(No)

|1(Yes)>

= 0

= 0 Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12)

/ Menu 12.1.1 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.1) FIN 120101001 =

120101002 =

120101003 =

120101004 =

120101005 =

120101006 =

120101007 =

FN IP Static Route set #1, Name IP Static Route set #1, Active IP Static Route set #1, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #1, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #1, Gateway IP Static Route set #1, Metric IP Static Route set #1, Private

/ Menu 12.1.2 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.2) FIN 120102001 =

120102002 =

120102003 =

120102004 =

120102005 =

120102006 =

120102007 =

FN IP Static Route set #2, Name IP Static Route set #2, Active IP Static Route set #2, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #2, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #2, Gateway IP Static Route set #2, Metric IP Static Route set #2, Private

/ Menu 12.1.3 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.3) FIN 120103001 =

120103002 =

120103003 =

120103004 =

120103005 =

120103006 =

120103007 =

FN IP Static Route set #3, Name IP Static Route set #3, Active IP Static Route set #3, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #3, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #3, Gateway IP Static Route set #3, Metric IP Static Route set #3, Private PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 Appendix M 438 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12) (continued)

/ Menu 12.1.4 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.4) FIN 120104001 =

120104002 =

120104003 =

120104004 =

120104005 =

120104006 =

120104007 =

FN IP Static Route set #4, Name IP Static Route set #4, Active IP Static Route set #4, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #4, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #4, Gateway IP Static Route set #4, Metric IP Static Route set #4, Private

/ Menu 12.1.5 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.5) FIN 120105001 =

120105002 =

120105003 =

120105004 =

120105005 =

120105006 =

120105007 =

FN IP Static Route set #5, Name IP Static Route set #5, Active IP Static Route set #5, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #5, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #5, Gateway IP Static Route set #5, Metric IP Static Route set #5, Private

/ Menu 12.1.6 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.6) FIN 120106001 =

120106002 =

120106003 =

120106004 =

120106005 =

120106006 =

120106007 =

FN IP Static Route set #6, Name IP Static Route set #6, Active IP Static Route set #6, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #6, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #6, Gateway IP Static Route set #6, Metric IP Static Route set #6, Private

/ Menu 12.1.7 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.7) FIN 120107001 =

120107002 =

120107003 =

120107004 =

120107005 =

FN IP Static Route set #7, Name IP Static Route set #7, Active IP Static Route set #7, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #7, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #7, Gateway PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0 439 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12) (continued) 120107006 =

120107007 =

IP Static Route set #7, Metric IP Static Route set #7, Private

/ Menu 12.1.8 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.8) FIN 120108001 =

120108002 =

120108003 =

120108004 =

120108005 =

120108006 =

120108007 =

FN IP Static Route set #8, Name IP Static Route set #8, Active IP Static Route set #8, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #8, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #8, Gateway IP Static Route set #8, Metric IP Static Route set #8, Private

*/ Menu 12.1.9 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.9) FIN 120109001 =

120109002 =

120109003 =

120109004 =

120109005 =

120109006 =

120109007 =

FN IP Static Route set #9, Name IP Static Route set #9, Active IP Static Route set #9, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #9, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #9, Gateway IP Static Route set #9, Metric IP Static Route set #9, Private

*/ Menu 12.1.10 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.10) FIN 120110001 =

120110002 =

120110003 =

120110004 =

120110005 =

120110006 =

120110007 =

FN IP Static Route set #10, Name IP Static Route set #10, Active IP Static Route set #10, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #10, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #10, Gateway IP Static Route set #10, Metric IP Static Route set #10, Private

*/ Menu 12.1.11 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.11) FIN 120111001 =

120111002 =

120111003 =

FN IP Static Route set #11, Name IP Static Route set #11, Active IP Static Route set #11, Destination IP address

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0 Appendix M 440 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12) (continued) 120111004 =

120111005 =

120111006 =

120111007 =

IP Static Route set #11, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #11, Gateway IP Static Route set #11, Metric IP Static Route set #11, Private

*/ Menu 12.1.12 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.12) FIN 120112001 =

120112002 =

120112003 =

120112004 =

120112005 =

120112006 =

120112007 =

FN IP Static Route set #12, Name IP Static Route set #12, Active IP Static Route set #12, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #12, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #12, Gateway IP Static Route set #12, Metric IP Static Route set #12, Private

*/ Menu 12.1.13 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1.13) FIN 120113001 =

120113002 =

120113003 =

120113004 =

120113005 =

120113006 =

120113007 =

FN IP Static Route set #13, Name IP Static Route set #13, Active IP Static Route set #13, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #13, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #13, Gateway IP Static Route set #13, Metric IP Static Route set #13, Private

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

*/ Menu 12.1.14 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1. 14) FIN 120114001 =

120114002 =

120114003 =

120114004 =

120114005 =

120114006 =

120114007 =

FN IP Static Route set #14, Name IP Static Route set #14, Active IP Static Route set #14, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #14, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #14, Gateway IP Static Route set #14, Metric IP Static Route set #14, Private PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

*/ Menu 12.1.15 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1. 15) FIN 120115001 =

FN IP Static Route set #15, Name PVA

<Str>

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

441 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 167 Menu 12 (SMT Menu 12) (continued) 120115002 =

120115003 =

120115004 =

120115005 =

120115006 =

120115007 =

IP Static Route set #15, Active IP Static Route set #15, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #15, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #15, Gateway IP Static Route set #15, Metric IP Static Route set #15, Private

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

*/ Menu 12.1.16 IP Static Route Setup (SMT Menu 12.1. 16) FIN 120116001 =

120116002 =

120116003 =

120116004 =

120116005 =

120116006 =

120116007 =

FN IP Static Route set #16, Name IP Static Route set #16, Active IP Static Route set #16, Destination IP address IP Static Route set #16, Destination IP subnetmask IP Static Route set #16, Gateway IP Static Route set #16, Metric IP Static Route set #16, Private PVA

<Str>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

<0(No) |1(Yes)>

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 INPUT

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 Table 168 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup (SMT Menu 15)

/ Menu 15 SUA Server Setup (SMT Menu 15) FIN 150000001 =

150000002 =

150000003 =

150000004 =

150000005 =

150000006 =

150000007 =

150000008 =

150000009 =

150000010 =

150000011 =

150000012 =

150000013 =

Appendix M FN SUA Server IP address for default port SUA Server #2 Active SUA Server #2 Protocol PVA INPUT

= 0.0.0.0

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

= 0

= 0 SUA Server #2 Port Start SUA Server #2 Port End SUA Server #2 Local IP address SUA Server #3 Active SUA Server #3 Protocol SUA Server #3 Port Start SUA Server #3 Port End SUA Server #3 Local IP address SUA Server #4 Active SUA Server #4 Protocol

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 442 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 168 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup (SMT Menu 15) (continued) 150000014 =

150000015 =

150000016 =

150000017 =

150000018 =

150000019 =

150000020 =

150000021 =

150000022 =

SUA Server #4 Port Start SUA Server #4 Port End SUA Server #4 Local IP address SUA Server #5 Active SUA Server #5 Protocol SUA Server #5 Port Start SUA Server #5 Port End SUA Server #5 Local IP address SUA Server #6 Active 150000023 =

SUA Server #6 Protocol SUA Server #6 Port Start SUA Server #6 Port End SUA Server #6 Local IP address SUA Server #7 Active SUA Server #7 Protocol SUA Server #7 Port Start SUA Server #7 Port End SUA Server #7 Local IP address SUA Server #8 Active SUA Server #8 Protocol SUA Server #8 Port Start SUA Server #8 Port End SUA Server #8 Local IP address SUA Server #9 Active SUA Server #9 Protocol SUA Server #9 Port Start SUA Server #9 Port End SUA Server #9 Local IP address

= SUA Server #10 Active SUA Server #10 Protocol 150000024 =

150000025 =

150000026 =

150000027 =

150000028 =

150000029 =

150000030 =

150000031 =

150000032 =

150000033 =

150000034 =

150000035 =

150000036 =

150000037 =

150000038 =

150000039 =

150000040 =

150000041 =

150000042 150000043 =

150000044 =

150000045 =

150000046 =

150000047 =

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)> =

0

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0 SUA Server #10 Port Start SUA Server #10 Port End SUA Server #10 Local IP address SUA Server #11 Active

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

443 Appendix M Table 168 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup (SMT Menu 15) (continued) P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 150000048 =

SUA Server #11 Protocol 150000049 =

150000050 =

150000051 =

150000052 =

150000053 =

150000054 =

150000055 =

150000056 =

SUA Server #11 Port Start SUA Server #11 Port End SUA Server #11 Local IP address SUA Server #12 Active SUA Server #12 Protocol SUA Server #12 Port Start SUA Server #12 Port End SUA Server #12 Local IP address

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

= 0

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(All)|6(TCP)|17(U DP)>

Table 169 Menu 21.1 Filter Set #1 (SMT Menu 21.1)

/ Menu 21 Filter set #1 (SMT Menu 21) FIN 210100001 =

FN Filter Set 1, Name

/ Menu 21.1.1.1 set #1, rule #1 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.1) FIN 210101001 =

210101002 =

210101003 =

210101004 =

210101005 =

210101006 =

210101007 =

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Dest Port Comp 210101008 =

210101009 =

210101010 =

210101011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Src IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Src Port Comp 210101013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Act Match 210101014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 1 Act Not Match PVA

<Str>

PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|

3(less)|

4(greater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

Appendix M 444

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 0.0.0.0 INPUT

INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 137

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 169 Menu 21.1 Filter Set #1 (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued)

/ Menu 21.1.1.2 set #1, rule #2 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.2) FIN 210102001 =

210102002 =

210102003 =

210102004 =

210102005 =

210102006 =

210102007 =

PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Dest Port Comp <0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

210102008 =

210102009 =

210102010 =

210102011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Src IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Src Port Comp 210102013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Act Match 210102014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 2 Act Not Match

/ Menu 21.1.1.3 set #1, rule #3 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.3) FIN 210103001 =

210103002 =

210103003 =

210103004 =

210103005 =

210103006 =

210103007 =

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Dest Port Comp 210103008 =

210103009 =

210103010 =

210103011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Src IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Src Port Comp

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 138

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1 INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 139

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0 445 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)

= 3

= 1 Table 169 Menu 21.1 Filter Set #1 (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued) 210103013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Act Match 210103014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 3 Act Not Match

/ Menu 21.1.1.4 set #1, rule #4 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.4) FIN 210104001 =

210104002 =

210104003 =

210104004 =

210104005 =

210104006 =

210104007 =

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Dest Port Comp 210104008 =

210104009 =

210104010 =

210104011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Src IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Src Port Comp 210104013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Act Match 210104014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 4 Act Not Match PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<1(check next)

|2( forward) |

3(drop)

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)

/ Menu 21.1.1.5 set #1, rule #5 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.5) FIN 210105001 =

210105002 =

210105003 =

210105004 =

210105005 =

210105006 =

210105007 =

PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Dest Port Comp <0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

210105008 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Src IP Address INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 137

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1 INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 138

= 1

= 0.0.0.0 Appendix M 446 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 169 Menu 21.1 Filter Set #1 (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued) 210105009 =

210105010 =

210105011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Src Port Comp 210105013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Act Match 210105014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 5 Act Not Match

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

<1(Check Next)

|2(Forward)|3(Dro p)>

/ Menu 21.1.1.6 set #1, rule #6 (SMT Menu 21.1.1.6) FIN 210106001 =

210106002 =

210106003 =

210106004 =

210106005 =

210106006 =

210106007 =

PVA

<2(TCP/IP)>

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

FN IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Type IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Active IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Protocol IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Dest Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Dest Port Comp <0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

210106008 =

210106009 =

210106010 =

210106011 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Src IP address IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Src Port IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Src Port Comp 210106013 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Act Match 210106014 =

IP Filter Set 1,Rule 6 Act Not Match

<0(none)|1(equal)

|2(not equal)|3(less)|4(

greater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|

3(drop)>

INPUT

= 2

= 1

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 139

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 2 Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1)

/ Menu 21.1 filter set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) FIN 210200001 =

FN Filter Set 2, Nam PVA

<Str>

447 INPUT

NetBIOS_WAN Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued)

/ Menu 21.1.2.1 Filter set #2, rule #1 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.1) FIN 210201001 =

210201002 =

210201003 =

210201004 =

210201005 =

210201006 =

210201007 =

210201008 =

210201009 =

210201010 =

210201011 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Type IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Active IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Dest Port Comp IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Src IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Src Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Src Port Comp 210201013 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Act Match 210201014 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 1 Act Not Match INPUT PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2

= 1

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 137

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

/ Menu 21.1.2.2 Filter set #2, rule #2 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.2) FIN 210202001 =

210202002 =

210202003 =

210202004 =

210202005 =

210202006 =

210202007 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Type IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Active IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Dest Port Comp 210202008 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Src IP address INPUT PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2

= 1

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

= 0

= 138

= 1

= 0.0.0.0 Appendix M 448 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 210202009 =

Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued) IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2,Rule 2 Src Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Src Port Comp 210202010 =

210202011 =

210202013 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Act Match 210202014 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 2 Act Not Match

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

/ Menu 21.1.2.3 Filter set #2, rule #3 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.3) FIN 210203001 =

210203002 =

210203003 =

210203004 =

210203005 =

210203006 =

210203007 =

210203008 =

210203009 =

210203010 =

210203011 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Type IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Active IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Dest Port Comp IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Src IP address IP Filter Set 2,Rule 3 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Src Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Src Port Comp 210203013 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 3 Act Match 210203014 =

IP Filter Set 2,Rule 3 Act Not Match INPUT PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2

= 1

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

= 6

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 139

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

/ Menu 21.1.2.4 Filter set #2, rule #4 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.4) FIN 210204001 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Type PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2 INPUT 449 Appendix M P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide

<0(No)|1(Yes

)> = 1

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 137

= 1

= 0.0.0.0 Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued) 210204002 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Active 210204003 =

210204004 =

210204005 =

210204006 =

210204007 =

210204008 =

210204009 =

210204010 =

210204011 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Dest Port Comp IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Src IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Src Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Src Port Comp 210204013 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Act Match 210204014 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 4 Act Not Match

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 1

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

/ Menu 21.1.2.5 Filter set #2, rule #5 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.5) FIN 210205001 =

210205002 =

210205003 =

210205004 =

210205005 =

210205006 =

210205007 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Type IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Active IP Filter Set 2,Rule 5 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Dest Port Comp 210205008 =

210205009 =

210205010 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Src IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Src Port INPUT PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2

= 1

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

= 0

= 138

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0 Appendix M 450 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 170 Menu 21.1 Filer Set #2, (SMT Menu 21.1) (continued) 210205011 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Src Port Comp 210205013 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Act Match 210205014 =

IP Filter Set 2, Rule 5 Act Not Match

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

= 0

= 3

= 1

/ Menu 21.1.2.6 Filter set #2, rule #6 (SMT Menu 21.1.2.5) FIN 210206001 =

210206002 =

210206003 =

210206004 =

210206005 =

210206006 =

210206007 =

210206008 =

210206009 =

210206010 =

210206011 =

FN IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Type IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Active IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Protocol IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Dest IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Dest Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Dest Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Dest Port Comp IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Src IP address IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Src Subnet Mask IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Src Port IP Filter Set 2, Rule 6 Src Port Comp 210206013 =

IP Filter Set 2,Rule 6 Act Match 210206014 =

IP Filter Set 2,Rule 6 Act Not Match 241100005 =

FTP Server Access 241100006 =

241100007 =

241100008 =

FTP Server Secured IP address WEB Server Port WEB Server Access 241100009 =

WEB Server Secured IP address INPUT PVA

<0(none)|2(TCP/IP)> = 2

= 1

<0(No)|1(Yes)>

= 17

= 0.0.0.0

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<0(none)|1(equal)|2

(not equal)|3(less)|4(gr eater)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<1(check next)|2(forward)|3(

drop)>

<0(all)|1(none)|2(L an)|3(Wan)>

<0(all)|1(none)|2(L an) |3(Wan)>

= 0

= 139

= 1

= 0.0.0.0

= 0

= 0

= 0

= 3

= 2

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 80

= 0

= 0.0.0.0 Appendix M 451 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 171 Menu 23 System Menus (SMT Menu 23)

*/ Menu 23.1 System Password Setup (SMT Menu 23.1) FIN 230000000 =

FN System Password PVA

*/ Menu 23.2 System security: radius server (SMT Menu 23.2) FIN 230200001 =

230200002 =

230200003 =

230200004 =

230200005 =

FN Authentication Server Configured Authentication Server Active Authentication Server IP Address PVA

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

Authentication Server Port Authentication Server Shared Secret 230200006 =

230200007 =

230200008 =

Accounting Server Configured Accounting Server Active Accounting Server IP Address

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

<0(No) | 1(Yes)>

230200009 =

230200010 =

Accounting Server Port Accounting Server Shared Secret FIN 230400001 =

FN Wireless Port Control

*/ Menu 23.4 System security: IEEE 802.1x (SMT Menu 23.4) PVA

<0(Authentication Required) |1(No Access Allowed)

|2(No Authentication Required)>

230400002 =

230400003 =

230400004 =

ReAuthentication Timer (in second) Idle Timeout (in second) Authentication Databases 230400005 =

Key Management Protocol 230400006 =

Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 230400007 =

PSK =

<0(Local User Database Only)

|1(RADIUS Only)

|2(Local,RADIUS)

|3(RADIUS,Local)>

<0(8021x) |1(WPA)

|2(WPAPSK)>

<0(Disable) |1(64-

bit WEP) |2(128-bit WEP)>

INPUT

= 1234 INPUT

= 1

= 1

192.168.1.32

= 1822

111111111111 111 111111111111 1111

= 1

= 1

192.168.1.44

= 1823

= 1234 INPUT

= 2

= 555

= 999

= 1

= 0

= 0

Appendix M 452 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Table 171 Menu 23 System Menus (SMT Menu 23) (continued) 230400008 =

WPA Mixed Mode 230400009 =

230400010 =

Data Privacy for Broadcast/

Multicast packets WPA Broadcast/Multicast Key Update Timer

<0(Disable)

|1(Enable)>

<0(TKIP) |1(WEP)>

= 0

= 0

= 0 Table 172 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control (SMT Menu 24.11)

/ Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control (SMT Menu 24.11) PVA FIN 241100001 =

241100002 =

FN TELNET Server Port TELNET Server Access 241100003 =

241100004 =

241100005 =

241100006 =

241100007 =

241100008 =

TELNET Server Secured IP address FTP Server Port FTP Server Access FTP Server Secured IP address WEB Server Port WEB Server Access 241100009 =

WEB Server Secured IP address

<0(all)|1(none)|2(L an)|3(Wan)>

<0(all)|1(none)|2(L an)|3(Wan)>

<0(all)|1(none)|2(L an) |3(Wan)>

INPUT

= 23

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 21

= 0

= 0.0.0.0

= 80

= 0

= 0.0.0.0 Command Examples The following are example Internal SPTGEN screens associated with the Prestiges command interpreter commands. Table 173 Command Examples FIN FN PVA

/ci command (for annex a): wan adsl opencmd FIN 990000001 =

FN ADSL OPMD

/ci command (for annex B): wan adsl opencmd PVA

<0(glite)|1(t1.413

)|2(gdmt)|3(multim ode)>

INPUT INPUT

= 3 453 Appendix M Table 173 Command Examples (continued) FIN FIN 990000001 =

FN FN ADSL OPMD P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide PVA PVA

<0(etsi)|1(normal)

|2(gdmt)|3(multimo de)>

INPUT INPUT

= 3 Appendix M 454 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide 455 Appendix M Numerics 110V AC 5 230V AC 5 A Abnormal Working Conditions 6 AC 5 Access methods 270 Accessories 5 Acts of God 6 Address Assignment 63 Address mapping 110 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 67 ADSL, what is it? 40 ADSLstandards 42 Airflow 5 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 378 American Wire Gauge 5 Any IP 43, 66 How it works 67 note 67 Any IP Setup 69 Any IP table 201 AP (access point) 422 applicaions Internet access 46 Application-level Firewalls 119 AT command 307 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) 90 ATM layer options 243 Attack Alert 151 Attack Types 123 Authentication 238, 239 Authentication databases 82 authentication databases 294 Authentication protocol 239 AWG 5 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Index B Backup 307 Backup Typ 100 Bandwidth Borrowing 187 bandwidth budget 182 bandwidth capacity 182 Bandwidth Class 182 bandwidth class 182 Bandwidth Filter 183 bandwidth filter 183 Bandwidth Management 182 Bandwidth Management Statistics 193 Bandwidth Manager Class Configuration 190 Bandwidth Manager Class Setup 190 Bandwidth Manager Monitor 194 Bandwidth Manager Summary 188 Basement 5 Blocking Time 150, 151 Borrow bandwidth from parent class 191 Bridging 239, 250 Ether Address 252 Ethernet 250 Ethernet Addr Timeout 251 Remote Node 250 Static Route Setup 252 bridging 215 Brute-force Attack, 122 BSS 420 Budget Management 319, 320 BW Budget 191 C CA 427 Cables, Connecting 5 Call filtering 272 Call filters Built-in 272 User-defined 272 Call Scheduling 338 Maximum Number of Schedule Sets 338 PPPoE 340 Index 456 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Precedence 338 Precedence Example 338 CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) 97 CDR 302 CDR (Call Detail Record) 301 Certificate Authority 427 Certifications 4 change password at login 49 Channel 422 Interference 422 Channel ID 227 CHAP 238 Charge 6 Circuit 3 Class B 3 Class Name 191 Collision 298 Command Interpreter Mode 318 Communications 3 Community 287 compact 45 compact guide 48 Compliance, FCC 3 Components 6 Computer Name 214 Condition 6 Conditions that prevent TFTP and FTP from working over WAN 309 Configuration 63, 200 configuration file 306 Connecting Cables 5 Consequential Damages 6 Contact Information 7 Contacting Customer Support 7 Content Filtering 154 Categories 154 Schedule 156 Tursted computers 156 URL keyword blocking 155 Content filtering 154 content filtering 43 Copyright 2 Correcting Interference 3 Corrosive Liquids 5 Cost Of Transmission 241, 248 Country Code 299 Covers 5 CPU Load 298 CTS (Clear to Send) 423 Custom Ports Creating/Editing 141 457 Customer Support 7 Customized Services 141 Customized services 141 D Damage 5 Dampness 5 Danger 5 Data Filtering 272 data privacy 293 Dealer 3 default LAN IP address 48 Defective 6 Denial of Service 119, 120, 150, 270 Denmark, Contact Information 7 Destination Address 134 Device Filter rules 281 device model number 205 Device rule 281 DHCP 44, 63, 64, 114, 200, 224, 299 DHCP client 44 DHCP relay 44 DHCP server 44, 200, 224 DHCP table 200 diagnostic 202 Diagnostic Tools 296 Disclaimer 2 Discretion 6 Distribution System (DS) 78 DNS 224 Domain Name 63, 107 domain name 214 Domain Name System 63 DoS 120 Basics 120 Types 121 DoS (Denial of Service) 43 DoS attacks, types of 121 DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) 40 DSL line, reinitialize 204 DSL, What Is It? 40 DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) 46 Dust 5 Dynamic DNS 44, 114, 215 dynamic DNS 44, 215 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 44 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 427 Index P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Dynamic WEP key exchange 82 dynamic WEP key exchange 293 DYNDNS Wildcard 114 E EAP 70 EAP Authentication 426 EAP authentication 292 ECHO 106 Electric Shock 5 Electrical Pipes 5 Electrocution 5 E-mail Log Example 180 embedded help 50 Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) 90 Encapsulation 90, 234, 237 ENET ENCAP 90 PPP over Ethernet 90 PPPoA 90 RFC 1483 91 Encryption 428 Equal Value 6 Error Log 300 ESS 421 ESSID (Extended Service Set Identification) 74 Ethernet 355 Europe 5 Exposure 5 Extended Service Set 421 F Failure 6 Fairness-based Scheduler 185 FCC 3 Rules, Part 15 3 FCC Rules 3 Federal Communications Commission 3 Filename Conventions 306 filename conventions 307 Filter 222, 272 Applying Filters 283 Ethernet Traffic 284 Ethernet traffic 284 Filter Rules 275 Filter structure 273 Generic Filter Rule 279 Remote Node 242 Remote Node Filter 242 Remote Node Filters 284 Sample 282 SUA 281 TCP/IP Filter Rule 277 Filter Log 302 Filter Rule Process 273 Filter Rule Setup 276 Filter Set Class 276 Filtering 272, 276 Filtering Process Outgoing Packets 272 Finger 107 Finland, Contact Information 7 Firewall Access Methods 132, 270 Address Type 140 Alerts 135 Anti-Probing 148 Creating/Editing Rules 138 Custom Ports 141 Enabling 135 Firewall Vs Filters 129 Guidelines For Enhancing Security 127 Introduction 119 LAN to WAN Rules 134 Policies 132 Remote Management 270 Rule Checklist 133 Rule Logic 133 Rule Security Ramifications 133 Services 146 SMT menus 270 Types 118 When To Use 129 firmware 205, 306 upgrade 205 upload 205 upload error 206 Fitness 6 Fragment Threshold 227 Fragmentation Threshold 423 Fragmentation threshold 423 France, Contact Information 7 FTP 106, 158, 325 Restrictions 325 FTP File Transfer 313 FTP Restrictions 158, 309 FTP Server 264 Full Rate 398 Functionally Equivalent 6 Index 458 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide G Gas Pipes 5 Gateway 248 Gateway Node 252 General Setup 214 Generic filter 281 Germany, Contact Information 7 God, act of 6 H Half-Open Sessions 150 Harmful Interference 3 Hidden Menus 210 Hidden node 422 High Voltage Points 5 Hop Count 241, 248 Host 53 Host IDs 376 HTTP 107, 119, 120, 121 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) 205 I IANA 65 IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) 141 IBSS 420 ICMP echo 123 Idle timeout 239 IEEE 802.11g 45, 424 IEEE 802.11i 45 IEEE802.1x 292 IGMP 66 IGMP support 241 Independent Basic Service Set 420 Indirect Damages 6 initialization vector (IV) 428 Install UPnP 164 Windows Me 164 Windows XP 166 Insurance 6 Integrated Services Digital Network 42 Interactive Applications 328 Interference 3 Interference Correction Measures 3 Interference Statement 3 Internal SPTGEN 430 FTP Upload Example 432 Points to Remember 430 Text File 430 Internet Access 43, 46, 230, 233, 234 Internet access 54, 230 Internet Access Setup 254, 343 Internet access wizard setup 54 Internet Assigned Numbers AuthoritySee IANA 65 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) 123, 148 IP Address 64, 106, 200, 224, 248, 252, 278, 299, 304, 330 IP Address Assignment 91 ENET ENCAP 92 PPPoA or PPPoE 91 RFC 1483 92 IP Addressing 376 IP alias 44, 230 IP Alias Setup 231 IP Classes 376 IP Filter 279 Logic Flow 278 IP mask 277 IP Packet 279 IP Policies 332 IP policy 230 IP policy routing 328 IP Policy Routing (IPPR) 44, 230 Applying an IP Policy 332 Ethernet IP Policies 332 Gateway 332 IP Pool Setup 63 IP Protocol 331 IP protocol 328 IP protocol type 146 IP Routing Policy (IPPR) 328 Benefits 328 Cost Savings 328 Criteria 328 Load Sharing 328 Setup 329 IP Spoofing 121, 124 IP Static Route 246 IP Static Route Setup 247 ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) 42 K Key Fields For Configuring Rules 134 459 Index Key management protocol 293 L Labor 6 LAN 297 LAN Setup 62, 90 LAN TCP/IP 64 LAN to WAN Rules 134 LAND 121, 122 Legal Rights 6 Liability 2 License 2 Lightning 5 Link type 297 Liquids, Corrosive 5 LLC-based Multiplexing 243 Local Network Rule Summary 136 Local User Database 294 Local user database 85 Log and Trace 300 Log Facility 301 Logging Option 278, 281 Logical networks 230 Login 238 Logs 176 M MAC (Media Access Control) 200 MAC (Media Access Control) address. 75 MAC address 252 MAC Address Filter 227 MAC address filter 227 Filter action 228 MAC Address Filter Action 76, 228 MAC Address Filtering 75 MAC filter 71 Main Menu 211 maintenance 196 management idle timeout period 49 Management Information Base (MIB) 287 Materials 6 Maximize Bandwidth Usage 185 Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 94, 97 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Max-incomplete High 150 Max-incomplete Low 150 MBSSee Maximum Burst Size 234 Media Access Control 250 Media Bandwidth Management 43 Merchantability 6 Message Integrity Check (MIC) 428 Message Logging 300 Metric 92, 241, 248 MSDU (MAC Service Data Unit) 227 Multicast 66, 241 Multiplexing 91, 234, 237 multiplexing 91 LLC-based 91 VC-based 91 Multiprotocol Encapsulation 91 My WAN Address 240 N Nailed-Up Connection 92 NAT 64, 106, 107, 281 Address mapping rule 111 Application 104 Applying NAT in the SMT Menus 254 Configuring 256 Definitions 102 Examples 261 How it works 103 Mapping Types 105 Non NAT Friendly Application Programs 267 Ordering Rules 259 What it does 103 What NAT does 103 NAT (Network Address Translation) 102 NAT mode 108 NAT Traversal 162 navigating the web configurator 50 NetBIOS commands 123 Network Address Translation 234 Network Address Translation (NAT) 44, 254 Network Management 107 New 6 NNTP 107 North America 5 North America Contact Information 7 Norway, Contact Information 7 Index 460 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide O One-Minute High 150 Opening 5 Operating Condition 6 Operating frequency 227 Out-dated Warranty 6 Outlet 3 P PPP Log 303 PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) 90 PPPoA 237 PPPoE 93, 402 Benefits 93 PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) 44, 93 PPPoE pass-through 245 PPTP 107 Preamble Mode 424 Precedence 328, 331 Pre-Shared Key 293 Format 77 Packet Error 297 Received 297 Transmitted 297 Packet Filtering 129 Packet filtering When to use 129 Packet Filtering Firewalls 118 Packet Triggered 302 Packets 297 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 428 PAP 239 Parts 6 Password 208, 212, 238, 287 password 208 Patent 2 Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 94, 97 Permission 2 Photocopying 2 Ping 304 Ping of Death 121 Pipes 5 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

(AAL5) 90 Point-to-Point 40 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 107 policy-based routing 328 Pool 5 POP3 107, 120, 121 Port Numbers 106 Postage Prepaid. 6 Power Adaptor 5 Power Cord 5 Power Outlet 5 Power Supply 5 Power Supply, repair 5 PPP Encapsulation 243 Prestige model 306 Priority 191 Priority-based Scheduler 185 Private 241, 248 Product Model 7 Product Page 4 Product Serial Number 7 Products 6 Proof of Purchase 6 Proper Operating Condition 6 Proportional Bandwidth Allocation 183 Protocol 277 Protocol filter 281 Protocol Filter Rules 281 PSK 293 Purchase, Proof of 6 Purchaser 6 PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) 90 Q Qualified Service Personnel 5 Quality of Service 328 Quick Start Guide 38 R Radio Communications 3 Radio frequency 74 Radio Frequency Energy 3 Radio Interference 3 Radio Reception 3 Radio Technician 3 461 Index RADIUS 425 Configuring 87 Shared Secret Key 426 RADIUS Message Types 425 RADIUS Messages 425 RADIUS server 290 RAS 299, 329 Rate Receiving 297 Transmission 297 real-time application 182 Receiving Antenna 3 Registered 2 Registered Trademark 2 Regular Mail 7 reinitialize the ADSL line 204 Related Documentation 38 Relocate 3 Re-manufactured 6 Remote DHCP Server 224 Remote Management Firewall 270 Remote Management and NAT 159 Remote Management Limitations 158, 325 Remote Management Setup 324 Remote Node 236, 297 Remote Node Profile 238 Remote Node Setup 236 Remote node 236 Remote Node Index Number 297 Removing 5 Reorient 3 Repair 5, 6 Replace 6 Replacement 6 Reproduction 2 Required fields 211 Reset button, the 49 resetting the Prestige 49 Restore 6 Restore Configuration 311 Return Material Authorization (RMA) Number 6 Returned Products 6 Returns 6 RF (Radio Frequency) 45 RFC 1483 91 RFC 1631 102 RFC-1483 237 RFC-2364 237, 238 RFC2516 44 Rights 2 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Rights, Legal 6 RIP 224, 241 RIPSee Routing Information Protocol 65 Risk 5 Risks 5 RMA 6 romfile 306 Root Class 190 Routing 230 Routing Information Protocol 65 Direction 65 Version 65 Routing Policy 328 RTS (Request To Send) 423 RTS (Request To Send) threshold 74 RTS Threshold 227, 422, 423 RTS(Request To Send) 227 Rule Summary 136 Rules 134 Checklist 133 Key Fields 134 LAN to WAN 134 Logic 133 Predefined Services 146 Summary 136 S Safety Warnings 5 Sample IP Addresses 241 Saving the State 124 Schedule Sets Duration 339 Scheduler 185 SCRSee Sustain Cell Rate 234 Security In General 128 Security Parameters 429 Security Ramifications 133 Separation Between Equipment and Receiver 3 Serial Number 7 Server 105, 256, 258, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 321 Server behind NAT 260 Service 5, 6, 134 Service Personnel 5 Service Type 142, 343 Services 106 setup a schedule 339 Shared secret 88, 291 Shipping 6 Index 462 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide Shock, Electric 5 SMT Menu Overview 209 SMTP 107 SMTP Error Messages 179 Smurf 122, 123 SNMP 107 Community 288 Configuration 287 Get 287 GetNext 287 Manager 286 MIBs 287 Set 287 Trap 287 Trusted Host 288 System Information 298 System Status 296 System Information 298 System Information & Diagnosis 296 System Maintenance 296, 298, 307, 310, 315, 318, 319, 321 System Management Terminal 210 System Parameter Table Generator 430 System password 290 System Security 290 System Status 297 System Timeout 159, 326 Source Address 134, 140 Source-Based Routing 328 Spain, Contact Information 7 Splitters 398 Stateful Inspection 43, 118, 119, 124, 125 Prestige 126 Process 125 Static route 246 Static Routing Topology 246 SUA 106, 107 SUA (Single User Account) 106, 254 SUA server 106, 108 Default server set 106 SUA vs NAT 106 SUA/NAT Server Set 109 Sub-class Layers 190 Subnet Mask 64, 140, 224, 240, 248, 299 Subnet Masks 377 Subnetting 377 Supply Voltage 5 Support E-mail 7 Supporting Disk 38 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) 97 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 94 Sweden, Contact Information 7 Swimming Pool 5 SYN Flood 121, 122 SYN-ACK 122 Syntax Conventions 38 Syslog 146, 301 Syslog IP Address 301 Syslog Server 301 System Console Port Speed 299 Diagnostic 303 Log and Trace 300 Syslog and Accounting 301 T Tampering 6 TCP Maximum Incomplete 150, 151 TCP Security 126 TCP/IP 120, 121, 159, 281, 304 Teardrop 121 Telecommunication Line Cord. 5 Telephone 7 Television Interference 3 Television Reception 3 Telnet 159, 208 Telnet Configuration 159 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 428 Text File Format 430 TFTP Restrictions 325 TFTP File Transfer 315 TFTP Restrictions 158, 309 Three-Way Handshake 122 Threshold Values 150 Thunderstorm 5 Time and Date Setting 320, 321 Time Zone 322 Timeout 219 TOS (Type of Service) 328 Trace Records 300 Traceroute 124 Trademark 2 Trademark Owners 2 Trademarks 2 Traffic Redirect 98, 99 Setup 219 Traffic redirect 98, 101 traffic redirect 43 463 Index Traffic shaping 93 Translation 2 Transmission Rates 43 TV Technician 3 Type of Service 328, 330, 331, 332 U UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) 97 UDP/ICMP Security 127 Undesired Operations 3 Universal Plug and Play 162 Application 162 Security issues 163 Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) 44 Universal Plug and Play Forum 163 UNIX Syslog 300, 301 UNIX syslog parameters 301 Upload Firmware 313 UPnP 162 Upper Layer Protocols 126, 127 User Authentication 428 User Name 115 User Profiles 85 user profiles 294 V Value 6 VBR (Variable Bit Rate) 97 VC-based Multiplexing 237 Vendor 5 Ventilation Slots 5 Viewing Certifications 4 Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) 91 virtual circuit (VC) 91 Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) 91 Voice-over-IP (VoIP) 182 Voltage Supply 5 Voltage, High 5 VPI & VCI 91 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide W Wall Mount 5 WAN (Wide Area Network) 90 WAN backup 99 WAN Setup 218 WAN to LAN Rules 134 Warnings 5 Warranty 6 Warranty Information 7 Warranty Period 6 Water 5 Water Pipes 5 Web Configurator 48, 50, 119, 127, 134, 271 web configurator screen summary 50 Web Site 7 WEP Default Key 227 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 45, 75, 227 WEP Encryption 227 WEP encryption 73 Wet Basement 5 Wi-Fi Protected Access 77 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 45 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants 79 Wireless LAN 226 Configuring 73 Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering 45 Wireless LAN Setup 226 Wireless port control 80, 293 Wireless security 70 WLAN Interference 422 Security parameters 429 Workmanship 6 Worldwide Contact Information 7 WPA 77, 293 Supplicants 79 with RADIUS Application Example 78 WPA Mixed Mode 293 WPA -Pre-Shared Key 77 WPA with RADIUS Application 78 WPA-PSK 77 WPA-PSK Application 77 Written Permission 2 Index 464 P-660H/HW/W-T Series User Guide X XMODEM protocol 307 Z Zero Configuration Internet Access 43 Zero configuration Internet access 94 ZyNOS 2, 307 ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 306 ZyNOS F/W Version 307 ZyXEL Communications Corporation 2 ZyXEL Home Page 4 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 6 ZyXEL Network Operating System 2 ZyXEL_s Firewall Introduction 119 465 Index